Home

R&S®FSW-K10 GSM Measurements User Manual

1. Band Class UL Freq DL Freq Freq Band UL DL Shift ARFCN MHz MHz Middle Lower Upper Lower Upper UL DL Range 1 Range 2 T GSM 380 380 2 389 8 390 2 399 8 385 0 395 0 10 MHz 0 48 T GSM 410 410 2 419 8 420 2 429 8 415 0 425 0 10 MHz 0 48 GSM 450 450 4 457 6 460 4 467 6 454 0 464 0 10 MHz 259 293 GSM 480 478 8 486 0 488 8 496 0 482 4 492 4 10 MHz 306 340 GSM 710 698 0 716 0 728 0 746 0 707 0 737 0 30 MHz 0 90 GSM 750 747 0 762 0 777 0 792 0 754 5 784 5 30 MHz 438 511 T GSM 810 806 0 821 0 851 0 866 0 813 5 858 5 45 MHz 0 75 GSM 850 824 0 849 0 869 0 894 0 836 5 8815 45 MHz 128 251 P GSM 900 890 0 915 0 935 0 960 0 902 5 947 5 45 MHz 1 124 E GSM 900 880 0 915 0 925 0 960 0 897 5 942 5 45 MHz 0 124 975 1023 R GSM 900 876 0 915 0 921 0 960 0 895 5 940 5 45 MHz 0 124 955 1023 T GSM 900 870 4 876 0 915 4 921 0 873 2 918 2 45 MHz 0 281 DCS 1800 1710 0 1785 0 1805 0 1880 0 1747 5 1842 5 95 MHz 512 885 PCS 1900 1850 0 1910 0 1930 0 1990 0 1880 0 1960 0 80 MHz 512 810 1 For these frequency bands there is no fixed ARFCN to frequency assignment instead it is calculated with a formula taking an OFFSET parameter which is signaled by a higher layer of the network The given ARFCNs assume an OFFSET value of 0 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Ev
2. eese 204 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements eee 267 Analyzing GSM Measurements eese eene nnn nnn nnns 274 Retrieving Results octets deep uei deg 296 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results eee 345 Status Reporting System eeesseeeseeeseeeeeneneen nennen nnne nnn nnne nennen 346 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 4 11 11 Troubleehooting eeuEEEEEEESSEEEEEEESEEEREEEEESEEEREEEEESEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEESEEEEEEEEERNEEEEEEEEEEER 355 11 12 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility 356 11 13 Programming Examples essere nennen nennen nnne nnne nennen 365 S uoc pl et 379 A T Listof abbreviations eene dieti or ei rarae E ERE Ie E Range usan 379 A 2 VQ Data File Format iq tar useeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeneeen nenne enne ennt nnns 380 List of Remote Commands GSWM cesses 386 395 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This GSM Measurements User Manual provides all the information specific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus
3. sesssssss 30 Transient Spectrum Table AA 31 Trigger to Sync Graph i iint ee 32 Trigger to Sync Table orent 34 Result summary Trace Cala E 301 Results Data format remote AN 297 EVM remote e 301 Magnitude Capture rre teeters 301 Magnitude Capture remote 302 303 Magnitude Error remote AAA 301 MCWN Spectrum Graph remote 303 Modulaiton Accuracy remote sssss 305 Modulation Spectrum Graph remote 302 Modulation Spectrum Table remote ve 3415 per slot ierit se 199 Phase Error remote 301 Power vs Slot remote 318 PvT Full Burst remote 902 Reference Der cree rennes 128 Reference slot orent net reete 128 Result summary 2 5 901 Trace data query remote 301 Transient Spectrum remote 302 Transient Spectrum Table remote 326 Trigger to Sync remote 903 Updating the display nene 126 Updating the display remote sssss 293 RF attenuation PULO utet HUP deret ue rod eene sissies 113 153 Manual eren rete rts 113 153 RFE INDU noires 102 146 Connector remote rn rette tt 220 Overload protection remote sssssss 220 E ue 220 222 RF Power Ec 119 159 Trigger level remote sees 242 RUN CONT M
4. 60 98 lac 60 Pulse filler etre ioter rrt 98 GPRS teet im ere Pete db n e E RR 49 379 EE 46 379 Measurements 1 1 err reet titre nens 17 EIER 67 H Hardware settings Displayed E 13 MEWN RE 14 High pass filter une 221 RF input 103 148 Higher symbol noct esent th rr remet een 46 62 globe a AR TEREE 49 379 HSR Higher symbol rate sese 46 49 Hysteresis daer GE 120 160 l I Q correlation threshold isaisa 131 1 Q data Export file binary data description 384 Export file parameter description E ee ue cet iio n rre tease eee EE PCR mE Exporting Biel EE Exporting Importing Importing Importing remote Irnporting Exporting s eornm nene knees UO Power JTIEIGge uite cs cce reer seer ree caetero rete err errr 119 Trigger level remote seeeeesse 241 SE 379 IF Power lee OF us tectis Trigger level remote Impedance REMO uices rerit eria eege eerste 222 iffe MEE 103 Importing ef UO data remote SOMNKEY TL Inner IM Table Result display usc onde onte eon ee 38 Inner Narrow Band Table Result display ee tete e eet etc 40 Inner Spectrum Table Result display 35 35 eoe tentem eer ete tiri ie 42 Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 106 ele ue ele TE a Configuration remote Connector remote elle E
5. XN PvT frequency response DT PVT St p TesportSe ceee retenti terr te reed pc 57 Resolution Spectrum results i 135 Signal flow GSMi rere ennt ten 56 Transient Spectrum i 135 dE EE 222 Format Data remote 2 nbi 297 licum M 47 V elle UCL ER Configuration Auto Set n139 Configuration automatic remote 265 IUE 47 SEARCHING c 52 EN M 47 Free Run le GT Frequency Tu E Bands GSM standard Bands ET GalTiets eegen Configuration MCWN Configuration remote Configuration Softkey HOPPING E List Modulation Spectrum Table 136 List Spa SO x Gestione edt te eed 136 List Sample rate S i List Spectrum limit lines vinissi 135 MEWN Eent 268 Offset sone 2 142 151 Rr 150 Start E ki 150 Frequency sweep measurements efe myrto UL g Info PE 139 Selecting EE 139 Frontend Gonfiguratini pii reitera Configuration remote iss MCOWN remote crede de etat Full scale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 227 228 Digital Me ET 105 Digital UO remote a Unit digital UO remote G Gap ele 101 146 Gating f ea 118 46 49 379 Ee 58
6. KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board 1 3 3 Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led T
7. t iT 2 5T The transmitted signal for a sequence of symbols 5 3 where c t the transmit pulse which may be either the narrow or wide pulse Note that the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 5 5 Pulse shaping for higher symbol rate burst QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure 3 This is also the start of the symbol period of symbol number 0 containing the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The transmitted pulse for the first tail symbol is illustrated at the bottom of figure 5 14 where you can see that the decision instant corresponding to the center of the trans mit pulse occurs in the center of the first symbol period i e at t 0 5T EDGE Evo Transmit Pulses Narrow Pulse Wide Pulse Amplitude normalized Time Reduced Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Amplitude Narrow Pulse 1 7 Wide Pulse Amplitude normalized e e Time Reduced Symbol Periods Fig 5 14 EDGE Evolution transmit pulses top and the first transmitted symbols bottom 5 10 Synchronization In order to detect and distinguish the individual slots and frames in the measured sig nal the known signal sequence Sync or TSC must be found in each frame Synchronization The synchronization process in the R amp S FSW GSM application depends on how or if the measurement is triggered Synchroni
8. essen rennen rennen 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation essent 312 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress AVERQge nennen rennen nennen 313 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress CURREM A 313 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress MAXimum eee eee rennen ntn tnn E EENE ENSE 313 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbpress GDEViatton A 313 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile EVMY ione teer etr terrent n ra err rr eras 313 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile MERROr FETCRh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile PERROI annee roter ren tnr rns 314 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERor PEARK AVERaoed enne nre neeen nennen een 314 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRIE ccccsucescenesnceserssenessteneenceensoseeguneescensenensietestnenee 314 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum eessseessesseeeeenneennen nennen enne trennen 314 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation essen nnns 314 FETOH BURG MAC CuracvlPERor RMG AVEHage nennen nnne nnnm 315 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURREM AAA 315 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum esses ener rennes 315 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation esee 315 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage seen nennen 309 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent
9. n 126 162 RUN SINGLE c arene 126 163 S elle Digital UO Digital UO remote Optimizing EI ue EE Scaling le TE 176 KEE 175 176 SCPIR i remote Control cis iacu tn nno kac E crea itae en Select Marker iiie castes sr tpi se dci Eege ENEE Select meas Sequence estimator Sequencer NEE eech 12 85 Aborting remote 3 5 Segel Seege ere event 251 Activating remote x291 lj m ec 86 Mode remote 2 dietis ei 251 MSRA 4 GSM 4i in nera prre et gei s 84 Remote 249 Softkey 86 State a86 WEE 979 SFH Slow frequency hopping esssss 47 Signal capturing D rat seriis siisii hinari dreon anette 123 Duration remote ente 246 247 see also Data acquisition s is 122 Signal Ee e e TE 90 MEWN E 142 MOWN remote 2 1 iere teet ret 267 Signal source Ee incen edid eed eta eerte ds 222 Single Sequencer STEEN dee 86 Single sweep Softkey Single zoom Slope due GE IOUS och EET pei c Active remote Active part Configuration Display Equal length First slot to Measure ccccecceeesseeeeeeeeeesteeeeees 95 129 FitSt To measUre ise teet 53 129 254 Limit line alignment rni tr 133 Multiple 2 2 Number to measure Parameters dependency Tee zs Scope configuriri
10. Max Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum APEak on page 288 Y Axis Scaling Access Overview Result Config Scaling or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config gt Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis in most graphical displays is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These settings are described here esult Configuration Automatic grid scaling Traces Auto Marker Scaling Automate Gnd Ssallfitj E 176 Absolute Scaling Min Max Values sess 176 Relative Scaling Reference per Division 176 EEN 176 uu iy 7v Ey 176 D RU NNNM 176 Zoom Functions Automatic Grid Scaling The y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement settings and results Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO on page 289 Absolute Scaling Min Max Values Define the scaling using absolute minimum and maximum values Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum on page 289 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum on page 290 Relative Scaling Reference per Division Define the scaling relative to a reference value with a specified value range per divi sion Per Division Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines t
11. Manual operation See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 See Trace Mode on page 170 11 7 2 2 Analyzing GSM Measurements Table 11 4 Available traces and trace modes for the result diplays Measurement Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Magnitude Capture WRITe 7 Constellation Graph EVM AVERage MAXHold MINHold WRITe Phase Error Magnitude Error PvT Full Burst Modulation Spectrum Graph AVERage WRITe Transient Spectrum Graph Trigger to Sync WRITe PDFavg histogram Spectrum Graph MCWN mode AVERage Marker Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Up to 4 markers can be configured e Individual Marker Gettngs AAA 285 e General Marker Selllligs cc cnet ee e et tro c dde ove e descr eed 287 e Marker Positioning Set ngs ise zitt cei ei e 287 Individual Marker Settings In GSM evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time the following commandas are required to configure the markers Te DE RT EE lt m gt AOF E 285 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATE cccccecececneeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeeeaeeaeeeeaneneaeae 286 CALCulate nz DEL Tamarkercmz TR ACe nen ss nsn en esas estin sisse nnns sans 286 E e E EE RR KE 286 CAL Culate lt n MARKer lt m gt TEE 286 CAL Culate nz M bkercmz TR A
12. 600 kHz Magnitude dB 15 Time us Fig 5 9 Step Response of the Power vs Time Filters Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application 5 7 2 Multicarrier Filter The Multicarrier filter is a special PVT filter that is applied to the captured data if the device is defined as a multicarrier type This filter is used to suppress neighboring channels which may disturb measurement of the channel of interest The output from the Multicarrier filter is used to perform synchronization and demodulation The fre quency response of the Multicarrier filter is shown in figure 5 10 Magnitude Response of the Multi Carrier Filter Passband Detail LL I 1 Magnitude dB lI d 0 Frequency kHz Fig 5 10 Frequency Response of the Multicarrier Filter 5 7 3 Measurement Filter The Measurement filter is used to limit the bandwidth of the demodulation measure ments and is described in the 3GPP standard document TS 45 005 for QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM as follows e araised cosine filter with roll off 0 25 and single side band 6 dB bandwidth 90 kHz for normal symbol rate and for higher symbol rate using narrow bandwidth pulse shaping filter e araised cosine filter with roll off 0 25 and single side band 6 dB bandwidth 108 kHz for higher symbol rate using wide bandwidth pulse shaping filter In addition to these filters a Measurement filter for GMSK is used in the R amp S FSW GSM application to
13. Select Measurement Fig 6 4 Configuration Overview for MCWN measurement In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 6 4 3 Signal Description on page 142 2 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 6 4 4 Input and Frontend Settings on page 146 3 Triggering See chapter 6 4 5 Trigger Settings on page 156 4 Data Acquisition See chapter 6 4 6 Sweep Settings on page 162 5 Reference Measurement Settings 6 4 3 6 4 3 1 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements See chapter 6 4 7 Reference Measurement Settings on page 163 6 Noise Measurement Settings See chapter 6 4 8 Noise Measurement Settings on page 166 7 Result Configuration See chapter 7 1 Result Configuration on page 169 8 Display Configuration See chapter 6 2 Display Configuration on page 87 To configure settings gt Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box The corresponding dialog box is open
14. entre 134 Activating GOMX femole utin tre cet eerie Eee 198 Active probe Oe eg Em 109 Adaptive DataiSIze rui inerenti cn neto 138 Alignment Bug EE 133 Amplitude Configuration remote Configuration Softkey D Gu E Analog Baseband le due EE 106 Analog Baseband B71 VQ MOJE iiec e rr terrere renes 107 Input type remote control seee 228 Analog Baseband Interface B71 Input settings err rire nenne 106 Analysis Bandwidth cci c eee cedo rec ev entres 123 UE MSc cS 169 Analysis interval Configuration MSRA remote sss 291 MSRA undici eene ens 124 246 ANALYSIS liie croce irre rore rnt er nero enr 83 Configuration MSRA remote ssssssss 291 Le 50 51 379 Constellation diagram nsss snuro 52 Dire V TEE 98 ABREGCN cec nia comete eret 47 111 233 379 GSM standard iioc ee serene rent 48 Attenuation AUTO iiec Configuration remote EICONIG t 114 153 EI 113 153 Mechanical sinesend aea aeaiiai 113 153 Option L Protective remole EE 220 Auto frame configuration Ee m 265 Auto frequency Ee EE Auto level itr ened cit creat av tis eae Reference level ni loc M M Ce ET Auto track time Ee en e RE Auto trigger offset Automatic COMMQUIATION EE Configuration remote esee 265 Band class E Ingo NR P 205 206 Bandwidth AI CI EA 123 Coverage MSRA mode 83
15. Set User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Query User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Set slot 4 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTA4 STATe OFF Set slot 5 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF Set slot 6 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF Set slot 7 Off CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF Eeer Demodulation and Slot Scope Configure slot 1 slot to measure for single slot measurements e g EVM modulation spectrum CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure 1 Configure slots 0 3 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient spectrum Set First slot to measure 0 Set No of slots to measure 4 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 4 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence Replace detected Tail amp TSC bits by the standard bits CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits STD SssseSses PvT Measurement settings Use Gaussian PvT filter with 500 kHz for single carrier BTS Programming Examples CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer G500 Align the limit line to mid of TSC for each slot CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALign PSL fPoasssssss Spectrum Measurement settings Absolute power and limit remote results i
16. rtt eer pp eee rr ren eere I E een Eee dro ER dona GONFigure T RGS NOFBITS eio ron hn crt tren re rre er t a m ERE ER FR EXER FER RR RR E FE eH ea GONFigure t RGSEIMMediate ccrta emere eE EE E MM FEY HI eM E Y CXN E ER esd OEE GONFigure WSPectrum MObDulation LIM T siue ntn ta rn nth enne rn rnnt nian GONFigure WSPectrum MODulatiori IS T SEL6eGtL ieer ror rera ier tinh 263 CONFigure WSPectrum MObDu lation IMMediate erano otn n re eren pnr rone thee o tune 357 CONFigure MS ARFCn d CONFig re MS AUTO FRAME ONCGPE cr tnn to tnr ea tbt eh err Prnt erre rec E ER CE Yo ERR ag 265 CONFigurebMSEAUTODEMSLONGE nro pxerenpt sro e rene XY pee nea er oed o Pep to tease bat EEEE x o dr emat 266 CONEFigure MS AUTO TRIGGEr eler 266 CONFigure MS BSEarch CONFigure MS BSTHreshold GONFigureE MSI CHANnel FRAMe EQUAal uta rrr erre ron hn rent ern 209 GONFigure MS CHANnelMSLots MEASUre ia conet eher ttr riae rro reno tk ach crore ation 254 CONFigure MSICHANneEMSLots NOF Slots inrer ten terrent ht n rr tpa erras 254 CONFigureE MSI CHANnelMSLots OFF Sel ntt rrr enana rer t T ER a 254 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT N mber FILTer ueaen ornant rrt nnne nk een tnter 210 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number MT YP centre t rtt eene eines 211 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number TADVance essent ren
17. uses ener tnt rtr rn te et neon i excu tones ek erc ERE sarah 338 FETCh WSPectrum REFerence POWer AEL cett rer t rire en ea genae exe en 339 FETCh WSPectrum WlIDeband INNer ALIC uoa ton tnnt t terr hte eere ir tenen 340 FETCh WSPectrum WIDeband OU Ter ALI oorr cute tags tege teg pe nete ee n tn epe obruta 342 FORMatDEXPort DSEPafalor rrr reete tr teret eoe ri rev gen dh ee Peer di ERE EE es 297 FORMatliDATA E 297 INITiate DISPlay 250 dying Eeer EE 249 INimatesn gt CONTINUOUS tee 249 INETiatesmis REFERS E 293 INI Tiatesmz SEQUuencer ABORE iato Erie cr iere crecieron pe ient Eod FEES 251 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate AAA 251 ll NEI E ee ele KEE 251 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate INPUEAT TE TEE INPut AT Tenuation AUTO WE 237 INPut AT Tenuation PROTection e 220 Tiet NPU GOURIN E INPut DIG GDEVIGG 5 ai esce de rrr e on drca er rer Le red Ec E e e XY NANETA KEI EENE INPut DIQ RANGe COUPIling INPULDIO RANGE UPPER EE INPut DIG RANGe UPP r AUTO nene nro pere eerte os eer EES Re EO eee hasnt S 225 INPut iDIG RANGe HE Eer UNIT seiersen resendata a Pa Een Fen EETR EEEa CEN eS osa STR ETE ENE 226 INPO aile ci iur ea E 226 INPULDIQ SRATCIAUT e 226 VIN PUES DAT E 221 INPUGEAT EE 237 INPUTIEA TTT PEE 238 UNENEE T STAT 6 EET 238 INPutFIETeC HPASSES ATO rtt cher rep chi ee ern teer Cer eee eee decr dpt t ee DINER 22
18. 12 201 Activating GSM Measurements lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN TQAnalyzer2 IQAnalyzer3 Renames the channel with the name IQAnalyzer2 to IQAna lyzer3 Usage Setting only INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 199 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt GSM GSM application R amp S FSW K10 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 90 SYSTem SEQuencer lt State gt This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Selecting the Measurement Parameters lt State
19. FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum essere nennen rennen 309 FETOH BURG MAC Curacvll EVMIPEAR GD Viaton AA 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage sees ceeeeeeaeeseeseaeeseaeseaeeseeeesneeseneees 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent esses nen ssania rennen nnns 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum esses enne nre nnennnee neret rennen 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation eese 310 FETCh MCAPture SLOTs MEASure FETCh MCAPture Leger rrt dre re ep err d xe E REX AR EX Re d EE a 304 FETCh SPECtrum MODUulation LIMiE e eo irren rr tree ri Peres 334 FETCh SPEGtmum MODulati n REESFGrIGe is scorre TEE AEE RR RR REP ELSE RETES 317 FETCh SPEGtrum MODUlation ALLE eieer t t rrt tte rette rte kr ro tre te eps 316 FETGh SPEGtrum SWITching REFer nceT iiec torret teet rir rrt eere e REI Dr EHE RR 327 FETCH SPEC tum SVT CMI ALLY em 326 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRodu cts INNer ALL cient nr nere een 335 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts OUTer ALL 5 72 ctr ett reno rhe err treinta e erre 336 FETCRh WSPectriumiMObBulatioi REFereriCe oco treo cero roter epe ey RE Reha nale X See ERI EEN 364 FETCh WSPectrum MODulation ALL 5 ertt rtp tre e Eee ene tp re nnn 363 FETCh WSPectrum NARRow INNer ALL 337 FETCh WsPectrum NARROWSOU T erEALL
20. In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal In such mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer always uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 221 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 221 6 4 4
21. Power vs Time Average Max Hold Min Hold Clear Write EVM vs Time Phase Error vs Time Magnitude Error vs Time Constellation Graph Clear Write Modulation Spectrum Graph Average Clear Write Result Configuration Result display Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Transient Spectrum Graph Max Hold Clear Write Trigger to Sync Graph Histogram PDF of Average The trace settings are configured in the Trace dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select the Result Config button then switch to the Traces tab Traces Marker Scaling Quick Config renne S 1 Magnitude Capture gt Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 esssssesseseee eene nennen nennen nnne 170 Tace ee I m TUTTI 170 Preset All TIG68S uiai cci eee rr Ir nk n el ersc uk eedeci sx Vienn Ee A A TIN DER Ra 171 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Goftkeys 171 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t STATe on page 283 Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe t commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces The available trace modes depend on the selected result display Not all evaluations support all trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten
22. The PvT Full Burst result display shows the power vs time trace where the time axis corresponds to the selected slot scope The PvT mask is indicated by red lines and the overall result of the limit check is shown at the top of the diagram Note The result of the Power vs Time limit check for individual slots is indicated in the Power vs Slot on page 27 evaluation R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Avg e2 Max 3 Min e4 Clrw 127 385 us 1 254 ms Note Full burst refers to the fact that the entire burst is displayed including the rising and falling edges and the burst top However you can easily analyze the edges in more detail using the zoom functions see chapter 7 2 Zoom Functions on page 176 The following default settings are used for a Power vs Time evaluation Table 4 8 Default settings for a Power vs Time evaluation Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot scope defined by First Slot to measure and Number of Slots to mea sure Averaging Configuration Number of bursts as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check According to standard e The maximum Max trace is checked agains the upper limit e The minimum Min trace is checked against the lower limit See chapter 5 13 3 Limit Check for Power vs Time Results on page 70 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PTF see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 298
23. The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute measurement frequency For contiguous carrier allocation or if narrowband noise measurement is disabled this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH INAR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results FETCh WSPectrum NARRow INNer ALL on page 337 Outer Narrowband Table Displays the measured distortion products for the frequencies outside of the subblocks but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier allocation The measurement is gated according to the standard 50 to 90 of the useful part of the time slot excluding the mid amble in the outermost carriers If no bursts are found a warning is issued in the status bar and the measurement results are not valid The limits are calculated by cumulating the individual limit lines of each active carrier Frequencies falling onto theoretical intermodulation products receive an extra relaxa tion R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays JEE Ref Level 0 00 dBm Device Band MC BTS Wide Area E GSM 900 Att 10dB Carriers 6 Ref Meas Auto 1 Spectrum Graph Start 943 0 MHz 10001 pts 1 4 MHz Stop 957 0 MHz 2 Outer Narrow Band Table Meas Freq Power a Offset MHz Freq MHz RBW kHz dB dBm amp to Limit 3 Inner Narrow Band Table Meas Freq Offset MHz Freq MHz RBW kHz For each of the following regions the parameters described in Narrowband noise results are shown e frequencies to the left of
24. lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range Osto 10 0s RST 0s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 120 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Offset gt Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters Offset RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 120 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 121 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 120 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the optional Digital Baseband Interface and the optional
25. 2 cuna cc cea o cott aerei esed re RE auus 334 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoductsINNer AL UI 335 FETCH WSPectrumilMPRoducts OUTS ALL aisi airo rte ttt EES 336 FETCh WSPectrum NARRoOw INNerm ALL iuuat accro teret nen en dune 337 FETCh WSPectrum NARRow OUTer ALL cccseecececeeeeeeececeteneecncanneaeaesenendeceeeteranenens 338 FE TChW bechum RFerence POVWert ALT 339 FEIChAWSPestrum WiDebandNNer ALL currat cde eer NEEN 340 FETCh WSPectrum WiIDeband OUTer ALL 2 21 iota eiconsectet oto 342 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt CURR This command queries the number of bands with exceptions to the limit line that occur red for the specified limit check in the selected measurement window Suffix lt k gt 112 The number of the limit check to query 1 Limit check for wideband noise 2 Limit check for intermodulation at 100 kHz no exceptions allowed 3 Limit check for intermodulation at 300 kHz no exceptions allowed 4 Limit line for narrowband noise no exceptions allowed 5 Exceptions in subblock A 6 Exceptions in subblock B Retrieving Results Return values lt NoExcept gt integer Number of exceptions Example CALCulate2 LIMit1 EXC COUN CURR Queries the number of bands with exceptions to the limit line check that occurred for wideband noise in window 2 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers
26. If enabled narrowband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Note that narrowband noise measurement is only available for multicarrier device types see Device Type on page 91 for which at least 2 carriers are configured see chap ter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 Narrowband noise is measured with an RBW of 30 kHz at 3 single offset frequencies below the lowermost active carrier of the lower sub block and above the uppermost active carrier of the upper sub block For details see Narrowband noise measurement on page 72 and Outer Narrowband Table on page 40 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum NNARrow on page 273 Wideband Noise 21 8 MHz If enabled wideband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Wide band noise is measured with an RBW of 100 kHz over the defined span typically the RF bandwidth For details see Wideband noise and intermodulation sweeps on page 73 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum NWIDe on page 274 Intermodulation The MCWN noise measurement performs special measurements at the locations of the intermodulation IM products of the defined order To disable intermodulation mea surement select off For details see chapter 5 15 5 Intermodulation Calculation on page 78 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder on page 272 Adapting the limit lines for wideband noise Apply Exceptions If enabled exceptions from the limit line check as defined
27. TRIGQgereporto OTYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 116 See Level on page 116 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output 11 5 5 Suffix lt port gt Parameters lt OutputType gt Manual operation OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice See Output Type on page 116 This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Usage Manual operation Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Event See Send Trigger on page 117 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigge
28. 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The figure below shows the modulation spectrum for both GMSK and 8PSK Modulation Spectrum GMSK PSK 70 0 400 700 oo 50 am 3o 200 10 0 100 200 3500 400 500 600 700 SO Frequency Offset MHz Fig 5 2 GMSK and 8PSK modulation spectrum Increasing the bandwidth multiple slots GPRS HSCSD The customers demand for higher telecommunication speeds increases the demand for bandwidth Therefore the GSM standard has to evolve constantly An example of this development is the introduction of the EDGE EDGE Evolution specification and the GPRS EGPRS2 and HSCSD modes Until now each mobile could use only one slot per frame but the new HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched Data and GPRS General Packet Radio Service methods will R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements allow permanent assignment of more than one slot per mobile plus dynamic utilization of multiple slots The concept behind GPRS is dynamic assignment of up to 8 slots to each mobile for data transmission depending on demand and availability in the network HSCSD allows permanent assignment of up to 4 slots to a mobile Normal and higher symbol rates The modulation modes GMSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM can be used with either normal or higher symbol rate and different Tx filters What is significant for the R amp S FSW GSM application in this respect is that the mobile can send power on a frequency in mor
29. AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of t
30. Access Overview gt Data Acquisition gt Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how long data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application Data Acquisition e I Data Acquisition Sweep Sample Rate Analysis Bandwidth Capture Time Swap I Q EE 123 Analysis BamawiGil RT 123 Capture TME E 123 EE OMS OE E 124 SE E AA EE A E A A 124 Sample rate The sample rate for UO data acquisition is indicated for reference only It is a fixed value depending on the frequency range to be measured see also chapter 6 3 7 2 Spectrum on page 134 Remote command TRACe IQ SRATe on page 247 Analysis Bandwidth The analysis bandwidth is indicated for reference only It defines the flat usable band width of the final UO data This value is dependent on the Frequency list and the defined signal source The following rule applies analysis bandwidth 0 8 sample rate Note MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restric ted to an input sample rate of 200 MHz Remote command TRACe IQ BWIDth on page 248 Capture Time Specifies the duration and therefore the amount of data to be captured in the capture buffer The capture time can be defined automatically or manually Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration If Auto mode is enabled the optimal capture time is determined according to the Sam ple rate and Analysis Bandwidt
31. Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Crest factor Default unit dB Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL CRESt Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL MAXimum READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL MAXimum This command starts the measurement and reads out the maximum power for the selected slot for all measured frames This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Further results of the m
32. IQR100 101165 Digital IQ OUT 10 MHz 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Digital IQ Input StA annonae ett e eet hte dti erp m ee esets 105 Input Sample Rate rene cce aec e eclesie crap ecc uec e cdd 105 Pulliscale Level EN 105 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level eese 106 Connected Iistrurment ioci et editae rete aea dvo debo EE Rc 106 Digital UO Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 222 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital I Q signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 226 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 226 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an UO sam ple with the magnitude 1 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 226 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 226 INP
33. Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal on page 209 6 3 2 3 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure This area shows a graphical representation of the configuration of each slot Select a slot to display its Slot dialog box see chapter 6 3 2 3 Slot Settings on page 95 For active slots the following information is shown e The burst type e g Normal NB for a normal burst e The modulation e g GMSK e The training sequence TSC and Set For details on how to interpret the graphic see Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar on page 54 Slot Settings Access Overview gt Signal Description gt Slot gt Slot1 Slot7 The individual slots are configured on separate tabs The dialog box for the selected slot is displayed directly when you select a slot in the Frame Configuration graphic on the Frame tab see Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure on page 95 Slot structure display The basic slot structure according to the selected Frequency Band and Power Class is displayed graphically for reference White fields indicate unknown data colored fields indicate known symbol sequences The slot settings vary slightly for different burst types Signal Description Frame Slot O Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot Multi Carrier Burst Type Modulation F
34. State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FSW on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 116 Frontend Configuration The following commands are required to configure frequency and amplitude settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup LEM E e 232 e Amplitude Settings rect cont Gece Etna n Rp euo a Lk Rn EXE ERA Ret d e ER RR dn 235 Configuring RTE E 237 Frequency The following commands are required to configure the frequencies to measure Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Useful commands for configuring frequencies described elsewhere CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 206 CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 205 Remote commands exclusive to configuring frequencies CON Le ie ET 233 BENSE FREQUENCY CENTER 2 edens end o eam coeli bna at tfi t tex bre tere da 233 SENSe FREQuency CENT en STEP rr eoo zo EERSTEN E FE PERRA ADR 234 SENSeTJFREQuency CENTer S TEP SAL TO reir ure etae na een ERR EN RO RRRRRRee RR 234 Ee Tel 234 CONFigure MS ARFCn lt Value gt This command specifies the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number ARFCN to be measured Setting the ARFCN updates the frequency Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt numeric value Range 0 to 1023 some values may not be allo
35. TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 299 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 330 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA on page 332 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA on page 330 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 29 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays Transient Spectrum Graph The transient spectrum is very similar to the modulation spectrum evaluation it evalu ates the power vs frequency trace by measuring the power over several frames How ever as opposed to the modulation spectrum evaluation the entire slot scope defined by the Number of Slots to measure and the First Slot to measure is evaluated in each frame including the rising and falling burst edges not just the useful part in the Slot to Measure Furthermore the number of fixed frequency offsets is lower and the peak power is evaluated rather than the average power as this measurement is used to determine irregularities The Transient Spectrum Graph displays the measured power levels as a trace against the frequencies for the specified slots The measured values can be checked against defined limits the limit lines are indica ted as red lines in the diagram The result of the limit check PASS FAIL is shown at the top of the diagram Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded 4 Transient Spectrum
36. Trigger to Sync Graph The Trigger to Sync measurement determines the time between an external trigger event and the start of the first symbol of the TSC The start of the first symbol of the TSC corresponds to the time 0 of the symbol period see chapter 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period on page 60 Only one result per data capture is provided Therefore it is useful to perform several data captures and average the results to obtain an accurate value see Statistic Count on page 125 Both graphical and numeric table results are available While the graphical results are mainly used to determine the required measurement settings the numeric results pro vide the actual trigger to sync value including statistical evaluation see Trigger to Sync Table on page 34 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Trigger to Sync Graph 225 297 us DESS 225 301 us The Trigger to Sync diagram shows two traces e Trace1 a histogram shows the probability density function PDF of all measured Trigger to Sync values Obviously the histogram can only provide reasonable results if several UO captures are performed and considered In an ideal case assuming no noise the histogram would have a gaussian shape The histogram is helpful to determine the number of Trigger to Sync values to be averaged Statistic Count in order to obtain the required time resolution of the averaged Trigger to Sync value The higher the statisti
37. e max the carrier with the highest power level If the reference power is determined by a reference measurement see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 164 and automatic carrier selection is active see Carrier Selection Carrier on page 165 ref selected carrier for reference power If the reference power is determined by a reference measurement see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 164 but the carrier is selected manually see Carrier Selection Carrier on page 165 e man manually defined reference powers see Defining Reference Powers Manually on page 165 Carrier frequency Frequency of the carrier at which power was measured Power level Measured power level in dBm Reference power with RBW Reference power for measurement with 300 kHz RBW or manually defined 300 kHz reference value User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 37 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements Parameter Description Reference power with RBW Reference power for measurement with 100 kHz RBW or manually defined 100 kHz reference value Reference power with RBW Reference power for measurement with 30 kHz RBW or manually defined 30 kHz reference value Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH WSRP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results FETCh WSPectrum REFerence POWer ALL on page 339 Inner IM Table Similar to the Outer IM Table but th
38. iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Example See chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus 11 10 1 Status Reporting System The GSM application uses the standard status registers of the R amp S FSW However some registers are used differently Only those differences are described in the follow ing sections For details on the common R amp S
39. 1 212 112 221 3 1 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 221 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 USER TSC number and Set or User TSC Set 2 is only available for subchannel 2 RST 0 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example Subchannel 1 TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC 0 1 JI Subchannel 1 Query TSC number and Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0O SUBChannell TSC Il gt 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0O SUBChannel1 TSC TSC I gt 0 II Subchannel 1 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel1 TSC SET Hz Manual operation See Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 98 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TADVance lt Offset gt Specifies the position of an access burst within a single slot This command is only available for access bursts see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TYPE on page 216 Suffix Number lt 0 7 gt Parameters for setting and query lt Offset gt offset from slot start in symbols Range 0 to 63 Increment 10 RST 0 Example CONF CHAN SLOT TADV 1 Manual operation See Timing Advance Access Burst only on page 98 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC Value This command s
40. 25s secre rasaadeu ta CO Fen PEPX EEA RE Dd ar EOHE EEEE M AME aS Eu 326 READ SPECtrum WMODulation GATirg r n rn trn rr p beni Per dip PER eng 365 READ WSPectrum MObDu lation GATIng 2 tionen rrr rrr hb thi ERE IE ESEA E EE AER 264 READ WSPectum MODUIAtONEGA TING RE 317 READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate is READ WSPectrum MObDulation ALL 25 5 erc rt ra tnc tr ert er rre eere rne rere ES EE 363 SENSE Le Er Ke RE 268 GE MT el idee Re el T TEE 353 STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation PTRansition GEET Elei E RE 353 STATUSIPRE EE 352 gt TATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDITOR cut tree tte ett etin tates 353 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENAble nennen enne tenerent enne innen nnns STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition S TAT s QUEStionable ACPEimiEP TRarsitioni oic oio tt e aia EEN ANEETA STATus QUEStionable ACL Im EVEN 353 STATus QUEStionable CONDItIONR ioter rere ai dE 353 S TATUs QUEStionable DIQ CONDITION 5 rre cpi caetero recte Et Ree ice court rane 350 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDItIOmI oui aeroporto ttti Ei Ees te eth cahdacagemetnes catevassceenegeneenes 353 STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABIG rrr rete tpe tH rtp tree cer agp eere e x e Cd STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition STATus QUESItionable DIO EVENt cio rrt eere eere tnn
41. 6 5 2 Switching transients spectrum SS NN MCN Cc NN NN I UU User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 31 GSM UO Measurement Results The reference power for relative measurements is the power measured in a bandwidth of at least 300 kHz for the TRX under test for the time slot in this test with the highest power Note The graphical results of the transient spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 The following values are displayed Table 4 9 Transient spectrum results Result Description Offset Fixed frequency offsets from the center frequency at which power is measured kHz Power Negative Power at the frequency offset to the left of the center frequency Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Power Positive Power at the frequency offset to the right of the center frequency Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH TST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL on page 326 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate on page 327
42. Bins NEE accetti ener naie Ig M a Multicarrier fier Multiple carriers Single carrier filter Burst Access AB Configuration Higher symbol rate Normal symbol rate isesi 96 97 98 99 Position within slot esessssesseeeeeeneees 98 Synchronization 130 Timing Advance ne 98 TYPO ES df Type dependency 59 EE M A M 54 C Capture buffer Result display aee eerie cavitoserseceasesceescenes 19 Capture offset MSRA MSRT applications ssssssss 124 E une E E Capture time Defa lt oc gedet NEEE see also Measurement time 246 247 Carrier allocation ssssssssssseseeeeereenneens 73 Carrier power c Hn 37 Carrier Power Table Result display scott rein ER rettet tesa 37 Carriers e E Active limit check e ele EE elle UE Frequency Gap NEE Modulation Multiple Non contiguous zu Single PVT filler 1 noch te tp eto Center frequeriey cic ttes Analog Baseband B71 Automatic configuration EE Channel bandwidth MSRA nee ER Channel NUMDETS oirissrtiro tiretenn sidiria 47 111 GSM standard gen ires 48 ET TEE 47 SUD GE 50 Closing Channels remote NEEN 200 Windows remote A 279 282 Constellation Evaluation method sisane 18 Continue single sweep Eet EE 126 163
43. CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 172 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 249 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt
44. Default unit dBm dB lt Limit gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Indicates whether absolute or relative power values are returned depending on CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT on page 262 lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP NARR INN Usage Query only Manual operation See Inner Narrow Band Table on page 40 FETCh WSPectrum NARRow OUTer ALL This command queries the results of the measured distortion products for the frequen cies outside of the subblocks but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier allocation For details see Outer Narrowband Table on page 40 Retrieving Results For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of distortion Default unit Hz lt FreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which distortion power is measured Default unit Hz lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz lt Power gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power measured at distortion frequency Default unit dBm dB lt Limit gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default u
45. Eu PVT WEE 28 Power sensors Trigger mode E 119 Power vs Time Limit check rente rte tinere 70 Preamplifier Setting 114 154 Softkey 114 154 Presetting Channels 90 142 Default values rrt tentent 140 grec c 171 uge Te e 120 160 Probes MU Te roo V ufo 3 Ene 109 Settings Programming examples Statistics 5 oti 365 369 372 374 375 Protection RE input FGmolte since ree edet de edu 220 PVT eedem Bee ve GOnTiguration EE 132 Filter 56 133 Filler WEE 191 Filters frequency response 257 Filters step response 2057 Full Burst evaluation method 0 eee 28 Full burst results remote 302 Llimit line time alignment ss 193 Reference Beer tee ege Eed 54 RReference lime diarrees deeg te 54 Q OPSK e ned 46 49 379 Measurement filter consain oine 58 Modulationy Zut ee ere d Ee iet 98 R RBW at 1800 EE 24 26 136 Refer nce level 2 nr reset stas ESA 113 152 Auto level cete dates c eius Automatic ze Digital e EE ul M UNS 113 153 Unit 2 113 152 NET 113 152 Reference measurement Average count MOWN sssseseseseseeiesreereee 162 164 Carrier selection MCWN ssseeecseeeeeereererere 165 Enabling MGWIN edd Manual levels MCWN s MOWN per T MOWN remote iet tet ted be tse Power level MCWN e Settings MCONWN 2 sandi anin Reference power EM cssc terio si
46. FETCh BURStPTEMplate TRGS MINIMUM Pirisen annaia i ren Eia iS 328 FETCWBURSEPTEMplate TRGS SDEVIAtOM tc cocus creer mh craveeenteencenantaenemnenseneasmuavatseancasdeecateveiseseres 328 FETChH BURSESPOWerSLOT lt S gt ALLIAVERAQC surisi tete rte ener EE 319 FETCh BURStSPOWerSLOT lt s gt ALL CRESUtH sisscescesesteca aen ie ener nh drea eR ERE RSEN ERR ER Ene 319 FETChIBURSESPOWer SEOTss AEL MAXIIDTI ocoo eara snae ve nenir iE TEENE 320 FETCh BURStSPOWerSLOT lt 5 gt CURRent AVERaA JE Paires as 321 FETCh BURSESPOWer SLOTss CURRent CRESI 2 rnit ine Ree d eR erae 322 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent MAXiIMUM eren rennen nnns 323 iso meena cee EPOR M 324 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage 308 FETCRh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop CURER6ent eren tritt rtr ener iren 308 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum esses eene neret ren EAE 308 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation eese een nennen nennen 308 Ne Ree ee RTE 307 FETGIEB RSIEMAGG racy BPOWerAVERag6e int peer e ect EE 309 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent FETCh BURSI MACGCuracy BPOWer MAXImUIm ciues rper eg nein eae eR D dt ded 309 FETCI B RSIEMAGG racy BPOWer SDEVIatIOn ioa crine er n dd 309 FETCR BURSIE MACGuracy FERRor AVERaAgeT seurc orent tr rn enter re v SER ER EEEa
47. FREQ SPAN MODE MAN FREQ SPAN STAR 9150000 FREQ SPAN STOP 970000000 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Manual operation See Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 150 SENSe FREQuency STARt lt Frequency gt Parameters lt Frequency gt 0 to fmax min span RST 0 Example FREQ STAR 20MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Start Stop on page 150 SENSe FREQuency STOP lt Frequency gt Parameters lt Frequency gt min span to fmax RST fmax Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Start Stop on page 150 Triggering Measurements The commands for triggering measurements are described in chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 238 Configuring the Reference Measurement Reference power levels can either be defined manually or determined automatically by a reference measurement prior to the noise measurement the following commands are required to configure the reference measurement CONFloure SGbCHrum MODulation RE Ference AVERage COUN 270 CONFloure SGbtChrum MODulsation RE Ference CARbiert ALUTTOL eneren nenene 270 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBEe ccccssseseeeeeseesaeeeees 270 CONFloure SGbtCHrum MODulation RE erence ME AGure ene 271 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation
48. GONFigure BURStPTENMMplate IMMediate 2 rtr nnt erret tke i eene CONFigure MEASurement CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder GONFigure SPECtrum LIMit EXCeption S TATe 4 tnnt nt eren nint eene 273 CONFigure SPEGtrum LEIMIE BE Das coo otras tert EEE REET EED EEEE 261 GONFigure SPECtrum LIMIERIGEIE assuicco ror rore tree rh nt v Fere d a np e nates 261 GONFigure SPECtrum MObDulation L MIT cach nnt rn tnra aea ETENE rA TENENSA 262 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNtE essen enne 270 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBar sese 270 CONFioure GbPECirumMODulaton HR FerenceCARiert AUTO 270 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure essen enne 271 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEV el etre tnr nnn 271 CONFioure SGbPECirum MODulatonREterencebRbOMer A GONFigure SPEGtrum MObDulation IMMedlate 2 rnnt ne ore inpr rero GONFigure SPECtrum NNARTFOW 2 trt ren nent e nt gk E PEE pe e T VIR EE engan GONFigure SPECtrum NWI DA o entertain rper rrt PY eode rn EXER EXER EFE PEERS ER EE ee ni Teri eiui ig e GONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIIT iii ort tht ntn t rte terrent ert rts GONFigure SPECtrum SWITching FY BE rrt rer th einer b enr inre rca ka ne cr RE Ra CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching MMediate CONFigure TRGS ADPSIZe
49. Inner IM Table on page 38 See Outer IM Table on page 38 See Inner Narrow Band Table on page 40 See Outer Narrowband Table on page 40 See Inner Wideband Table on page 42 See Outer Wideband Table on page 43 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 Table 11 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for GSM application Parameter value Window type Default UO Modulation Accuracy measurement CONStell Constellation ETIMe EVM vs Time MCAPture Magnitude Capture MERRor Magnitude Error vs Time MTABle Marker Table MACCuracy Modulation Accuracy MSFDomain Modulation Spectrum Graph Frequency domain MSTable Modulation Spectrum Table PERRor Phase Error vs Time PSTable Power vs Slot PTFull PvT Full Burst TGSGraph Trigger vs Sync Graph TGSTable Trigger to Sync Table TSFDomain Transient Spectrum Graph Frequency domain Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameter value Window type TSTable Transient Spectrum Table Multicarrier wideband noise measurement IIMProducts Inner IM Table INAR Inner Narrowband Table IWID Inner Wideband Table OIMProducts Outer IM Table ONAR Outer Narrowband Table OWID Outer Wideband Table WSFDomain Spectrum Graph WSRPower Carrier Power Table LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the
50. MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Phase Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Phase Error results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Phase error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERR RMS SDEV Usage Query only 11 8 5 Modulation Spectrum Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation For details on the individual results see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 Retrieving Results READ vs FETCh commands Note that for each result type two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt commands FETCh SPECtrumiMOBuUlation ALL 2 12 2 222 t tortis eu ruv ch ba EENS 316 READ SPECtrumiMODulauonl ALL 12 21 atn t roe treten ate dest n EEATT ana 316 FE
51. Maximum number of exceptions allowed to pass the exception check CALC1 LIM6 EXC COUN MAX Query limit check results Overall FETC SPEC MOD LIM FAIL Wideband noise CALC1 LIM1 FAIL Intermodulation 100 kHz RBW CALC1 LIM2 FAIL Intermodulation 300 kHz RBW CALC1 LIM3 FAIL Exception counting range A CALC1 LIM5 FAIL Programming Examples Exception counting range B CALC1 LIM6 FAIL List of abbreviations A Annex Reference A 1 A 2 A 2 1 A 2 2 A 1 List of abbreviatlons titre eegeEee geess 379 UO Data File Format iq tar 2 ccesccecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeesaeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaees 380 UO Parameter XML File Specification sse 381 eh Data Binary LEE 384 List of abbreviations 16QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 32QAM 32 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 3GPP 3 Generation Partnership Project 8PSK Phase Shift Keying with 8 phase states AQPSK Adaptive Quadrature Amplitude Modulation ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number BTS Base Transceiver Station DL Downlink MS to BTS DUT Device Under Test EDGE Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution EGPRS Enhanced General Packet Radio synonym for EDGE EGPRS2 Enhanced General Packet Radio and support of additional modulation coding schemes and higher symbol rate FDMA Frequency Divi
52. OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual 6 4 5 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 244 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 244 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 244 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page
53. Output and Frontend Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend The R amp S FSW can evaluate signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals Input Source SUMS EE 101 GENEE TT 110 e EMU 112 e DUPI E e 115 6 3 3 1 Input Source Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze Since the Digital UO input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after switching the input source e Radio Frequency Inplib eerie coe ee exam rape rd see amer avira ieee 102 e Digital VQ Input SGetiligS i i erinnern zt t nk Ext n etn 104 e Analog Baseband Input Settings ueteri ete eee Ru 106 e GT EL Te EE 109 Radio Frequency Input Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt Radio Frequency or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Radio Frequency The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FSW If no additional option
54. Parameters Level power level in dBm RST 0 00 Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF PLEV 35 Manual operation See Power Level on page 165 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer RBW Level This command defines the reference power level using different RBWs for MCWN measurements if no reference measurement is performed see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 271 The query returns the measured values and is only available if a reference measure ment is performed 11 6 5 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Parameters lt Level gt reference power level in dBm without a unit Parameters for setting and query lt RBW gt RBW in Hz 30e3 Reference power for RBW 30 kHz 100e3 Reference power for RBW 100 kHz 300e3 Reference power for RBW 300 kHz Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF PLEV 35 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 300e3 34 7 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 100e3 32 8 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 30e3 27 2 Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS ON CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 30e3 Queries the measured reference power level for an RBW of 30 kHz Manual operation See Ref Power RBW 300 kHz on page 165 See Ref Power RBW 100 kHz on page 165 See Ref Power RBW 30 kHz on page 166 Configuring the Noise Measurement The noise measurement can provide various results The following commands are required t
55. REFerence PLEVel sse 271 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer esses 271 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNt lt Number gt This command defines the number of reference measurements to be performed in order to determine the average reference values This value is ignored if no reference measurement is performed see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 271 Parameters lt Number gt integer value Range 1 32767 RST 10 Example CONF SPEC MOD REF AVER COUN 5 Manual operation See Reference Average Count on page 162 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier AUTO State This command specifies whether the carrier at which the reference powers for the MCWN measurement are measured is selected automatically if reference power mea surement is enabled see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 271 Parameters State ON OFF ON The carrier with the maximum power level is selected as a refer ence OFF The carrier to be used as a reference must be specified using CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBer on page 270 RST ON Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS ON CONF SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO NUMB 2 Manual operation See Carrier Selection Carrier on page 165 CONF
56. RIGH MST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL on page 316 READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate on page 317 Phase Error Displays the phase error over time R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays WEEN 5 Phase Error 1 Avg 2 Max e3 Min ed Clrw The following default settings are used for a Phase Error vs Time measurement Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot selected as Slot to Measure Averaging Configuration Number of frames as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check None Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PERR See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 298 Power vs Slot Displays the power per slot in the current frame and over all frames The result of the Power vs Time limit check is also indicated Note The power is measured for inactive slots but not for slots outside the slot scope see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 4 Power vs Slot NSP dBm dBm dB dBm dBm The following power values are determined ES User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 27 GSM UO Measurement Results Table 4 7 Measured power values for Power vs Slot results Value Description SCPI query for result value Slot Analyzed slot number in frame s 0 7 PvT Limit Power vs Time limit for the power
57. Tagger Level E H 120 Dior 0 Ag ane a errr reer eer reer er rrrer er A 120 irs PETI mem 120 FRY SUGROSIS eege EE A 120 Tigger HOMO C 121 joo 121 deet iac C H 121 DER ol MES NN ET T 121 goo 122 E PUDE TER odisea isa dogs taion RM Cu M RR 122 GN EE 122 Trigger Source Selects the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is dis played in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated For gated measurements this setting also selects the gating source Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 120 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the T
58. X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 21 See X value on page 172 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first 11 9 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 249 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 21 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the GSM application can not only be measured by t
59. a new sepa rate measurement is provided by the R amp S FSW GSM application to determine the wideband noise in multicarrier measurement setups see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 34 Selecting the measurement type GSM measurements require a special operating mode on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key P To select the MCWN measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the MC and Wide Noise Spectrum measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the MC and Wide Noise Spectrum measurement The measurement specific settings for the MC and Wide Noise Spectrum measure ment are available via the Overview Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements o The MARKER FUNCT and LINES menus are currently not used 6 4 1 Default Settings for GSM MCWN Measurements e Configuration Overvlew nennen tenens nenne enini nnne nn Signal Description laput and Frontend Settings eet etit esae RR Rer Une c RR Trigger Settings Sweep Settings Reference Measurement Settings Noise Measurement e E Adjusting Settings Automatically sess Default Settings for GSM MCWN Measurements The following default settings are activated when a MCWN measurement is selected Table 6 2 Default settings for GSM MCWN measurements Parameter
60. cessisse nennen nennen nens 328 FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS SDEVIatiQn 2 rere esce s PR e umu i2 icac ree eIAP rici 328 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS AVERage inniti nitent nnn hte mn tnn im is nean nA nA ana 328 READ BURSEt PTEMplate TRGS CURRent sss nnne enne 328 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS MAXIBUTIT 1r AANEREN EENS ed 328 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS MINim m 3 acie tero enean ce ctus an dica cote eee eae 329 READ BURSEPTEMplalte IRGS SDEVIationj error tren e eet exe SES 329 FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS AVERage FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS CURRent FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MAXimum FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MINimum FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS SDEViation READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS AVERage READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS CURRent READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MAXimum 11 8 9 Retrieving Results READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MINimum READ BURSt PTEMplate TRGS SDEViation This command starts a Trigger to Sync measurement and reads out the time between the external trigger event and the start of the first symbol of the TSC This command is only available if an external trigger is selected and the Trigger to Sync measurement is active see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 and Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 Return values Result numeric value Trigger to Sync time Default unit S Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect G
61. e g 30 dB compared to its adjacent channels The PvT filter is optimized to get smooth edges after filtering burst signals and to suppress adjacent active channels RST MC400 Example CONF MCAR FILT MC400 CONFigure MS MCARrier STATe lt State gt CONFigure MS MCARrier MCBTs lt MultiCarrierBTS gt This command informs the R amp S FSW K10 that the measured signal is a multicarrier signal If active a special multicarrier filter is switched into the demodulation path and further multicarrier specific parameters become available Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For new remote control programs select a multicarrier device type using CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 204 Parameters for setting and query lt MultiCarrierBTS gt ON OFF ON Sets the device type to Multicarrier BTS Wide Area OFF Sets the device type to BTS Normal RST OFF Example CONF MCAR MCBT ON New program example CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE MCBWide Example CONF MCAR MCBT OFF New program example CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE BTSNormal CONFigure MS MTYPe Value This command sets the modulation type of all slots Note This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt GMSK EDGE Modulation type RST GMSK Example Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument S
62. on page 375 Usage Query only Manual operation See Spectrum Graph on page 36 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt MAX This command queries the maximum number of bands with exceptions to the limit line check that are allowed by the standard for the specified limit check in the selected measurement window Suffix lt k gt 1 2 The number of the limit check to query 1 Limit check for wideband noise 2 Limit check for intermodulation at 100 kHz no exceptions allowed 3 Limit check for intermodulation at 300 kHz no exceptions allowed 4 Limit line for narrowband noise no exceptions allowed 5 Exceptions in range A 6 Exceptions in range B Return values lt NoExcept gt integer Number of exceptions Example CALCulate2 LIMitl EXC COUN MAX Queries the maximum number of bands with exceptions to the limit line check allowed for wideband noise in window 2 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Usage Query only Manual operation See Spectrum Graph on page 36 FETCh SPECtrum MODulation LIMit FAIL Result This command queries the results of the limit check for MCWN measurements Retrieving Results Parameters lt Result gt 110 ON OFF Result of the limit check 1 ON Fail 0 OFF Pass Example FETC SPEC MOD LIM FAIL Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wide
63. power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP IMPR OUT Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Usage Query only Manual operation See Outer IM Table on page 38 FETCh WSPectrum NARRow INNer ALL This command queries the results of the measured distortion products for the frequen cies in the gap between the GSM carrier subblocks for non contiguous carrier alloca tion The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block Offsets are lower than 1 8 MHz 400 KHz 600 KHz 1200 KHz For details see Duter Narrowband Table on page 40 Retrieving Results The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute measurement frequency For contiguous carrier allocation or if narrowband noise measurement is disabled this table is empty For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of distortion Default unit Hz lt FreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which distortion power is measured Default unit Hz lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz lt Power gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power measured at distortion frequency
64. softkey is highlighted orange Single Sequence Each measurement is performed once until all measurements in all active channels have been performed Continuous Sequence The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly in the same order until sequential operation is stopped This is the default Sequencer mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE on page 251 6 2 6 3 Display Configuration Display Configuration The captured signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evaluation methods available for the selected measurement are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following Select the EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Display Config button in the Overview e Press the MEAS key Select the Display Config softkey in any GSM menu Up to 16 evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The GSM evaluation methods are described in chapter 4 1 GSM I Q Measurement Results on page 17 and chapter 4 2 1 Multicarrier Evaluation Methods on page 35 For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration GSM measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key When you switch a measurement channel to the GSM application the first tim
65. t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet eeeessses 235 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe esses eene nnne 236 INPURGAINIS Up 236 Ime RETI 236 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Per Division on page 176 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 113 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page
66. transmitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 8 Select the Reference measurement button to determine how the reference pow ers are determined Do one of the following e Enable automatic measurement with automatic carrier selection User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 188 How to Measure Wideband Noise in Multicarrier Setups e Enable automatic measurement and select a carrier to be used for reference e Disable the reference measurement and define the power level and the three reference power levels for 30 kHz 100 kHz 300 kHz RBW see also chap ter 5 15 3 Manual Reference Power Definition for MCWN Measurements on page 75 9 Select the Measurement button and define which of the noise and intermodula tion measurements are to be performed If necessary increase the number of measurements to be performed for averaging Average count 10 Select the Display Config button and select up to 16 displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 12 Select the Result Config button to configure settings for specific result displays These settings can be configured individually for each window so select the win dow first and then configure the settings e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations
67. 108 Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed SENS PROBe lt p gt SE ele 229 SENSe PROBe p ID PARTnumber 2 ener eere nennen ann nhe nhan ames an Rana sai sra 230 SENSe PROBe p ID SRNumber sisse eene eren nennen entente nnns 230 SENSae PROBEsSps SE le E 230 SBENSe PROB amp p SETup iNAME 2 rette trecenta doe eden ero erede ds 231 SENSeJ PROBSsSp SETUpS TATB entr er tree etta o Ra rer Ene ree e neret qs 231 E ET E A d eene tcu pneu ne tarea ap pta n pua ee Rr poe Re o diane 231 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup CMOFfset lt CMOffset gt Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters lt CMOffset gt Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Default unit V Manual operation See Common Mode Offset on page 109 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connec
68. 113 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on and off It requires the optional preamplifiier hardware Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 114 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 236 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 114 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 11 5 3 3 Configuring the Attenuation INPUT RE 237 INPutATTenaalon AUT Oh cree eat ene net ae ee dece tuno Bas ena e e tx ee dnce datus 237 INPUCEA T e UERSUM 237 d uz up o 238 NPU EAT TES TANT ee 238 INPut ATTenuation lt Atten
69. 131 CONFigure MS SYNC IQCThreshold Value This command sets the IQ correlation threshold The IQ correlation threshold decides whether a burst is accepted if Measure only on Sync is activated If the correlation value between the ideal IQ signal of the given TSC and the measured TSC is below the IQ correlation threshold then the application reports Sync not found in the status bar Additionally such bursts are ignored if Measure only on Sync is activated Parameters for setting and query Value Range 0 to 100 RST 85 Default unit NONE Example CONF SYNC IQCT 0 Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on page 131 CONFigure MS DEMod DECision Value This command determines how the symbols are detected in the demodulator The set ting of this parameter does not effect the demodulation of Normal Bursts with GMSK modulation For Normal Bursts with 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM or AQPSK modulation or Higher Sym bol Rate Bursts with QPSK 16QAM or 32QAM modulation use this parameter to get a trade off between performance symbol error rate of the K10 and measurement speed Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt AUTO LINear SEQuence AUTO Automatically selects the symbol decision method LiNear Linear symbol decision Uses inverse filtering a kind of zero forcing filter and a symbol wise decision method This method is recommended for high
70. 2 Frequency Settings The frequency span to be measured can be defined using a start and stop frequency or a center frequency and span alternatively it can be set to a specific characteristic value automatically Frequency and span settings can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you press the FREQ or SPAN key and then select Frequency Con fig Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Freque ele 942 5 MHz Span 39 0 MHz E GSM 900 Span M TA Tx Band Trad 023 0 MHz Stop 962 0 MHz Frequency Offset MITES 0 0 Hz Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal Carriers 1 8 MHz Carriers 6 MHz For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 47 The following frequency bands are supported DCS 1800 E GSM 900 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 GSM 850 PCS 1900 P GSM 900 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Meas Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements R GSM 900 T GSM 380 T GSM 410 T GSM 810 T GSM 900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 205 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 206 Center Frequency Specifies the center frequency of the signal to be measured typically the center of the Tx band If the frequency is modified the ARFCN is updated accordingly for UO measure ments see ARFCN Remote
71. 380 Example For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chap ter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Manual operation See Frequency Band on page 91 CONFigure MS POWer CLASs Value This command the power class of the device under test Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 1 2 314 51 6 7 8 E1 E2 E3 M1 M2 M3 P1 NONE 1 MS and BTS power class 1 2 MS and BTS power class 2 3 MS and BTS power class 3 4 MS and BTS power class 4 5 MS and BTS power class 5 6 BTS power class 6 7 BTS power class 7 8 BTS power class 8 E1 MS power class E1 E2 MS power class E2 E3 MS power class E3 M1 BTS power class M1 Micro M2 BTS power class M2 Micro M3 BTS power class M3 Micro P1 BTS power class P1 Pico NONE No power classes defined RST 2 Example CONF POW CLAS 1 Example For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chap ter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Manual operation See Power Class on page 92 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier lt Power gt Defines the maximum output power per carrier which determines the limit lines for
72. 98 User defined wien 99 Eege Le ME 130 pari S 140 L imitlines crt eter ttr mettere 133 Measure only on sync a131 Multicarrier filter 248 PIOC SS siisii 24163 Ve EE 131 T Tail bits Reference SIGMA zx bri ret nto tit Le teu eene TOMA e M M Time EE le Reference PvT Time alignment Els Time trigger iei UE 120 Timeslot alignment a69 Timing advance 25 98 MEMOS ccn erret e ote rer tO ae 134 Hcc 171 COMMQUMIMNG BEE 169 Default cucine ciet Re e dt exea EEN 169 Doro M S 170 Mode remite citet trt ettet 283 Number of result values sssseseess 301 La ne ee eS 171 e E 170 Statistical evaluation MSRA mode eee 84 Training Sequence SOO clo EE 98 Transient spectrum TE E 32 Transient Spectrum Graph results remote AA 302 Graph evaluation method ane LMI CHECK es hin toc enit e RE eased 70 Reference POWE esie eee ie toa tte Ira Cea ended 136 Settings Table results remote AA 326 Table evaluation method sseessssss 31 Trigger PAULO S E Conditions remote Configuration Softkey suisia 156 Drop out time 120 160 E ue ET 52 130 External remote i soe teet eret 242 Free RUM 2412s ee 52 Holdoff 121 161 Hysteresis 120 160 MSRA iieri e E e terreri eere 53 OMSEU E 120 160 Offset synchronization desioen ia 130 Outp
73. AOFEF rr tnter enne ri Rn tea e coresabenesadsvecesccncesstentaaibors 286 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak eese nennen nnn iaa aa sn nn innen 288 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimumg PEAK cesses ennemi 288 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimump PEAK eeesseseeeseeen eene nnne nnnren rennen 288 CALCulatesn MARKer mo TREIE deu tie dae Hep EERSTEN 287 CALCulate lt n gt MARKGISin eX CR 344 er Ber E 2 os oases sss one ra n o E coccnsuttays AAEN AEE EATEN 344 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe CALCulate lt n gt MSRAIALING SHOW cessccsciacieccascescccecaseunsescvscvsesasseesatdeasencvactnecedsustartednsberoedananttatezosteviedeaeecens GAL Culatesp MSRACALINBEVALUe ccena rrr repu paye ense te EAEE EEE NAESER ESE AEAEE 292 GALGCulatesn MSRA WINDows n VAL iniharap a En eiat 292 GALGCulate n MSRA WINDowsxn MIVAl ornetur than tierno Er otn 293 CALIbration Al ge BITE ESTATE RM GONFigure BU RSEETIMe IMMediate 2 nri tnr en rre tetro rete CONFigure BURSt MACCuracy IMMediate GONFigure BURSEMERRoOr IMMediate raten et too epa ere te pat beer rp ATTE EE GONFigure BURSEPFERror IMMedi te 2 rr rtr ertt tnn n nte th rente trn eres CONFigur BURSEPTEMplate FIL TEF skisis roni iniri rt ete eerta keen cn o tina Ee ee lee Te ag le CONFigure BURSEPTEMplate TALigR nro rte terere rer nr EEN
74. By default and when electronic attenuation is not available mechanical attenuation is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 237 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 237 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 153 6 4 4 4 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a bette
75. CARR6 nj REQ 941 2 MHZ REQ 941 8 MHZ REQ 942 4 MHZ el nj CONF MS MCAR FALL NCON GSAC 3 Normal burst 8PSK modulation CONF MS MCAR CARR1 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR2 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR3 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARRA4 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR5 MTYP N8PS CONF MS MCAR CARR6 MTYP N8PS Eegeregie Span and Level Set Ref Level to 30 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 0 DBM Set Ref Level Offset to 38 dB DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet 38 DB Programming Examples Set frequency span to the Tx band 10 MHz automatically SENS FREQ SPAN MODE TXB SENS FREQ SPAN SENS FREQ STAR SENS FREQ STOP Result span 45 0 MHz 925 MHZ to 970 MHz O Configuring the reference measurement Configure the reference levels manually according to table 5 8 power level is 35 dBm CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF PLEV 35 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 30e3 27 3 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 100e3 31 2 CONF SPEC MOD REF RPOW 300e3 33 3 zseBERESERBE Configuring the noise measurement Define an average count of 200 SENS SWE COUN 200 Determine wideband noise narrowband noise and intermodulation products of orders 3 and 5 CONF SPEC NWID ON CONF SPEC NNAR ON CONF SPEC IMP 3 5 Apply exceptions to limit check CONF SPEC LIM EXC ON Activate the following result displays 1 Spectrum
76. ChannelName gt This command queries the contents of the EVENt section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ register for IQ measurements Readout deletes the contents of the EVEN section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Status Reporting System Example STAT QUES DIQ Usage Query only 11 10 4 Querying the Status Registers The following commands are required to query the status of the R amp S FSW and the GSM application For more information on the contents of the status registers see chapter 11 10 1 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register on page 347 chapter 11 10 3 STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register on page 349 e General Status Register Commande 352 e Reading Ost ihe EVEN Paths cec avn 353 e Reading Out the CONDOM Paltt ire eee etre tirer na eec et tenes 353 e Controlling thie ENABla Pat ter tre este Rn nite ER xanax stan 353 e Controlling the Negative Transition Part 354 e Controlling the Positive Transition Part nente 354 11 10 4 1 General Status Register Commands STATUS ET 352 STATUS QUEUS NEXT KE 352 STATus PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENAB1e parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from O to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are
77. Continuous Sequencer offen Zeene 86 Continuous sweep MCWN Softkey Conventions SCPIiCOMMANGS 2 22 2 2 ete es 194 Copying Measurement channel remote 199 Coupling Input remote ene citet n eee 220 D Data ACQUISITION E MSRA acies toit cineri ee eve eere eee Data format alu s 297 DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 228 Default values EE 140 Delta markers But Un EE 173 RTR 133 Delta to Sync I cregeiforpeM rm 68 i ce 27 Demodulation elle UC Le 130 Settings Devito e 91 93 143 Default me 140 Diagram footer information sseeeee 15 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 227 Analog Baseband DI 108 Dig Input Sample Rate Digital Me E 105 Digital Baseband Interface Input settings cetero DEENEN Input status remote Status registers nr eene teta Digital UO Input connection information eessses 106 Iniput settings egener trim neret tern 104 Digital input Connection information seeesseseess 106 Digital standards le Une EE 48 Relevant for GSM ect ner tmn den 46 Direct path Input configuration menn 103 147 Remote resisti H 221 Display Configuration encim M DL Downlink De nl Dr
78. Definition for MCWN Measurements on page 75 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 271 Power Level Defining Reference Powers Manually Manually defined carrier power level to be used as a reference for MCWN measure ments If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 164 this value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEVel on page 271 Ref Power RBW 300 kHz Defining Reference Powers Manually Manually defined reference power level measured with an RBW of 300 kHz for MCWN measurements If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 164 this value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer on page 271 Ref Power RBW 100 kHz Defining Reference Powers Manually Manually defined reference power level measured with an RBW of 100 kHz for MCWN measurements If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 164 this value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer on page 271 6 4 8 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Ref Power RBW 30 kHz Defining Reference Powers Manually Manually defined reference powe
79. FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 Input Output Type User Defined Level Tow Send Trigger JL Pulse Length 100 0 us Trigger 3 input User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 157 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Note that manually configured gating is not available for GSM measurements Mea surements that require gating such as reference power and narrowband noise mea surement use internal gating mechanisms automatically For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual Tigger e EE 158 BEIC co eai ia r NO 158 Ml EE 158 E Extemal Tigger 1 909 uic ei rtt a td 158 ud Me ncga a E E adacses 159 dog NT TTE 159 LA rr E m 160 L Drop Out Ties eeneg 160 BE RU PNE TEES 160 B oc Seen 160 L Hysteresis ANNETTE 160 L Trigger PANE esee nimi de vaste dain cide nine dg bor ita ape 161 dunes 161 GE 161 eh BEE 161 L Pulse Uen n M 162 e WI E 162 Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Note Trigger source for MSRA Master Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master
80. FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual RST does not influence the status registers Description of the Status Registers All the status registers are the same as those provided by the base system with the exception of the following registers which are provided by the R amp S FSW and are not available from the R amp S FSW GSM application command tree e STATus QUESTionable ACPLimit e STATus QUESTionable LMARgin lt 1 2 gt The commands to query the contents of the following status registers are described in chapter 11 10 4 Querying the Status Registers on page 352 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register AAA 347 e STATus QUEStionable LIMIt Register 2 once meret e 348 e STATus QUEStionable DIQ Register entente nenne 349 e Querying the Status Regieters enne nnne 352 STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during symbol detection If any errors occur in this register the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register is set to 1 Each active channel uses a separate STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Thus if the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific STATus QUEStionable SYNC reg isters In this case you must che
81. IF RF IP power triggers or trigger offset for external triggers In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer settings This information is displayed only when applicable for the current application For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Star ted manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 14 Understanding the Display Information 2 Magnitude Capture Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in the Pulse application 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 6 Trace mode Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the start and stop values for the displayed time frequency or symbol range Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar 3 About the Measurement A basic GSM measurement in the R amp S FSW GSM application includes a power vs time and a spectrum measurement as well as modulation accuracy e g EVM phase error for a GSM signal as defined by the relevant 3GPP standards The UO data from the GSM si
82. Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are returned Result of the limit check in character data form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded READ WSP MOD 0 998200000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Query only Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility FETCh WSPectrum MODulation REFerence READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the measured reference power of the Modulation Spectrum These commands are retained for compatibility with previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers only For newer remote control programs use the READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate or FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence commands instead The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference power in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the reference power in Hz Example READ WSPectrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate Usage Query only READ AUTO LEVTime This command is used to perform a single measurement to detect the required refer ence level and the trigger offset automatically Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE a
83. Magnitude measurement taken over the selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt Result gt numeric value Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERC EVM Usage Query only R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements eee eee ee ee eee eee eee ee ee ees FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 96 percentile of the Mag nitude Error measurement taken over the selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt Result gt numeric value Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERC MERR Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 percentile of the Phase Error measurement taken over the selected number of frames When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to
84. Manual operation See Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit on page 135 CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE lt DetectorMode gt This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FSW K5 only Parameters for setting and query lt DetectorMode gt PEAK RMS RST RMS Example CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Reference Power on page 136 CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT lt Mode gt This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Transi ent Spectrum measurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit This command is only available when the Transient Spectrum measurement is selected see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate on page 357 Parameters for setting and query Mode ABSolute RELative RST RELative Example Select Transient Spectrum measurement JI measurement on captured UO data CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate Only list results are required CONFigure SPECtrum SELect LIST JI Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMit ABSolute Run one measurement and query absolute list results READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL I gt 0 933200000 933200000 101 55 36 00 ABS PASSED CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT Mode This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Modula tion Spectrum m
85. Modu lation Accuracy Phase Error and EVM are based on the Slot to Measure The slot scope is defined in the Demodulation Settings see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 127 and it is indicated by a filled green box in the Frame Configu ration see figure 5 6 The Slot to Measure is indicated by a filled blue box Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar In the channel bar of the R amp S FSW GSM application as well as in the configuration Overview the current frame configuration and slot scope are visualized in a miniature graphic Furthermore the burst type and modulation of the Slot to Measure are indica ted Device Band BTS Normal E Slot Scope Aere ee NB GMSK Fig 5 5 Frame configuration in GSM application channel bar The graphic can be interpreted as follows Shape Color Meaning imm Each slot is represented by a small box ua i ul Active slots are indicated by polygonal symbols R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Shape Color Meaning Slots within the defined slot scope are highlighted green N The defined Slot to Measure is highlighted blue the burst type and modulation defined for this slot are indicated to the right of the graphic Frame configuration in the Frame and Slot Scope dialog boxes The same graphic is displayed in the Frame Configuration of the Frame dialog box see Frame Configuration Select Slot to Confi
86. O offset 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 240 Slope Trigger Settings For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 242 Hysteresis Trigger Settings Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 240 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Settings Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 240 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is des
87. Power per Carrier multicarrier measurements only Defines the maximum output power per carrier which determines the limit lines for the modulation spectrum UO measurements and MCWN measurement In Auto mode the maximum measured power level for the carriers is used This setting is only available for multicarrier measurements Remote command CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AUTO on page 209 CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier on page 209 6 3 2 2 Frame Access Overview gt Signal Description gt Frames Frame settings determine the frame configuration used by the device under test R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Frame Slot Multi Carrier Device Under Test Device Type BTS Normal Frequency Band Power Class Frame Configuratior Equal Time Slot Lengths Select Slot to Configure Norm Device Type Defines the type of device under test DUT The following types are available BTS Normal BTS Micro BTS Pico MS Normal MS Small Multicarrier BTS Wide Area Multicarrier BTS Medium Range Multicarrier BTS Local Area The default device type is BTS Normal Remote command CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 204 Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 47 The following frequency bands are supported e DCS 1800 e E GSM 900 e GSM 450 e GSM 480 User Manual 1 173 9263 02 12 93 Modu
88. Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 298 TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 299 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 33 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays Trigger to Sync Table The Trigger to Sync measurement determines the time between an external trigger event and the start of the first symbol of the TSC The start of the first symbol of the TSC corresponds to the time 0 of the symbol period see chapter 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period on page 60 Only one result per data capture is provided Therefore it is useful to perform several data captures and average the results to obtain an accurate value see Statistic Count on page 125 Both graphical and numeric table results are available While the graphical results are mainly used to determine the required measurement settings see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 the numeric results provide the actual trigger to sync value including statistical evaluation 2 Trigger to Sync Table Current Average Std Dev Trigger to Sync us 2 005 E 0006 2 225 0 00042 The Trigger to Sync table shows the following values Value Description Current Trigger to Sync value for current measurement in us Average Trigger to Sync value averaged over the Statistic Count number of measurements Min Minimum Trigger to Sync value in the previous Statistic Count number of measurements Max Maximum Trigger to Sync value in the previous Stati
89. SEU Hes E ey concede E OTEA EEEE ras 244 OUTPut TRIGgersports EVel ucni ctr rto terrre nnt en ce eere Eee een FERRE KR OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe OUTPut TRIGgersport PULSe IMMedi le 7neinn rater ea re pere rhet pent Ho ENEE PETT 245 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe EENGLIh retro rre rte nenne n err nen E s 245 READ AUTO RA ln 364 READ BURG P EMolate TRGGS AVERage AA 328 READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS GURR Ont rrt ret uere ne ego c ga evecta e 328 READ B RSEPTEMplate TRGS MAXIPOUITI s ccn root duro obese edo er bep eit cena ines 328 READ BURSEtPTEMplate TRGS MlINimum READ BURSEPTEMplate TRGS SDEWVialiOfi 2 c dete tdi rs eee ibd pee bns 329 READ B RSESPOWer SEOTsSIot AEE AVERGBQO retirer te net ire E es 319 READ BURG GbOWer GL OT Glotz ALL CREGI eene nnne nnne 319 READ BURSESPOWer SLOT SIot ALL MAXimUm 9 iacit rined 320 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT sSlIot CURRent AVERage eese nennen nnne 321 READ BURStSPOWer SLOT sSlot CURRent CRESt essen enne 322 READ BURStSPOWer SLOT sSlot CURRent MAXimum essen 323 READ BURSESPOWer SLOT lt Slot DEL FatoSyriG nnrir eren ER ENNET 324 READ BURGL GbOWer GL OT Glotz LUIMICEAILN nennen 325 READ BURG MACCuracvlADRoop AVERage AAA 308 READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum esses nennen nnne nrntne eren nns 308 READ
90. SLOTO TSC TSC I gt 3 JI Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC SET I gt 1 See Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 98 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC USER Value This command sets the bits of the user definable TSC The number of bits must be in accordance with the defined burst type and modulation as indicated in Number of TSC bits depending on burst type and modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC USER must be defined first see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC on page 214 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt The slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt String containg the user defined bits e g 10101111101010101100111100 for a GMSK normal burst Example CONF CHAN SLOT TSC USER Manual operation See User TSC User Sync on page 99 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 Table 11 2 Number of TSC bits depending on burst type and modulation Burst Type Modulation Number of Bits Normal GMSK 26 Normal 8PSK 78 Normal 16QAM 104 Normal 32QAM 130 Higher Symbol Rate QPSK 62 Higher Symbol Rate 16QAM 124 Higher Symbol Rate 32QAM 155 Access Burst GMSK 41 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number T
91. Symbol Period 0 25 2 45 1 0 5 0 0 5 1 1 5 2 2 5 Time Symbol Periods Fig 5 12 GMSK Frequency Pulse top and phase of the first tail symbol bottom 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM AQPSK Modulation Normal Symbol Rate The EDGE transmit pulse is defined in the standard document 3GPP TS 45 004 as a linearised GMSK pulse as illustrated at the top of figure 5 13 Note that according to the definition in the standard the center of the pulse occurs at 2 5 T where T is the normal symbol period NSP The baseband signal due to a sequence of symbols is defined in the standard as y t t iT 2T Baseband signal due to a sequence of symbols 5 2 where C t the transmit pulse Note that the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 3 5 Pulse shaping for normal burst 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure 3 This is also the start of the symbol period of symbol number 0 containing the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 For normal burst AQPSK the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 6 5 Pulse shaping 5 9 3 Definition of the Symbol Period The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure 6 This is also the start of the symbol period of symbol number 0 containing the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The transmitted pulse for the first tail symbol is ill
92. This corresponds to the useful part of the burst excluding the tail bits to allow the multicarrier filter to settle NSP Normal Symbol Period symbol duration for normal symbol rate normal bursts RSP Reduced Symbol Period symbol duration for higher symbol rate HSR bursts Retrieving Results Burst Modula Multi No of trace Comment Type tion carrier points BTS NB not any 142 symbols NSP only one sample per symbol ov 1 GMSK this corresponds to the useful part of the burst excluding tail symbols see 3GPP TS 45 005 Annex G normative Calculation of Error Vector Magnitude HSR any any 169 symbols RSP only one sample per symbol ov 1 this corresponds to the useful part of the burst excluding tail symbols see 3GPP TS 45 005 Annex G normative Calculation of Error Vector Magnitude NSP Normal Symbol Period symbol duration for normal symbol rate normal bursts RSP Reduced Symbol Period symbol duration for higher symbol rate HSR bursts 11 8 2 2 PvT Full Burst Trace Results The Power vs Time results depend on the number of slots that are measured and thus the duration of the measurement 30 additional symbols NSP are added at the begin ning and at the end of the trace The number of trace result values is calculated as 30 lt NofSlots gt 157 30 ov where lt NofSlots gt Number o
93. This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation DVD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW htm gt Downloads gt Firmware Application Notes Application notes application cards white papers and educational notes are further publications that provide more comprehensive descriptions and background informa tion The latest versions are available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz web site at www rohde schwarz com appnote Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks
94. Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 245 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 245 Trigger Settings Access Overview gt Trigger or TRIG gt Trigger Config Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Which settings are avail able depends on the R amp S FSW Trigger In Out Source Ext Trigger 1 z Level 14V Drop OutTime 0 0s Offset 005 Slope Falling Hysteresis 3 0 dB Holdoff 0 05 External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger 2 Input ehem Output Type User Defined Level High Pulse Length 100 0 us Send Trigger SL Trigger 3 DIR Output Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration TOS SUN EE 118 ek a 118 Laban Tiggo E 118 c E 119 ud e 119 Mul d ERUNT 119 lur Rec 120
95. VAMOS modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe AQPSk Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR 4 dB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SCPir 4 Subchannel 1 User TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannell TSC USER Subchannel 1 Set User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannell TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Subchannel 1 Query User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannell TSC USER 10111101100110010000100001 Subchannel 2 User TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC gt USER Subchannel 2 Set User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannel2 TSC USER 11010111111101011001110100 Subchannel 2 Query User TSC bits CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SUBChannel2 TSC USER 11010111111101011001110100 Slot configuration Activate slot 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON Normal Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TYPE NB AQPSK VAMOS modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe AQPSk Subchannel 1 TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell1 TSC 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number and Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC 0 1 Subchannel 1 Query TSC number CONFigure MS C
96. Value Measurement type MC and Wide Noise Spectrum Sweep mode CONTINUOUS Trigger settings FREE RUN Device type as defined channel default BTS Normal Frequency band as defined channel default E GSM 900 Carriers 1 active carrier at defined center frequency with NB GMSK modulation Reference power Maximum measured active carrier level Noise measurements Narrowband noise Wideband noise Intermodulation measure ments Order 3 and 5 Average count Ref meas 10 Noise meas 200 Limit line exceptions Evaluations Applied Window 1 Spectrum Graph Window 2 Carrier Power Table Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements 6 4 2 Configuration Overview NN Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important Um currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed d AM when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus Note that the configuration Overview depends on the selected measurement type Configuration for the default UO measurement Modulation Accuracy etc is described in chapter 6 3 1 Configuration Overview on page 88 4 Ret Count Mod Carr 1 Level set Offset Not amp Es 2 Signal Description Input Frontend Trigger Data Acquisition oy E3 w Reference Meas Noise Meas Result Config Display Config Measure Narrow H Y Axis wi 1 Hz
97. a limit line is drawn and where there are none Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH OWID See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results FETCh WSPectrum WIDeband OUTer ALIL on page 342 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 174 4 Marker Table Wnd Type X value 1 Mi 13 25 GHz M 600 0 kHz 1 M 600 0 kHz 1 d 2 0 MHz Tip To navigate within long marker tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results CALCulate n MARKercm X on page 344 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 344 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 45 R amp SSFSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 5 Basics on GSM Measurements Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in GSM measure ments is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings 5 1 Relevant Digital Standards The measurements and the physical layer the layer of the GSM network on which modulation transmission of RF signals reception of RF signals and demodulation take place is defined in the standards Table 5 1 GSM standards 3GPP TS 45 004 Details on Modulation 3GPP TS 45 005 General measurement specifications and limit values 3G
98. a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key 13 Check the result of the limit check in the graph If it indicates FAIL refer to the numeric results in the table display for more precise information on which fre quency exceeds the limit indicated by a negative A to Limit value and red char acters 9 5 How to Measure Wideband Noise in Multicarrier Set ups 1 Press the MODE key and select the GSM application 2 Press the MEAS key and select the MC and Wide Noise measurement 3 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for the MCWN measure ment 4 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by select ing a multicarrier device type and defining the active carriers e Select a device type supports multiple carriers on the Device tab e Activate the required number of carriers and define the frequency expected burst type and modulation for each active carrier in the Carriers tab 5 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the required frequency band and measurement span 6 Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device 7 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is
99. aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 249 6 4 7 Reference Measurement Settings Reference power levels can either be defined manually or determined automatically by a reference measurement prior to the noise measurement Reference power settings can be configured in the Reference Meas tab of the Mea surement Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Press the MEAS CONFIG key and then select the Reference Meas softkey e nthe Overview select the Reference Meas button Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Reference Meas Noise Meas Reference Power Measurements Measure Average Count Carrier Selection Carrier Reference Powers Power Level Ref Power RBW 300 KHz Ref Power RBW 100 KHz Ref Power RBW 30 KHz Enabling a reference power measurement Measure sss 164 Reference Average Count EE 164 Carrier Selection CatTiBr m otn beo en eee EEE EAEE eae RE 165 Defining Reference Powers Manually 22 iter RRE NEE deed 165 2 15 m Muatsundenins 165 L Ref Power RBW 300 kHz 165 L Ref Power RBW E 165 L Ref Power RBW 30 kHz esiste ttn non da da rion edet kdo ada 166 Enabling a reference power measurement Measure If enabled the reference powers of all active carriers are measured for MCWN mea surements If disa
100. acquisitions required to obtain the required number of results the Statistic Count may vary considerably If both Trigger to Sync and other result types are active at the same time the latter are finished first and the traces in particular the current measurement trace remains unchanged until the Trigger to Sync measurement has also finished The counter in the channel bar counts the slower of the two events i e the number of measurements if a Trigger to Sync result display is active D Statistic count for Trigger to Sync vs other measurements In MSRA mode only a single data acquisition is performed by the MSRA Master and the R amp S FSW GSM application analyzes this data repeatedly Thus the Trigger to Sync measurement will only count one data acquisition and can never reach a larger Statistic Count value Tip You can query the current value of the counter for both Trigger to Sync and other measurements in remote control as well See SENSe SWEep COUNC TRGS CURRent on page 253 Obviously the Statistic Count has an impact on all results and values that are re cal culated after each measurement The higher the count the more values are taken into consideration and the more likely the result of the calculation will converge to a stable value On the other hand the fewer measurements are considered the higher the var iance of the individual results and the less reliable the calculation result will be F
101. active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result L TER 7 Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Analyzing GSM Measurements Return values lt WindowIndex gt Index number of the window Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Usage Event LAYout REP
102. and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks e Adapt the diagram scaling to the displayed data 13 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key 10 10 1 10 2 Improving Performance Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results of a GSM measurement do not meet your expectations try the following recommendations to optimize the measurement e improving PSMOMANC ic ucro ie repete stern e Vena etie e enden Fore Uc eget ene 190 e IMPROVING EVM ACCURACY toit tc ceteros tc ce E ue tetti 190 e Optimizing Limit COCKS EE 191 Emor Messa een eosin daia a taaa siera aaa aaa EA 192 Improving Performance If the GSM measurement seems to take a long time try the following tips Using external triggers to mark the frame start The R amp S FSW GSM application needs the frame start as a time reference It either searches for a frame start after every UO data acquisition or relies on a trigger event that marks the frame start An external trigger or a power trigger that mark the frame start can speed up measurements See also chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 In MSRA mode trigger events are not considered when determining the frame start in a GSM measurement as the trigger is defined by the MSRA Master for all applications simultaneously and most l
103. ced eese t tet ert ene cte e on se uter Sect 126 Refresh MSRA MSRT on 126 Statistic Count Defines the number of frames to be included in statistical evaluations For measure ments on the Slot to Measure the same slot is evaluated in multiple frames namely in the number specified by the Statistic Count for statistical evaluations The default value is 200 in accordance with the GSM standard Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration For details on the impact of this value see chapter 5 14 Impact of the Statistic Count on page 70 Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 252 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 249 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected cha
104. command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MSFD see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 298 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 330 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA on page 332 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA on page 330 Modulation Spectrum Table The modulation spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of a certain part of the burst 50 to 90 of the useful part excluding the training sequence TSC by mea suring the average power in this part over several frames The Modulation Spectrum Table displays the measured power levels and their offset to the limits defined by the standard as numeric results Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 24 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays Values that exceed both limits are indicated by red characters and an asterisk next to the value and a negative A to Limit value 2 Modulation Spectrum Table Offset Power Negative Offsets Power Positive Offsets dB to Limit dB dBm to Limit Note The graphical results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 The following values are displayed Table 4 4 Modulation spectrum results Result Description Offset kHz Fixed frequency
105. command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 233 Span Defines the frequency span The center frequency is kept constant The following range is allowed SpanNmin lt f span lt f max fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 268 Start Stop Defines the start and stop frequencies The following range of values is allowed fmin s fstart s fmax Span min fmin SPanmin s Fstop s fmax fmin fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 269 SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 269 Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically In Manual mode the frequency span is defined by a Start Stop or a Center Fre quency and Span If the Auto span mode is enabled default the span for the MCWN measurement is set to one of the following values automatically 6 4 4 3 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Tx Band The span for the MCWN measurement is set to the Tx band 10 MHz for multicarrier BTS device types or 2 MHz for all other device types The Tx bands are defined in the standard in 3GPP TS 45 005 chap ter 2 Frequency bands and channel arrangement This setting is recommended for measurements according to the standard Carriers 1 8 MHz The span is set to the span of all active GSM carriers plus a margin of 1 8 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for narrowband noi
106. dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 236 INPut GAIN VALue on page 236 Output Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt Output The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual IF Video Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Tel ele ae lr ET 115 IE Qul PS GUGINO EE 116 WEE 116 Berg EE 116 EMME EE 116 ei 116 b Pulse Leng EE 117 BE Nos MERE 117 IF VIDEO DEMOD Output This function is not available for the R amp S FSW GSM application Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration IF Out Frequency This function is not available for the R amp S FSW GSM application Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 232 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on
107. for setting and query lt Value gt PGSM EGSM DCS PCS TGSM RGSM GSM PGSM Primary GSM EGSM Extended GSM DCS DCS PCS PCS TGSM T GSM RGSM Railway GSM GSM GSM RST EGSM Example CONF NETW PGSM Example For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chap ter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Manual operation See Frequency Band on page 91 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND lt Value gt This command works in conjunction with thecCONFigure MS NETWork TYPE command to specify the frequency band of the signal to be measured The command is not in line with the manual operation so the SCPI remote control command remains compatible with the R amp S FS K5 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 380 410 450 480 710 750 810 850 900 1800 1900 380 380 MHz band valid for TGSM 410 410 MHz band valid for TGSM 450 450 MHz band valid for GSM 480 480 MHz band valid for GSM 710 710 MHz band valid for GSM 750 750 MHz band valid for GSM 810 810 MHz band valid for TGSM 850 850 MHz band valid for GSM 900 900 MHz band valid for PGSM EGSM RGSM and TGSM 1800 1800 MHz band valid for DCS 1900 1900 MHz band valid for PCS RST 900 Example CONF NETW FREQO
108. found are displayed and taken into account in the averaging of the results The behav ior of this option depends on the value of the Synchronization parameter Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC ONLY on page 256 UO Correlation Threshold This threshold determines whether a burst is accepted if Measure only on Sync is acti vated If the correlation value between the ideal UO signal of the given TSC and the measured TSC is below the UO correlation threshold then the application reports Sync not found in the status bar Additionally such bursts are ignored if Measure only on Sync is activated Note If the R amp S FSW GSM application is configured to measure GMSK normal bursts a threshold below 97 will also accept 8PSK normal bursts with the same TSC for analysis In this case activate Measure only on Sync and set the I Q Correla tion Threshold to 9796 This will exclude the 8PSK normal bursts from the analysis Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC IQCThreshold on page 257 Symbol Decision The symbol decision determines how the symbols are detected in the demodulator Setting this parameter does not affect the demodulation of normal bursts with GMSK modulator For normal bursts with 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM or AQPSK modulation or higher symbol rate bursts with QPSK 16QAM or 32QAM modulation use this parame ter to get a trade off between performance symbol error rate of the R amp S FSW GSM application and measurement speed Au
109. graph default top 2 Inner IM Table replaces Carrier Power table 3 Outer IM Table bottom 4 Outer narrow band table bottom left 5 Outer wide band table bottom right LAYout REPL WINDow 2 IIMP LAYout ADD WINDow 2 BEL OIMP LAYout ADD WINDow 3 BEL ONAR LAYout ADD WINDow 4 RIGH OWID Initiate a new measurement and wait until the sweep has finished INITiate IMMediate WAI Query trace data for Spectrum graph TRAC1 DATA TRACE1 Query intermodulation results Programming Examples FETC WSP IMPR INN FETC WSP IMPR OUT Query outer narrowband table results and outer wideband table results FETC WSP NARR OUT FETC WSP WID OUT Query wideband noise limit line including exceptions x values CALC1 LIM1 CONT DATA y values CALC1 LIM1 UPP DATA Query limit line trace values for intermodulation measured with 100 kHZ RBW x values CALC1 LIM2 CONT DATA y values CALC1 LIM2 UPP DATA Query limit line trace values for intermodulation measured with 300 kHZ RBW x values CALC1 LIM3 CONT DATA y values CALC1 LIM3 UPP DATA Query number of exceptions of range A Counted number of exceptions CALC1 LIM5 EXC COUN CURR Maximum number of exceptions allowed to pass the exception check CALC1 LIM5 EXC COUN MAX Query number of exceptions of range B Counted number of exceptions CALC1 LIM6 EXC COUN CURR
110. gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 86 11 4 Selecting the Measurement In addition to the default GSM UO measurement a new separate measurement is now available for multicarrier wideband noise see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 34 CONFigure MEASUremient 2 recuerde dne eure ce sued i da daa do eter sented 203 CONFigure MEASurement lt MeasType gt This command selects the measurement to be performed in the GSM application Note if you switch between the IQ measurement and MCWN measurement the enable positive and negative transition settings in the status registers are set to their default values Thus you must reconfigure the transitions after switching measure ments if necessary See chapter 11 10 4 Querying the Status Registers on page 352 Parameters lt MeasType gt IO Default UO measurement to determine the modulation accuracy modulation transient spectrum trigger
111. how to configure an EVM measurement in a remote envi ronment f a a Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt ppHaHsaasss Frequency and Level Set center frequency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM ees Trigger settings Use these settings only if an external trigger is connected to the TRIGGER INPUT connector of the analyzer Otherwise ignore these commands Programming Examples Define the use of an external trigger TRIGger SOURce EXT Determine the offset from the trigger event to the frame start start of active part of slot 0 Define a trigger offset of 2 ps TRIGger HOLD 2us E Configuring Data Acquisition Define a capture time of 1 second gt 200 GSM frames SENSe SWEep TIME 1 s Define a statistic count of 200 i e 200 GSM frames are evaluated statistically SENSe SWEep COUNt 200 ass sess 252 Configuring the result display Delete result display 3 and 4 and activate the following result displays 1 Magnitude Capture default upper left 2 PvT Full burst default below Mag Capt 3 Modulation Accuracy next to Mag Capt 4 Modulation Spect
112. in the 3GPP standard are applied to the limit checks of the MCWN measurements Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit EXCeption STATe on page 273 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Fre 168 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 168 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq This function adjusts the center frequency and ARFCN I Q mode only automatically For multicarrier measurements all carrier settings are automatically adjusted see chapter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 This command is not available when using the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Carriers are only detected in a range of approximately 25 MHz to 2 GHz For further details see chapter 5 16 Automatic Carrier Detection on page 82 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 267 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuat
113. in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the GSM Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application GSM UO Measurement Results Details on supported measurements and their result types Basics on GSM Measurements Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration and Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command UO Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw UO measurement data How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup e Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform GSM measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes e List of remote commands Alp
114. is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Magnitude Error see table 4 1 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 312 Retrieving Results Return values lt Result gt numeric value Magnitude error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS MERR RMS SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the UO Offset Sup pression When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the UO Offset Suppression see table 4 1 Return values Result numeric value IO offset suppression Default unit dB Example READ BURS OSUP SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM This command starts the measurement and reads out the 95 percentile of the Error Vector
115. is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FSW GSM application see chapter 5 5 Trig ger settings on page 52 For this purpose the trigger is considered to be in Free Run mode Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Settings No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Settings Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 120 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 116 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con f
116. lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Analyzing GSM Measurements Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 173 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters lt Trace gt 1to4 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 173 General Marker Settings The following commands define general settings for all markers ESI NH EUM 287 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 174 Marker Positioning Settings The following commands are required to set a specific marker to the result of a peak search CAL Culate nzM Abkercm M AXimum AbPtak eene nennen ntn 288 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm M AXimumf PDEAK nnne nnn 288 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK cessisse nnne 288 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M ANimum APDEak nnne 288 C
117. mands lt k gt is 5 Range B e For multicarrier BTS device types Bands inside the Tx band 10 MHz are counted Bands containing third order IM products and adjacent bands are ignored These are the only exceptions allowed by the standard Note that this range includes range A The number of exceptions thus includes the results from range A For the exact details see 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 12 3 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise e For other device types Bands in a distance over 6 MHz from the outermost carriers are counted For the exact details see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 6 2 1 4 1 The suffix required to query the number of exceptions in range B using remote com mands lt k gt is 6 5 15 5 Intermodulation Calculation If intermodulation measurement is activated the following calculations are performed If there are N active carriers with frequencies f fo f3 fy find all possible combina tions of integer coefficients c4 C5 C3 Cy for which the following equation is true N Je M k 1 with M intermodulation order Use all those combinations of coefficients c to calculate all possible intermodulation frequencies of the given order M Example Calculating intermodulation For 3 carriers and IM order 3 these are all the theoretical combinations of c Table 5 9 Intermodulation coefficients depending on number of carriers involved 1 carrier 2 carriers 3 carriers 003 0
118. measurement and reads out the peak result of the Error Vec tor Magnitude taken over the selected number of bursts When the measurement is started the analyzer is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the EVM results see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value EVM Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PEAK AVER User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 309 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements DEEN Usage Query only For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Error Vec tor Magnitude When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the EVM results see table 4 1 Return values l
119. modulation NGMSk Normal burst GMSK modulation RST NGMS CONF MCAR CARR3 MTYP AQPS See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 See Modulation on page 101 11 5 2 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation lt Mode gt This command describes the measurement setup for multicarrier measurements Parameters lt Mode gt CONTiguous Setup contains one subblock of regularly spaced carriers only NCONtiguous Setup contains two subblocks of carriers with a gap inbetween The position of the gap between the subblocks must be defined using CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier on page 219 RST CONT Example CONF MCAR FALL NCON Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Manual operation See Carrier Allocation on page 100 CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier lt CarrNo gt This command defines the position of the gap for non contiguous setups see CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation on page 219 Parameters lt CarrNo gt Number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Range 1 16 RST 1 Example CONF MCAR FALL NCON GSAC 7 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Manual operation See Ga
120. of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Note in manual operation the result of the limit check for an individual slot is included in the Power vs Slot results see Power vs Slot on page 27 Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to perform the limit check on The selected slot must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S slot lt First slot to measure Num ber of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON Fail 0 OFF Pass Example READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 LIMit FAIL Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 11 8 7 Retrieving Results For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 Transient Spectrum Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation For details on the individual results see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 READ vs FETCh commands Note that two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command FETCHISREGC tums
121. preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example TRIG LEV Top 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 120 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 120 TRIGger SEQuence RFPower HOLDoff Time This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command is available for any trigger source not just RF Power Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 240 command for new remote control programs Parameters Time Default unit S TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigge
122. resolution filter for the Modulation Spectrum and Transi ent Spectrum measurements Normal 3 dB Gauss filter 5 pole according to the GSM standard Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE on page 264 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List This setting is only required by the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation see Mod ulation Spectrum Table on page 24 In this evaluation the spectrum of the signal at fixed frequency offsets is determined The list of frequencies to be measured is defined by the standard Additionally sparse versions of the specified frequency lists with fewer intermediate frequencies are provided for quicker preliminary tests Note Modulation RBW at 1800 kHz As opposed to previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers in which the modulation RBW at 1800 kHz was configurable the R amp S FSW configures the RBW and VBW internally according to the selected frequency list see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 136 For the Modulation Spectrum Graph both the RBW and VBW are set to 30 kHz For the Modulation Spectrum Table they are set accord ing to table 4 6 The frequency list also determines the used sample rate see Sample rate on page 123 1 8 MHz The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 1 8 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 6 5 MHz In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers t
123. set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to 0 ina CONDition bit is not detected The ENAB1e part of the STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Usage Event STATus QUEue NEXT This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned Usage Query only Status Reporting System 11 10 4 2 Reading Out the EVENt Part STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only 11 10 4 3 Reading Out the CONDition Part STATus OPERation CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable
124. sweep measurement is performed using an RBW of 100 kHz The second sweep mea surement is performed using an RBW of 300 kHz For more details on how intermodulation is calculated see chapter 5 15 5 Intermodu lation Calculation on page 78 For more details on how wideband noise results are determined see chapter 5 15 6 Wideband Noise Measurement on page 80 Evaluating the results for display After all the reference and noise measurements have been performed the measured data is evaluated for the final result display This includes the following procedures e Averaging the results from several measurements e Putting the results in relation to the reference power values Merging the traces according to the distance from the carriers and the position of the intermodulation products e Performing limit checks see chapter 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results on page 76 The details of evaluation are described for the individual evaluation methods in chap ter 4 2 1 Multicarrier Evaluation Methods on page 35 Continuous measurement mode If continuous sweep mode is selected the measurement process described above is repeated continuously i e after the average count number of noise measurements the results are evaluated and displayed a new reference sub measurement is performed the noise measurements are repeated and so on 5 15 2 Contiguous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation In a standard GSM measurement
125. the modulation spectrum UO measurements and MCWN measurement This value is ignored if CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AUTO is ON Parameters lt Power gt maximum output power in dBm RST 0 dBm Example CONF POW PCAR AUTO OFF CONF POW PCAR 4 dBm Usage Query only Manual operation See Maximum Output Power per Carrier multicarrier measure ments only on page 92 CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AUTO lt State gt If enabled the maximum measured power level for the carriers is used as the maxi mum output power per carrier If disabled the maximum power is defined by CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier on page 209 Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF POW PCAR AUTO OFF CONF POW PCAR 4 dBm Usage Query only Manual operation See Maximum Output Power per Carrier multicarrier measure ments only on page 92 11 5 1 2 Frame Frame settings determine the frame configuration used by the device under test CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal esses nennen nennen 209 CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal State If activated all slots of a frame have the same length 8 x 156 26 normal symbol peri ods If deactivated slots number 0 and 4 of a frame have a longer duration all other a shorter duration compared to the equal slot length 157 156 156 156 157 156 156 156 normal symbol periods 11 5 1 3 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements See 3GPP TS 51 0213GPP
126. the Amplitude Droop see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Amplitude droop Default unit dB R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee ees Example READ BURS ADR SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Burst Power When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Burst Power see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Burst Power Default unit dB Example READ BURS BPOW SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation This command starts the
127. the maximum output power per carrier which determines the limit lines for the modulation spectrum UO measurements and MCWN measurement In Auto mode the maximum measured power level for the carriers is used This setting is only available for multicarrier measurements Remote command CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AUTO on page 209 CONFigure MS POWer PCARrier on page 209 6 4 3 2 Carrier Settings Access Overview gt Signal Description gt Carriers The Carrier settings define whether the expected signal contains a single or multiple carriers Multiple carriers can only be defined if a mulltcarrier Device Type is selected see chapter 6 3 2 1 Device Under Test Settings on page 90 Up to 16 carriers can be configured for a single MCWN measurement Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Signal De Device Carriers Carrier Allocation Non Contiguous gap start after ud Carrier Active Frequency Modulation 1 935 0 MHz NB GMSK 2 935 6 MHz NB GMSK 3 936 2 MHz NB GMSK 4 936 8 MHz NB GMSK The carriers can also be configured automatically see Adjusting the Center Fre quency Automatically Auto Freq on page 138 Caser rO UG EE 145 Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers only 146 Aiye CON TIGE S deed EEN EE een 146 Ree c M 146 DADO EON user reete Er isdem vehe ee e ENFRENTE 146 Carrier Allocation Defines whether a multica
128. the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Second inside the found bursts search for the TSC of the Slot to Measure as given in the frame configuration Burst TSC is usually faster than TSC for bursted signals TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to Measure as given in the frame configuration This mode corresponds to a correlation with the given TSC This mode can be used for continuous but framed signals or bursted signals Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Burst Search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Note For Burst no demodulation measurements e g Modulation Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum measurements are supported None Do not synchronize at all If an external or power trigger is chosen the trigger instant corresponds to the frame start Tip Manually adjust the trigger offset to move the burst to be ana lyzed under the mask in the Power vs Time measurement Note For None no demodulation measurements e g Modulation Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum measurements are supported Remote command CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 255 Measure only on Sync If activated default only results from frames slots where the Slot to Measure was
129. the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 244 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 244 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 244 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 244 6 3 4 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Pulse Length Output
130. then select the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Power Class Preamplifier ei Input Coupling AC Pr Impedance Power CIES Sy xis teda ae tueatur reos a LEA a ENa 152 Reference E8val oie reete dri ae ve cr even a d EO E e cd 152 L Shifting the Display Offset 153 Mechanical Attenuatton nennen nnne enn eren nn eren nen 153 L Attenuation Mode value ennemi tns 153 Using Electronic Altenuation ito ii eret eco ties te E E ore EE REEL tees 153 duele uo E mE 154 Mimi LEE 154 Power Class The following power classes are supported For MCWN measurements no power class is used NONE 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 207 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum s
131. to analyze data in MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA appli cations receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the applica tion data For the R amp S FSW GSM application in MSRA operating mode the applica tion data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capture in Sig nal and Spectrum Analyzer mode see Capture Time on page 123 In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for GSM measurements The Magnitude Capture display shows the application data of the R amp S FSW GSM application in MSRA mode User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 82 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode o MCWN measurements and MSRA mode Only the default GSM UO measurement Modulation Accuracy is available in MSRA mode not the new MCWN measurement see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 34 Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corresponding standard for GSM 200 kHz by vertical blue lines labeled
132. to measure on page 129 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 Demodulation The demodulation settings provide additional information to optimize frame slot and symbol detection CGONFigurepMSESYNOIMODE ET 255 E Les DIE ROCHER d ee CT EE 256 GONFigurepMSESYNG IOGC Threshold EE 257 CONFigure MS DEMod DECISION c cscseeeseseeeeeeeecereceneeeneneseneaseaesanaeneauenaneneneness 257 GONFigurer MS DEMod STDBIIS odori eater ete hne Dann Ra Edere ec at 258 CONFigure MS SYNC MODE Mode This command sets the synchronization mode of the R amp S FSW K10 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Mode gt ALL TSC BURSt NONE ALL First search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configuration in the capture buffer Second inside the found bursts search for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration ALL is usually faster than TSC for bursted signals TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration This mode corresponds to a correlation with the given TSC This mode can be used for conti nous but framed signals or bursted signals BURSt Search for the power profile burst search according to the frame configur
133. to the current measurement settings GONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE 2 2 2c tra ra Loic etes eye cae e d YR a AR ZR aad 265 GCONFigurel MS AUTO E elle 266 CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE sse rennen nnne en nene 266 CONFig re MS POWer AUTO SWEep TIME neideg t ter ente et tte 266 SENSeJADJusSt e EE 267 CONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE lt Value gt This command automatically performs a single measurement to detect the optimal frame configuration i e frame and slot parameters depending on the current mea surement settings and results This function is not available in MSRA mode if the Sequencer is active Note that in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode if the Sequencer is active this com mand cannot be aborted via the ABORt command Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example CONF AUTO FRAM ONCE Manual operation See Automatic Frame Configuration on page 139 CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE This command is used to perform a single measurement to detect the required level automatically This command is not available in MSRA mode Note that this command cannot be aborted via the ABORt command Example CONF AUTO LEV ONCE Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 138 CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE This command is used to perform a single measurement that determines the trigger offset automatically This command
134. value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Parameters Impedance 50175 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 103 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported For Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN measurements only RF input is allowed Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt Source gt RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface For details on UO input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 102 See Digital UO Input State on page 105 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 107 11 5 2 2 Configuring Digital UO Input and Output Useful commands for digital UO data described elsewhere INP SEL DIQ see INPut SELect on page 222 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 240 Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin w
135. with the application name Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the R amp S FSW GSM application the analysis interval is automatically determined according to the basis of evaluation for example the Slot to Measure or the slot scope The currently used analysis interval in seconds related to capture buffer start is indi cated in the window header for each result display Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within th
136. 00000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Usage Query only Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the internal reference power of the Modulation Spectrum This command is only available for Modulation Spectrum Table evaluations see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference power in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the reference power in Hz 30 kHz Example READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate Usage Query only Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 READ SPECtrum MODulation GATing READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated Modulation Spectrum mea surements see Modulation Spectrum Table on pa
137. 1 INPut FILTer YIG STATe ly gui er V BSy P E INPut GAINEMALU s eerte ee rene ett te rete PER des eren EEN re gero EXIRET hwanalbuocupe c aaanees lei dee KETTEN KE 227 INPut IQ EULESCale AUTO EE 227 INPut IQ FULLscale L EE 228 INPut IQ TYPE SS INPUT SELEG T UNT INST ment er EI RR EE 199 NN ele LE TEE 199 INSTr ment CREate NEW ort terrent rrr n ente ere ree er rr nne rec npe rS 199 INS Tr meht DELE6l6 notti tei EEN Cn cet e E e Edda Cede i ce ud eines 200 MINS KU Ion ue HIS c 200 INSTrument REName INSTrument SELCGE re EAYOUEAD DIS WINDOW e 276 EAYOunCATAlOg i WINDOW ecrire reet EEEE ra PR Ye Ye ER VE EV Ee Y SEVENTH 278 LAYout IDENtify WINDow ES geen E ET EE LAY ere E WINDOW tnter rtr et ren trien rne ner rc trn erre ee LAY OutrS EE LAYOUCWINDOWw ESTER E D EE 281 LAY out WINDOWS IBENUTyO crt reet eret eter x ex eter xe tete e EP Eee ex ENTE ERES 281 LAYOUT WINDOWS E LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace LAY out wWINDOWS lt n iT EE 282 MENGEN EE EE EE 345 MMEMOry STOResn IQ COMMBSht iate orte t ep rec Ee c de p ee Eg 346 MMEMOry STOResns IQ S EAT ciii tht et re dere E EL v o E e e EY ED EY vu P E EX ERES 346 EE MR el Ee Ee ei GD e coder tta pea epe Prep onte ete CES
138. 1 READ BURG MACCuracvltlOOtset MANimum ethernet ener eerte nnn nena 311 READ BURG MACCuracvllOOtiset GDEViatton ennt eene 311 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage sess eene nennen rennen 312 READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent m READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXiMUM nennen nennen eterne nnne READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation essent 312 READ BURG MACCurscvlMERRor RMG AVEhage nennen nennen nennen 312 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent sess nennen ener ennt 312 READDURGOCMACCOurScvlMERRor RMG MANImum eene nren nnne 312 READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation eese nennen 312 READ BURSt MACCuracy 0SUPpress AVERage 313 READ BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress CURRENU eenen etr rrr thirteen knee ri an nage 313 READ BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress MAXimum sess n rennen 313 READ BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress SDEViation eese 313 READ BURSI IIMAGGuracyE PERGerntlle E VM rto tne tuned epe aerae pu eMe FE Pee SERE HEX trt SEENEN 313 READ BURSI MACOCuracy PERCentile MERRUOE ur teret rentrer ees 314 READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERCentile PERROr ottenere rore tn tnrba inier Tain 314 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERage essent rennen nre neret en 314 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent essen nennen ner
139. 12 021 102 201 111 030 120 210 10 2 201 11 1 300 01 2 02 1 102 20 1 1 11 00 3 1 20 2 107 10 2 20 1 111 0 30 0 12 0 21 1 1 1 300 120 210 1 11 0 1 2 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 20 2 1 0 critical intermodulation Critical intermodulations For critical intermodulations the sum of all c equals 1 For example 2 f 1 f indica ted in table 5 9 They are critical because they are close to active carriers Note that for some combinations the following may apply Results are much too far away from the active carriers to be of relevance Results are negative Multicarrier and Wideband Noise Results have an identical IM frequency Therefore the R amp S FSW GSM application always checks the list of theoretical IM fre quencies for the following aspects e ntermodulation frequencies are ignored if they are outside the set frequency span or the range defined by the standard typically the Tx band 2 MHz or 10 MHz e For some measurements the GSM standard distinguishes how many carriers were involved in generating the intermodulation This means checking how many c 0 Overlapping intermodulation limit lines Intermodulations with different orders for example 3 and 5 might fall on the exact same frequency or so close that the corresponding limit line ranges overlap In this case the R amp S FSW GSM application checks which IM s limit value or relaxation value applies according to the GSM standard The following ca
140. 244 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 245 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 245 Trigger Settings Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Trigger settings can be configured in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following Press the TRIG key and then select the Trigger Config softkey e Inthe Overview select the Trigger button Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source DEEG 0 0 s Offset Slope Rising Hysteresis Holdoff The GSM measurements can be performed in Free Run untriggered mode how ever an external trigger or a power trigger can speed up measurements For more information see on page 52 External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S
141. 362 FETCHh BURSI MAGCGCuracy FERROE CURROnt cte crece etn nre tav p e gr e dept ota 362 FETCH BURStEMACCuracy Ge Al ln RE 362 FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation essen mener 362 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EREQuency CURRent ni iion rtr rr eren Eder 310 FETCRh BURSI MACCuracy FRREQuency MAXimutm sucus ertet trennen hen a saesae 310 iso d AM DR Are FUR ain O 310 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQIMbalance CURRent 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum essent rennen 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance SDEViation essent 311 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage sse 311 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRENT neinir aaga eapi i A nennen 311 FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum essent 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage sese rennen 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent essent rennen nennen 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum esses nennen nennen nenne 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation essen eene 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMG AVERage ener rennneen rentre 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent
142. 38 Inner Narrow Band Table 40 Inner Spectrum Table 42 Input output remote 267 Intermodulation 167 Intermodulation measurement ssssss 73 Intermodulation results sssini tiritiria 38 Limit CHECKS 215i tit e daaa onnie 76 Limit lines 167 Measurement eccentric nece ero e otra proe 34 Measurement process sessesseeeeeerenee 72 MIRA eid ene dee ecd D 35 Narrowband noise a 167 Narrowband noise measurement 72 73 Noise measurement remote sssssss 272 Noise measurement settings 166 Non contiguous carriers Basics 73 Outer IM Table Peisana esir 38 Outer Spectrum Table 40 43 POMONA ET 188 Reference levels manual sss 165 Reference measurement 72 164 Reference measurement remote 269 Reference measurement settings Reference power level sa 165 Reference DOWetS eer enne tede 75 Signal description remote 2607 Spectrum graph ort nr entretenu 36 Triggering remote 269 Wideband noise 167 Wideband noise measurement cece eee 73 MCWN Spectrum Graph Results remote ei bre 303 MEAS key eee Measure only on Sync Measurement channel Greating remote i ette de es 199 Deleting remote AA 200 Duplicat
143. 3994674682617 0 24 647823333740234 24 647823333740234 24 647823333740234 0 1 0720701217651367 1 0720701217651367 1 0720701217651367 0 1 0720850229263306 1 0720850229263306 1 0720850229263306 0 9 8495550155639648 9 8495550155639648 9 8495550155639648 0 14 069089889526367 14 069089889526367 14 069089889526367 0 0 091422632336616516 0 091422632336616516 0 091422632336616516 0 101 05810546875 101 05810546875 101 05810546875 0 0 036366362124681473 0 036366362124681473 0 036366362124681473 0 76 698326110839844 76 698326110839844 76 698326110839844 0 112 8399658203125 112 8399658203125 112 8399658203125 0 0 083038687705993652 0 083038687705993652 0 083038687705993652 0 24 07130241394043 1 0950000286102295 14 060454368591309 Manual operation See Modulation Accuracy on page 21 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Amplitude Droop When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on
144. 5 MHz FREQ CENT 935MHZ Sample Rate 6 5 MHz TRAC IQ SRAT 6 5MHz Capture Time 100 ms SET SWE TIME 0 1 s Set statistic count to 1 to obtain the I Q data of a single cap ture JI Otherwise several captures are performed until the set statistic count is reached VQ data is returned from the last capture SWE COUN 1 Switch to single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Start measurement and wait for sync I This performs one sweep or a single UO capture INIT WAI Determine output format binary float32 FORMat REAL 32 Read UO data of the entire capture buffer 653751 samples are returned as 1 Q 1 Q I 653751 4 Bytes float32 2 I Q 5230008 bytes TRAC IQ DATA MEM Read 2048 UO samples starting at the beginning of data acqui sition TRAC IQ DATA MEM 0 2048 Read 1024 UO samples starting at sample 2048 TRAC 1Q DATA MEM 2048 1024 See chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 Query only Retrieving Results 11 8 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation method selected by the LAY ADD WIND command also affects the results of the trace data query see TRACe n DATA TRACE lt n gt Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation method are provided here For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 4 1 GSM I Q Measur
145. 7578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt PowerVs1 Min lt Arra SEX fl l ime yOfFloat length 256 gt oat 134 float oat 142 float efl oat 140 float ArrayOfFloat Min Max lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 float 70 float float 71 float float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max PowerVsTime Spectrum Min ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt float 133 float float 111 float A 2 2 UO Data File Format iq tar lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow readin
146. ACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the I Q Imbalance When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the I Q Imbalance see table 4 1 Return values Result numeric value IO Imbalance Default unit NONE Example READ BURS IQIM SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERage READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset CURRent READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the standard deviation measure ment of the IQ Offset taken over the selected number of bursts When the measure ment is started the analyzer is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 311 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements SSS SS SS SS SS SS eS SS Se Return values lt Result gt numeric value Standard devi
147. ALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK esee 288 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK cesses 288 Analyzing GSM Measurements CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak sets the marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Max Peak on page 175 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 174 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 175 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 174 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet acti
148. Analog Baseband Interface Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BBP 30DBM TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 35V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 120 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 120 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or
149. BURSI MACGCuracy ADROoOp SDEYVialiOri rtr etre petet rbd 308 READ B RSIEMAGGUracy ALL suci c eue ut i TE rere ER Ra ER OV bet ru eeu 307 READ BURSI MACOCuracy BPOWer AVERage essent nre nennen 309 READ BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer CURRent eese eren nennen nennen nnne 309 READ BURG MACCuracvl BbOVWer MAXIMUM eee nnne nnne enne 309 READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation 309 READ BURSIE MAG Curacy FERROMAVERAQ6 irri etre ce nete hte pt e tpe een d 362 READ B RSIEMAGCGuracy FERROrGURROHE uiii decree nae tb setae ELE EAE ERE 362 READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor MANimum ener eene nennen inneren 362 READ BURSI MACGCuracy FERROr SDEVi tion edu 362 READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency AVERQge A 310 READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURREM 0 AA 310 READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum READ BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation eeseessssseseseeeseeeee nennen ii 310 READ BURSt MACCuracy lQIMbalance AVERAQe nennen 311 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQIMbalance CURRent sse een eene nnne nnn nnns 311 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQIMbalance MAXimum A READ BURSt MACCuracy QIMbalance SDEViation 0 eee cece cee eens cceeeceeeseeeseeeeseeseaeeneeeseeeseaeenaes 311 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQOFfset AVERAdGgG6 2 pite t rtp neret perd t aetna 311 READ B RSI MACCuracy IQOFfset CURR6erit 1 1 rrr erret imer tne ENNEN 31
150. By default and when electronic attenuation is not available mechanical attenuation is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 237 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 237 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span 213 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is a
151. CN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number which identifies the fre quency channel within the specific frequency band The GSM channel spacing is 200 kHz Communication between a mobile and a base station can be either frequency continu ous or frequency discrete distributed across various frequency channels FDMA In the standard the abbreviation SFH slow frequency hopping is used to designate the latter mode of communication Uplink and downlink Base stations and mobiles communicate in different frequency ranges the mobile sends in the uplink UL and the base station in the downlink DL The frequencies specified in the standard plus their channel numbers ARFCN are shown in the figure and table below Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution Frequency MHz 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 a E a a a A a a a a a a a E a a a a E T GSM 380 all Uplink i i Downlink T GSM 410 H GSM 450 H GSM 480 H GSM 710 H GSM 750 en T GSM 810 H GSM 850 I Frequency Band P GSM 900 H L Th T E GSM 900 R GSM 900 Fr T GSM 900 H DCS 1800 HI PCS 1900 n Fig 5 1 The frequencies specified in the GSM standard Table 5 2 Frequencies and channel numbers ARFCN in the GSM standard
152. CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect NARRow Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 136 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE Type This command switches the filter type for the resolution filter for the Modulation Spec trum Transient Spectrum and Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement Parameters for setting and query Type NORMal P5 NORMal Gaussian filter with a 3 dB bandwidth of either 30 kHz or 100 kHz This value is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only P5 5 Pole filter with a 3 dB bandwidth of either 30 kHz or 100 kHz This filter is required by the GSM standard specification RST P5 Example BAND TYPE NORM Manual operation See Filter Type on page 135 READ WSPectrum MODulation GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated Modulation Spectrum mea surements see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 The returned values can be used to set the gating interval for list measurements i e a series of measurements in zero span mode at several offset frequencies This is done in the Spectrum mode using the SENSe LIST subsystem see SENSe LIST POWer SET Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or External and Trigger
153. Ce sse tsssa isse ii essei ris sa asse sias 287 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event Analyzing GSM Measurements CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 172 See Marker Type on page 173 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 172 See Marker Type on page 173 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer
154. Check indicates FAIL zoom into the Power vs Time graph to deter mine the time at which the power exceeded the limit Note in measurements according to standard the delta value will be identical for all slots in the scope due to the Limit Line Time Alignment Slot to Measure set ting see step 9 Check the irregular slot in more detail in the Magnitude Capture compare the green and blue bars beneath the trace If necessary zoom into the display to view it in greater detail 9 4 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals Press the MODE key and select the GSM application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e Foraccess bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals 4 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab t
155. Data Query the sample rate for the captured I Q data Note The returned value depends on Capture time SENSe SWEep TIME Mod frequency list CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect Therefore only query the sample rate afterwards TRACe 10 SRATe 6500000 The number of samples can be calculated as follows floor CaptureTime 577 us SampleRate floor ls 577 us 6 5 MHz floor 6503750 5 6503750 samples Query the captured I Q data TRACel IQ DATA MEMory 0 6503750 Alternatively store the captured I Q data to a file MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal This example demonstrates how to configure a GSM measurement of an AQPSK modulated signal in a remote environment Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt E EE Frequency and Level Set center frequency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM Programming Examples E Slot 0 configuration Setup slot 0 for VAMOS AQPSK modulation Activate slot CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO STATe ON Normal burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TYPE NB AQPSK
156. E Coupling Fermnole ege cato bti NEE tice Digital Baseband Interface settings Overload remote trenes RE etten Medo ne Ee 102 Settings iones Source Configuration softkey 101 146 Source connection errors ssssessssss 349 Source Radio frequency RF 102 146 Input sample rate ISR Digital Me EE 105 Input sources Analog Baseband 2 rre eret 107 Digital e sioe e ertet ede 105 Input Frontend SOfIKGy irre pe en etes Input output MCWN remote Itistallation 2 hes dite AEN Intermodulation MEWN tenes Measurement MCWN 32 Results 2 eee Ee ode eb aay Intermodulation IM Calculatiori erre Ha eere nens 78 K Keys LINES not used teet dete ioc MKR FUNCT not used Peak Search inerte ety ic xd RUN CONT 5 rne rte ra Rn RUN SINGLE nerit ree rea ds L Limit check ler Wen Calculating EE Modulation Spectrum Multiple CattiBrs ctor Eh eerte oci oe ters Powers Time ucro in esten eod besoins Restricting spectrum E Transient SpectEUlm x i eit oe eniti nee ro n eee 70 TroubleshoOtg sco os rose entero re treni et nts 191 Limit lines Exceptions MCWN A 167 jor penguin eR sovateaysacreneedisnscvenraeste Time alignment es Limit Time Aligriment teta pnt rint 65 Linearized GMSK pulse ncn tren e poete 61 Filter EO feedthro gh icit rm
157. E key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the FJ Open icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Import softkey Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension 9 gr m oO ON Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the UO data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip amp or PowerArchiver amp to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser gt xzy xml How to Export and Import UO Data 4 Drag the UO parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser al gt file D ay xml e D x xzy xml xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz
158. EE 8 V VAMOS xu iir tet ett eren 50 379 Ww le e 46 62 Fillet iones ted ee e are E td eee od 98 Wideband measurement Results 2 iden dc a estende 44 Wideband noise MOWN diit e e ed e above Measurement RANGES siisii sedenie Window title bar information eeesees 14 Windows Adding remote ie teet tes 276 Closing remote 279 282 Config ritig enitn trn tr ere tients 90 Layout remote 279 Maximizing remote A 275 Querying remote dek eee Cenni 278 Replacing remote ninasi ia dnn 279 Splitting remote Kee X X value Enc a 172 Y Y axis el Le EN Y Scaling pice TENTE TS YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eese 104 Activating Deactivating remote 222 Z Zooming Activating remote EE 295 Area Multiple mode remote n 295 Area remote iniecta rent ab eite 294 Deactivatirig E 177 Multiple ModE ere ees 177 Multiple mode remote 295 296 ci c e 294 Restoring original display eseesssss 177 Single ne EE 177 Single mode remote AAA 294
159. ELect GSM Old FS K5 commands CONFigure MS MTYPe EDGE Please use the following K10 commands instead I K5 GMSK gt K10 GMSK I K5 EDGE gt K10 PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0O MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT4 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 MTYPe PSK8 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 MTYPe PSK8 Old FS K5 commands CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe Il gt GMSK Please use the following K10 commands instead CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure gt 0 This is the slot number of the slot to measure Set and query the modulation of the slot to measure CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 MTYPe Il gt GMSK Mode GSM CONFigure MS POWer AUTO ONCE This command is used to perform an auto level measurement immediately Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE on page 266 for new remote control pro grams CONFigure MS SSEarch State This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FSW K5 only In new K10 remote scripts use CONFigure MS SYNC MODE TSC or CONFigure MS SYNC MODE ALL instead see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on
160. ER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the UO Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh MSRA MSRT only on page 126 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 124 11 7 4 Zooming into the Display 11 7 4 1 Using the Single Zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA A 294 bpISPlayWINDowsrZOODM S TNT cc hla tpa tab rud aes erede aero t tdeo ada nnde 295 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram th
161. ERbRor RMG GDtEViaton en 315 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtERb or HMG AVEHRage nennen 315 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtERb orHRMGCURbent rehenes 315 READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERRor RMG MANimum cece ener 315 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtEbRbor RMS SDEVI ANON sirri oiiriairniriiinpiida aeda 315 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy ALL READ BURSt MACCuracy ALL This command starts the measurement and returns all the modulation accuracy results For details on the individual parameters see Modulation Accuracy on page 21 When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values lt MeasValue gt lt Error Vector Magnitude RMS gt lt Error Vector Magnitude Peak gt lt Magnitude Error RMS gt lt Magnitude Error Peak gt lt Phase Error RMS gt lt Phase Error Peak gt lt Origin Offset Sup pression gt lt IQ Offset gt lt IQ Imbalance gt lt Frequency Error gt lt Burst Power gt lt Amplitude Droop gt lt 95 ile EVM gt lt 95 ile Mag Error gt lt 95 ile Phase Error gt The results are output as a list of comma separated strings For each result except for iles the Current Average Maximum and Standard Deviation values are returned Retrieving Results Example READ BURS ALL 17 283994674682617 17 283994674682617 17 28
162. FAIL 1 the limit check of the upper limit line against the Graph max hold trace failed 0 passed MCWN Power Spectrum CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 FAIL 1 the limit check of the wideband noise limit line against the average trace failed 0 passed possibly with allowed exceptions if enabled Retrieving Results Result display SCPI Return values CALCulate lt n gt LIMit2 FAIL 1 the limit check of the limit line for intermodulation at 100 kHz against the average trace failed 0 passed possibly with allowed exceptions if enabled CALCulate lt n gt LIMit3 FAIL 1 the limit check of the limit line for intermodulation at 300 kHz against the average trace failed 0 passed possibly with allowed exceptions if enabled CALCulate lt n gt LIMit4 FAIL 1 the limit check of the narrowband noise limit line against the average measured distortion failed 0 passed possibly with allowed exceptions if enabled CALCulate lt n gt LIMit5 FAIL 1 the allowed number of exceptions if enabled in subblock A was exceeded 0 passed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit6 FAIL 1 the allowed number of exceptions if enabled in subblock B was exceeded 0 passed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA This command queries the y values of the lower limit line This command is only available for PvT Full Burst results Suffix lt k gt 2 lower limit line PvT Full Burs
163. GONFIgarer MS HPOWerCO DASS uu ccrte edes Gell ta er ten xo re ea Patna eade ere dag 207 GONFigure MSEPOWerBPOARFiGr 1 iieri toc SEENEN qe va pe zy EY E Pe ERR RR dE 209 CONFlouretM lbOWer PC Arer AUTO 209 CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE Value This command specifies the type of device to be measured Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt BTSNormal BTS TRX power class Normal BTSMicro BTS TRX power class Micro BTSPico BTS TRX power class Pico MSNormal MS normal type MSSMall MS small type MCBLocal Multicarrier BTS Local Area MCBMedium Multicarrier BTS Medium Range MCBWide Multicarrier BTS Wide Area RST BTSNormal Example CONF DEV TYPE BTSNormal Example For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chap ter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Manual operation See Device Type on page 91 CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE lt Value gt This command works in conjunction with the CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 206 command to specify the frequency band of the signal to be measured The command is not in line with the manual operation so the SCPI remote control command remains compatible with the R amp S FS K5 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters
164. GS ADPSize on page 265 6 3 8 Adjusting Settings Automatically Access AUTO SET Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Fre 138 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 138 Automatic Frame Configutratioh iieri eee e cae c ecd 139 ie Lee EE 139 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq This function adjusts the center frequency and ARFCN I Q mode only automatically For multicarrier measurements all carrier settings are automatically adjusted see chapter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 This command is not available when using the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Carriers are only detected in a range of approximately 25 MHz to 2 GHz For further details see chapter 5 16 Automatic Carrier Detection on page 82 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 267 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level T
165. Graph 1 Max e2 Clrw Note The graphical results only provide an overview of the spectrum For a detailed conformance check of the DUT to the GSM standard use the Transient Spectrum Table evaluation which uses the 5 pole filter required by the 3GPP standard The numeric results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modu lation Spectrum Table on page 24 The following default settings are used for Transient Spectrum measurements User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 30 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays O EEN Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot scope defined by Number of Slots to measure and the First Slot to measure in the Demodulation Settings see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 127 Averaging Configuration Number of frames as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check Limit check of maximum Max trace See chapter 5 13 2 Limit Check for Transient Spectrum on page 70 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH TSFD see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 298 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 330 Transient Spectrum Table The transient spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of the slot scope by measuring the power in these slots over several frames For details see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 The Transient Spectrum Table displays the measured power levels and their offset to the
166. HANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC TSC 0 Subchannel 1 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannell TSC SET Ze X Subchannel 2 TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC 0 2 Subchannel 2 Query TSC number and Set number Programming Examples CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC gt 0 2 Subchannel 2 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC TSC 0 Subchannel 2 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 SUBChannel2 TSC SET i gt 2 a Slot 2 7 configuration CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT4 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF ZE EE Demodulation and Slot Scope Configure slot 0 slot to measure for single slot measurements e g EVM modulation spectrum CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL MEASure 0 Configure slots 0 1 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient spectrum Set First slot to measure 0 Set No of slots to measure 2 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL NOFS 2 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSL OFFSet 0 Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence a Configuring Data Acquisition Define a statistic count of 10 i e 10 GSM frames are evaluated statistically SENSe SWEe
167. I MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage iis 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent essen 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MANlmum nene 312 FETCh BURSH MACCuracy MERRot PDEAK GDtEViaton ne 312 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage essent 312 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent essen rere 312 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor DEAK MANimum ener 312 READ BURG MAC CuracvlMERbRor PDEAkK GDEViaton een 312 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlMERRor RMG AVEhHRage nene 312 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRen1 cccecccccceeesecseseseeseeeeeseeeeetes 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum eese 312 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation eec 312 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage sss 312 READ BURSI MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent essen 312 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum cessisse 312 READ BURSIt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation essere 312 FETChBURSIEMACCuracy OSUPpress AVERa gE enne 313 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress CURR M siiin 313 FETCHR BURSIEMACCuracy OSUPpress MAXIMUM oieri ninian 313 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy OSUPpress SDEViation ueieeeeeeeese senes enint 313 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbpnress AVEhRage enne 313 Retrieving Results READ BURG MAC CuracvlOGllbporess CURbent eene 313 READ BURSIt MACCurac
168. LIMit lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only 11 10 4 4 Controlling the ENABle Part STATus OPERation ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register 11 10 4 5 11 10 4 6 Status Reporting System The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Note if you switch between the IQ measurement and MCWN measurement the transi tion is set to its default value Thus you must reconfigure the transition after switching measurements if necessary Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing th
169. Lace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 275 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected w
170. MEAS 5 Manual operation See Slot to Measure on page 128 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots lt NofSlotsToMeas gt This command specifies the number of slots to measure for the measurement interval of multi slot measurements i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum mea surements Between 1 and 8 consecutive slots can be measured Parameters for setting and query lt NofSlotsToMeas gt Number of slots to measure Range 1to8 RST 8 Slots Example CONF CHAN MSL NOFS 5 Manual operation See Number of Slots to measure on page 129 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet lt FirstSlotl oMeas gt This command specifies the start for the measurement interval for multi slot measure ments i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary 11 5 6 2 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt FirstSlotToMeas gt 0 based index for the first slot to measure relative to the GSM frame start RST 0 Slots Example CONF CHAN MSL OFFS 5 Manual operation See First Slot
171. Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 138 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements A new separate measurement is provided by the R amp S FSW GSM application to deter mine the wideband noise in multicarrier measurement setups see chapter 4 2 Multi carrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 34 Ee ER el Du E 267 e Input Outputand Frontend Settings trei eet erede ner ens 267 Reie e HE EE 269 e Configuring the Reference Measurement 269 e Configuring the Noise Measurement eeisessisseeeeeen tenen ttn nenas 272 e Adjusting Settings Automatically 274 ibunt st R nerd sain beasalancla anne 274 Signal Description The commands required for signal description are described in chapter 11 5 1 1 Device under Test Settings on page 204 chapter 11 5 1 4 Carrier on page 217 Input Output and Frontend Settings The commands required for input output and amplitude settings are described in chapter 11 5 2 1 RF Input on page 220 chapter 11 5 2 5 Configuring the Outputs on page 232 chapter 11 5 3 2 Amplitude Settings on page 235 11 6 2 1 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Frequency Settings The frequency span to be measured can be defined using a start and stop frequency or a center frequency and span alternatively it can be set to a specific characteristic value automatically Useful commands for frequency set
172. Measure PSLot STMeasure For each slot the mid of TSC is derived from the measured mid of TSC of the Slot to measure and the timeslot lengths speci fied in the standard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 PSLot For each slot the mid of TSC is measured This provides reason able time alignment if the slot lengths are not according to standard However the Power vs Time limit check is also passed RST STMeasure Example CONF BURS PTEM TAL PSL Manual operation See Limit Line Time Alignment on page 133 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 11 5 7 2 Spectrum The modulation and transient spectrum measurements allow for further configuration CONFigure SPEGCIrumm IMIEBEFT iaiiuue ce snes aden terae kp teh bp ene pe t tege eth ne 261 CONFIgunE SPEC tronic Blue e tuc tat oie res ne eee e et aere tata to rrt 261 GONFig re SPECtrum SWITchihg TYBE EE 262 GONFigure SPECtrum SWITchirig L MIT aono cron hn In Ro notre trea inu RR Rhen nas 262 CONFIgure SPEC trum MO Dullation bl MET otto Pee Pede rente teneras 262 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIS T SELect 1 iiie esies seek ancha po dc annia 263 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE cec tentent 264 READ W bechrum MODulation GATing eene nnns 264 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit LEFT State This command controls
173. NFig re M t MCArier EI Ter NENNEN ENEE 359 CONFigureEMS AMCARMEH STATE EE 360 CONFigure MS MCARTCR e CET 360 GONFigure MSI MTY P Grinna a a A GEAN 360 CONFigure MS POWer AUTO ONE 361 CONFig re MS SSEa EE 361 CGONFigu re WSPectrum MODulaton OMIT nania aa aaa 362 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor AVER amp Qe cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaaaaaaaaaaeaeneneneees 362 FETCH BURSIEMACCuracy FERRON HERE descendeu rte t eti ono tad totes 362 FETCh BURSIEMAGCuracy FERRor MAXimum coit eerta eet eo eunte ene aka d ENNERT 362 FETCH BURSIEMACGuracy FERRor SDEVialiori certa ne tee pera tona NEE 362 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFERRor AVEHRage nennen hne nnns 362 READ BURStE gt MACCuracy FERRorCURRGNt cscscs si c2 cceietesesetavescecataccsecccetebecosessvareeads 362 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFERRorMAvimum cece nrerin aiaiai 362 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFERRor GDEViaton cece eaeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 362 FETCH WSPectumMODulation ALU sauren ert exer Ee eee cette 363 READ WSPectrum MODulation PALE 2 2 1 2 2 22 12 22 2 oorr titer Roa ENEE EVEN EEN 363 FETCh WSPectrum MODulation HRtFerence tnter nnns 364 READ W bechrum MODulaton HRtFerencef MMediatel nenen enennenrene 364 READIAUT ORE WWiime EE 364 READ SPECtrun WMO DulationsGA TING KEEN 365 CONFigure BURSt ETIMe IMMediate CONFigure BURSt MACCuracy IMMediate CONFigure BURStMERRor IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PFERror IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PTEM
174. NN Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Usage Query only Manual operation See Inner IM Table on page 38 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts OUTer ALL This command queries the results of the measured intermodulation products up to the order specified using CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder for the frequencies outside of the subblocks but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier allocation For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of intermodulation Default unit Hz lt FreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which intermodu lation power is measured Default unit Hz Retrieving Results lt IMOrder gt 315 35 Order of the intermodulation 3 IM order 3 5 IM order 5 35 IM orders 3 and 5 lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz lt Power gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power measured at IM frequency Default unit dBm dB lt Limit gt numeric value absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Determines whether absolute or relative power values are returned lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED
175. NPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 221 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FSW An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available UO Analyzer and thus in all applications in MSRA operating mode e Multi Carrier Group Delay e GSM e VSA Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 222 Digital UO Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Digi tal Baseband Interface in the applications that support it These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration input Input Source Power Sensor Frequency Digital IQ Input Sample Rate 10 0 MHz Auto Wanual Full Scale Level
176. NT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 249 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 250 Continue Single Sweep While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be
177. O data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyz eal 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 Q Data File Format iq tar Element UserData Description Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the UO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 051
178. Offset see chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 238 Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured Example READ WSP MOD GAT Result 0 00032303078 0 00016890001 Usage Query only Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 11 5 7 3 Trigger to Sync CONFigure TRGS NOFBins Value This command specifies the number of bins for the histogram of the Trigger to Sync measurement Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Number of bins Range 10 to 1000 RST 10 Default unit NONE Manual operation See No of Bins on page 137 CONFigure TRGS ADPSize Value This command specifies the number of measurements after which the x axis is fixed for the histogram calculation of the Trigger to Sync measurement Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Adaptive data size Range 10 to 1000 RST 100 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Adaptive Data Size on page 138 11 5 8 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according
179. PP TS 45 010 Details on Synchronization and Timing 3GPP TS 51 010 Detailed measurement specifications and limit values for mobile stations MS 3GPP TS 51 021 Detailed measurement specifications and limit values for base transceiver stations BTS 5 2 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution The GSM Global System for Mobile Communication standard describes the GSM mobile radio network that is in widespread use today In a first step to enhance this network 8PSK modulation has been defined in addition to the existing GMSK Gaus sian Minimum Shift Keying modulation With 8PSK the mobile or base station oper ates in the EDGE mode While the 8PSK modulation transmits 3 bits within a symbol GMSK can only transmit 1 bit within a symbol In a second step to enhance this network higher symbol rate HSR QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation narrow and wide pulse shapes for the Tx filter have been defined Here EDGE Evolution and EGPRS2 are synonyms for this second enhance ment This means that GSM includes different modes GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution The terms EDGE and EDGE Evolution are used here only when there are significant differences between the modes In all other cases the term GSM is used Time domain vs frequency domain A TDMA Time Division Multiple Access and FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access scheme is used to transfer data in the GSM network This means that the digi tal i
180. Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Amplifier Measurements R amp S FSW K18 AMPLifier Amplifier Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN 802 11ad R amp S FSW K95 WIGIG 802 11ad LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE Real Time Spectrum R amp S FSW B160R RTIM Real Time Spectrum K160RE DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 193 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename User Manual 1173 9263 02
181. PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 TRACe IQ DATA MEMory lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfSamples gt This command queries the UO data currently stored in the memory of the R amp S FSW By default the command returns all UO data in the memory You can however narrow down the amount of data that the command returns using the optional parameters By default the amount of available data depends on TRACe 10 SRATe on page 247 and SENSe SWEep TIME on page 246 Parameters lt OffsetSamples gt Selects an offset at which the output of data should start in rela tion to the first data If omitted all captured samples are output starting with the first sample Range 0 to lt of samples 1 with lt of samples being the maximum number of captured values RST 0 lt NoOfSamples gt Return values lt lQData gt Example Example Usage Retrieving Results Number of samples you want to query beginning at the offset you have defined If omitted all captured samples starting at offset are output Range 1 to lt of samples gt lt offset samples gt with lt of samples gt maximum number of captured values RST lt of samples gt Measured value pair 1 Q for each sample that has been recor ded The data format depends on FORMat DATA Default unit V Preset the instrument RST Enter GSM option INST SEL GSM Set center frequency to 93
182. Q Register This register contains information about the state of the digital UO input and output This register is used by the optional Digital Baseband Interface The status of the STATus QUESTionable DIQ register is indicated in bit 14 of the STATus QUESTionable register You can read out the state of the register with STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition on page 350 and STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt on page 351 Bit No Meaning 0 Digital UO Input Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital Baseband Interface of the analyzer 1 Digital UO Input Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital baseband data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 2 Digital UO Input Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred during establishing of the connect between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 3 Digital UO Input PLL unlocked This bit is set if the PLL of the Digital UO input is out of lock due to missing or unstable clock provided by the connected Digital UO TX device To solve the problem the Digital UO connection has to be newly initialized after the clock has been restored 4 Digital UO Input DATA Error This bit is set if the data from the Digital UO input module is erroneous Possible reasons
183. R amp SSFSW K10 GSM Measuremen User Manual Current 1173 9263 02 12 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 2 30 and higher R amp S9 FSWS 1312 8000K08 R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 R amp S FSW85 1312 8000K85 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FSW K10 1313 1368 02 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 81671 Munchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S9FSW K10 Contents Contents E ooi e 7 Li About this Manual 5 oic iieri innen i innu etus inns aine rra asi SANESA Pann nauis 7 1 2 Documentation Overview eeeeeeeeeeeeee eene eene nnn nnne nennen nan nennen nnn nnns 7 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation eene enn 9 2 Welcome to the GSM Ap
184. RA mode In MSRA mode UO data can only be exported to other applications I Q data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications 8 1 ES e dnpor Export FUNCIONS eiciia eege EE 178 e How to Export and Import VQ Data 179 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar QD These functions are only available if no measurement is running In particular if Continuous Sweep RUN CONT is active the import export functions are not available 0 How to Export and Import UO Data For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual jue EE 179 B3 et 179 dolo 179 Mri s DEOR T ETE 179 Import Provides functions to import data UO Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual UO import is not available in MSRA mode Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 345 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export UO Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to sel
185. REQuency CURRent essere nennen 310 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQue ey MAXIMUM a enne nennen 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation essen 310 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEREOuencv AVERage nennen 310 READ BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent eiiis senate nahe nuda nana a 310 READ BURG MAC CuracvlFREOuencv MA Nimum enne eene 310 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEREOuencv GDEViaton enne 310 FETOCh BURG MAC Curacvl lOlMbalance AVERage nennen 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent sss 311 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy lQIMbalance MAvimum enne 311 FETOCH BURG MAC Curacvl lOlMbalance GDtEViaton eene 311 READ BURG MAC CuracvltlOlMbalance AVERage nnne 311 READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance CLRbent eene 311 READ BURSI MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum eese 311 READ BURG MAC CuracvltlOlMbalance GDEViaton eee eee eeeeeteneneees 311 FETOCHBURGC MAC Curacvl lOOFisetAVERage nnne nene nns 311 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvllOOFisetCLRbent ehh enennnnnn 311 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy IQOFfset MAXimum eeesssssssssseeee eene ene 311 FETCh BURSIEMACGCuUracy IOOFfset SDEVIaltion 2 etur tetto td toad bedeutet 311 READ BURG MAC CuracvlOOFtset AVEhHRage eene 311 READ BURG MAC CuracvllO OFiset CURbent eene nnns 311 READ BURG MAC CuracvllOOFtset MAxlmum nennen 311 READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQOFfset SDEViation esses 311 FETCh BURS
186. RIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 116 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 116 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 UO Power Trigger Source This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface or optional Analog Baseband Interface is used for input It is also not available for analysis band widths 2 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 RF Power Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s dat
187. SM JI Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set external trigger mode TRIGgerl SEQuence SOURce EXTernal Set minimum capture time to speed up measurement SENSe1 SWEep TIME MINimum Auto set trigger offset Note Correct frame slot configuration assumed CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE JI Activate Trigger to Sync measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT TGSG LAY ADD 1 BEL TGST Query standard deviation of trigger to sync time II Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURS PTEM TRGS SDEV Usage Query only Limit Check Results The following commands are required to query the results of a limit check Currently limit check results can only be queried for the following result displays e PvT Full Burst Modulation Spectrum Graph Transient Spectrum Graph Spectrum Graph Useful commands for retrieving limit check results described elsewhere READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt LIMit FAIL on page 325 Retrieving Results FETCh SPECtrum MODulation LIMit FAIL on page 334 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving limit check results CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol DATAQ eeeceeeeeesee raea nnn nh aa 330 CAL Culate nz LlMitks EAIL esie sees esee eene enne nennen nnns nn arenis nnns ns 330 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks LOwWerl DATAI enne nnne n
188. SPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum esiste 289 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel essent rennen DISPlay WiNDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVe OFF Sef isnin naiinis 235 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition esessssseeeeeeeeneee nenne 290 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe RVALue sese nnne nnennnnnnne 291 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum cessent 291 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MINimum BISPlayEWINDows lt n gt TRACES ESTAT eonenna en eme nese Cor cre rte eerie rene ron Eege DISPlayEWINDowsriz ZOOM ARE A tinet t e nre thence en tnr re e cernere epe ete n x n rea DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA essent nennen nennen DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe sessi DISPlay WINDowsri ZOOM S TAT6 itt tr nter ten tp erre de t nnn ee Rea FETCh BURStPTEMplate TRGS AVERage oriri erri e E Fe E ea PE ERR SERERE 328 FETCH BURSUPTEMplat TRGS CURRED gror ia pna ta eb og oci dea vea SK reuse SEP e Ur ERE UE e 328 FETCh BURSEPTEMplate IRGS MAXitmmUtrI ire n terret rtp trente rer ect erp 328
189. STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 244 6 3 5 6 3 5 1 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 244 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 245 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 245 Data Acquisition Access Overview gt Data Acquisition You must define how much and how often data is captured from the input signal e Data UE e EE 122 Data Acquisition
190. See Free Run on page 118 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 118 See UO Power on page 119 See RF Power on page 119 See Power Sensor on page 119 See Time on page 120 See Trigger Source on page 158 See IF Power on page 159 11 5 4 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements OUTPULTRIGGEerspom DI RECOM EE 244 OUTPuE TRIGO pore LEVE etes coire eR REX eege 244 QUTPUt TRIGger port OTYBG6 iicceee racc eL anna ita nnno nn naa aaeei ca ka Re da aa i oi 244 OUTPut TRIGger pornt PULSe1MMediate 4 uc oon ener raa gedd NEE Rene nnn 245 OUTPUETRIGger lt port gt PUL Se ENGth 22 itia cetera teuren AER 245 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Selects the used trigger port 2 trigger port 2 front panel 3 trigger port 3 rear panel Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 116 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with oUT Put
191. Start MHz Stop MHz Offset MHz Freq MHz dB dBm to Limit 2 Inner Wide Band Table Segment Freqs Worst Result RBW 100 kHz Start MHz Stop MHz Offset MHz Freq MHz dB dBm A to Limit 9 o For each of the following regions the parameters described in Wideband noise results are shown e frequencies to the left of the lowermost carrier e frequencies to the right of the uppermost carrier The wideband noise tables divide the total frequency range of the wideband noise measurement defined by the selected span and the GSM band in non overlapping frequency segments For details see chapter 5 15 6 Wideband Noise Measurement on page 80 The following parameters are shown for wideband noise tables for each segment Table 4 14 Wideband noise results Result Description Start MHz Absolute start frequency of segment Stop kHz Absolute stop frequency of segment Offset MHz Frequency of the worst measured wideband noise result in that segment Relative to the nearest active outermost carrier Freq MHz Absolute frequency of the worst measured wideband noise result in that segment dB Relative power level to reference power of the worst measured wideband noise result in that segment dBm Absolute power level of the worst measured wideband noise result in that segment A to Limit Worst power difference to limit defined in standard in that segment Defined exceptions are considered Negative values i
192. Sure Result for 3 slot scopes e g after a single sweep mode with sta tistic count 3 0 002261 0 000577 0 006876 0 000577 0 011492 0 000577 Usage Query only Manual operation See Magnitude Capture on page 19 FETCh MCAPture SLOTs SCOPe This command queries the positions of the slot scopes in the current capture buffer indicated by green bars in the result display Return values Result The result is a comma separated list of positions for each scope with the following syntax xPos 0 xLen 0 xPos 1 xLen 1 where xPos i is the x value in seconds of the i th scope xLen i is the length of the i th scope in seconds The number of values is 2 the number of GSM frames in the current capture buffer If the number of frames defined by the statistic count all fit into the capture buffer at once the number of values is 2 statistic count If not the number of values is 2 the number of frames in the last capture Example FETCh MCAPture SLOTs SCOPe Result for 3 slots to measure e g after a single sweep mode with statistic count 3 0 002261 0 001154 0 006876 0 001154 0 011492 0 001154 Usage Query only Manual operation See Magnitude Capture on page 19 11 8 4 QD Retrieving Results Modulation Accuracy Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Modulation Accu racy evaluation For details on the individual results see table 4 1 READ vs FETCh comm
193. TCh SbtECHrumcMODulaton HRtFterence nettement enne nns 317 READ SbtCirum MODulaton HE Ferencel MMediatel reren ertrnrerererene 317 READ SPEGCtruni MODulationsGAT e KEE 317 READ W bechrum MODulation GATing nnne nennen nnns 317 FETCh SPECtrum MODulation ALL READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL This command starts the measurement and returns the modulation spectrum of the mobile or base station This command is only available for Modulation Spectrum Table evaluations see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas with one list for each measured frequency in the frequency list Return values Placeholder curently irrelevant lt Freq1 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Freq2 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Level gt Measured level at the offset frequency in dB or dBm depending on CONF SPEC MOD LIM lt Limit gt Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm depending on CONF SPEC MOD LIM lt Abs Rel gt Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are returned depending on CONF SPEC MOD LIM lt Status gt Result of the limit check in character data form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded Retrieving Results Example READ SPEC MOD 0 9982
194. TChBURGOC MAC Curacvl BbOWer GDEViaton eene 309 READ BURG MAC CuracvlBbOVWer AVERage cee aeaeeee nennen eene 309 READ BURG MAC CuracvlBbOVWer CUpRhent eene enne ener enne 309 READ BURG MAC Curacvl BbOVWer MAxlmum ener 309 READ BURSI MACCuracy BPOWer SDEViation e ecececeeeeeeses esee enne 309 FETCHBURGOCMACCuracevlEVMIDEAK AVEHRage rennen 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURRent essen 309 FETCH BURG MAC CuracvltEVMIPDEAK MANImum nennen nnn 309 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracevlEVMIDEAkK GDtEViaton cece eeeeeeeeaeaeeeneneteteneees 309 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIPDEAK AVERage nnne 309 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIPDEAkK CURbent ener 309 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum eeesessseeee eene 309 READ BURG MAC CuracvlEVMIDEAkK GDEViaton eene 309 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage esses 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent essen 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum eese nnne 310 Retrieving Results FETCh BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation sese 310 READ BURG MAC CuracvlfEVMIRMS AVERage eren 310 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS CURRent essere 310 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXimum sess 310 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation essere 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage sss 310 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy F
195. TEM FILT gt G1000 Align the limit line to mid of TSC TS for each slot CONF BURS PTEM TAL PSL Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INITiate IMMediate WAI In PvT limits are checked against the max in min traces Query the max power vs time trace TRAC2 DATA TRACe2 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for max trace CALCulate2 LIMitl FAIL 11 13 4 Programming Examples gt 0 Query the min power vs time trace TRAC2 DATA TRACe3 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for min trace CALCulate2 LIMit2 FAIL gt 0 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for slot 0 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOTO LIM FAIL gt 0 Query the result of the power vs time limit check for slot 1 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 LIM FAIL gt 0 Query the maximum phase error value for slot 1 slot to measure in current GSM frame FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURR gt 0 21559642255306244 Query the maximum phase error value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAX gt 0 35961171984672546 Query the averaged phase error RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage 0 082186274230480194 Programming Example Measuring Statistics This example demonstrates how to det
196. TS 51 021 and 3GPP TS 45 0103GPP TS 45 010 chapter 6 7 Timeslot length for further details This parameter is used to adjust the time for the Power vs Time masks of all slots The Slot to measure is used as the time reference for the entire frame Parameters for setting and query lt State gt 110 ON OFF RST ON Example CONF CHAN FRAM EQU OFF Manual operation See Equal Timeslot Length on page 94 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 Slot The R amp S FSW GSM application is slot based Thus information on the expected slots of the input signal are required The following commands are required to provide this information CONFioureM lcCH AkNnel SL OTcNumberz El Ter 210 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number STATe eese 211 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt MTYP6 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececaeaeaeaeaaaeenenenenes 211 CONFigure MS CHANNeESLOT lt S gt SOP sirinin eneidiaa aarar iiini arcs 212 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SUBChannel ch TSC USER eene 213 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SUBChannel ch TSC eese 213 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number TADVance sss 214 GONFigurep MS CHANnelSEOT amp S TS toas ata eto Pet teta t anon ioter exeat xe ng Rua RS 214 CONFigu re MS CHAN el SLOT lt s gt TSC USER renes nn 215 CONFioureM lcCH AkNnel SL OTcNumbe
197. This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Use CONFigure MS SYNC MODE BURSt OrCONFigure MS SYNC MODE ALL instead see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 255 Parameters for setting and query State 1 O0 ON OFF ON Burst search on OFF Burst search off RST 1 CONFigure MS BSTHreshold Value This command changes the burst find threshold Note This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Due to the improved measurement capabilities of this GSM analysis software this remote control command and the function behind is not required any more Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Threshold for burst detection Default unit dB Example CONF BSTH 10 DB Mode GSM Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility CONFigure MS MCARrier ACTCarriers lt NofActCarriers gt This parameter specifies the total number of active carriers of the multicarrier BTS to be measured Its value affects the calculation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum measurement see 3GPP2 TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 Spectrum due to modulation and wide band noise The limit is changed by 10 log N Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For new remote control programs the number of active carriers is determined by the CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt STATe commands The multicarrier de
198. Thus the R amp S FSW GSM application recalculates the internal delta to limit trace solid orange line The new worst result is determined at position Worst3 This position is then used to determine the noise power and limit line values for the wideband noise table 5 16 Automatic Carrier Detection An automatic carrier detection function is now available Adjusting the Center Fre quency Automatically Auto Freq For multi carrier measurements this function detects the available carriers in the input signal within a frequency range of approxi mately 25 MHz to 2 GHz The Auto Frequency function is sensitive to overload conditions Thus before using this function make sure the reference level is not lower than the input signal s peak power On the other hand avoid reference level settings that are much too high as they make very low carriers approx 50 dB under the reference level disappear in the noise floor and they will not be detected Optionally use the Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level function to finetune the attenuators and the pre amplifier AFTER the correct carrier frequencies have been determined For MCWN measurements make sure all detected carriers are in the measurement span for example using the Carriers 1 8 MHZ or Carriers 6 MHz settings see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 150 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode The GSM application can also be used
199. URSt MACCuracy FERRor MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Frequency Error Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility This command is retained for compatibility with R amp S FS K5 only Use the grams Return values lt Result gt Example Usage READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency or FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency commands in newer remote control pro numeric value Frequency error Default unit Hz READ BURS FERR SDEV Query only FETCh WSPectrum MODulation ALL READ WSPectrum MODulation ALL This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the measurement of the Modulation Spectrum of the mobile or base station These commands are retained for compatibility with previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers only For newer remote control programs use the READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL or FETCh SPECtrum MODulation ALL commands instead The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Placeholder gt lt Freq1 gt lt Freq2 gt lt Level gt lt Limit gt lt Abs Rel gt lt Status gt Example Usage curently irrelevant Absolute offset frequency in Hz Absolute offset frequency in Hz Measured level at the offset frequency in dB or dBm Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm
200. Usage Query only Manual operation See EVM on page 18 See Magnitude Capture on page 19 See Magnitude Error on page 20 See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 See Phase Error on page 26 See PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 See Spectrum Graph on page 36 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 Retrieving Results TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command reads the x values time in seconds of the Power vs Time measure ment if active out of the window specified by the suffix lt n gt If a trace number is defined as a parameter for this command the x values time in seconds of the Trigger to Sync measurement if active out of the window specified by the suffix lt n gt are returned For details see chapter 11 8 2 5 Trigger to Sync Results on page 303 Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 Trace number TRACe1 Average trace Transient Spectrum Maximum trace Trigger to Sync histogram values TRACe2 Maximum trace Trigger to Sync PDF of average trace TRACe3 Minimum trace TRACe4 Current trace Example TRACe2 DATA X Returns the Power vs Time values for the active trace in window 2 TRACe3 DATA X TRACel Returns the Trigger to Sync values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only Manual operation See
201. W except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 202 Select Measurement Selects a measurement to be performed See chapter 4 Measurements and Result Displays on page 17 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window 6 3 2 Signal Description Access Overview gt Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes frame detection and measurement e Device Under Test Settings escenes oA e ES 90 LEpICcu NC 92 LEE o dup E 95 Camer uio RP 99 6 3 2 1 Device Under Test Settings Access Overview Signal Description Device The type of device to be tested provides additional information on the signal to be expected Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Device Carriers Device Under Test Device Type Multicarrier BTS Wide Area Frequency Ban
202. WIT erin LALL ca eiecit bec a a extet Ea ae sea ao ins 326 REAB SPECtrum SWITching ALL iere inpia naim etn Ron n NENNEN 326 FEPICh SPECUUm SWITehihg REESFetQe a oai re retenta tr erede tette ee teh 327 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate sese 327 READ SPECtrum SWITching RFerence GATimng 327 FETCh SPECtrum SWITching ALL READ SPECtrum SWITching ALL This command starts the measurement and reads out the transient spectrum This command is only available for Transient Spectrum Table evaluations see Tran sient Spectrum Table on page 31 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values Placeholder curently irrelevant lt Freq1 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Freq2 gt Absolute offset frequency in Hz lt Level gt Measured level at the offset frequency in dB or dBm For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT lt Limit gt Limit at the offset frequency in dB or dBm For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT Retrieving Results lt Abs Rel gt Indicates whether relative dB or absolute dBm limit and level values are returned For more information see CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching LIMIT lt Status gt Result of the limit check in character data
203. XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 0rg 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt lt DataFilename gt xyz complex float32 lt DataFilename gt lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat Element Description RS IQ TAR File The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion Format that contains the number of the file format defi
204. YPE lt BurstT ype gt Specifies the type of the burst Suffix Number lt 0 7 gt Parameters for setting and query lt BurstType gt NB HB AB NB Normal Burst HB Higher Symbol Rate Burst AB Access Burst RST NB Example CONF CHAN SLOT TYPE NB Manual operation See Burst Type on page 97 11 5 1 4 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 Carrier The following commands are required to provide information on the carriers in the input signal CONFigure MS MCARrier CAbRb ier zcEGTATel nennen 217 CONFioureM lMC Arer CAbRbler zc FREOuencn rennen 217 CONFioureM lMC Arer CAbRbler zc Mie 218 CONFloureM SlMC Arer EA Location 219 CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACArriel c csssssseececsseseeseeeeees 219 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt STATe This command queries the activity of the selected carrier Note to activate a carrier define its absolute frequency using CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt FREQuency on page 217 Suffix lt c gt 1 16 Active carrier Return values lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF MCAR CARR3 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Usag
205. YPE EE 231 SENSE SWAP EE 246 SENSE SWEep GOUN LEE 252 SENSE SWEep e eil ee ue 253 SENSe SWEep COUNETRGS CURRGIL eege rre n rc toa nue eR RE SR reap an 253 SENSE SWEep TIME e a SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO E GER ere El EE Te CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker mz MANimum Abt ak eene nennen nennen e nennen nete inne 288 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumf PEAK essent enne enne 288 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese 288 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe CALCulat lt n gt DEL Tamarkersim gt Xsens ni e AE aa AE aa NE aa EEP 343 CAL Culatesn DEETamarkersme XRELEGaliVO ce iore carece auton needa Gera ETENA ANTT 343 CALGu latesn gt DELTamarkers Ee WE 344 CALCulat sn gt DEL Tamarkersm gt S TATe aoat t Eoi eene eine itk eue e be coe cese orbc hee exco 286 GALCulate n LIMit k CONTETOL DATA rrt ret n ttr nie neenon three ie uina n 330 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt CUBE 333 CALCulatesn LIMitsk EXCeption COUNEMAX iea ith rna tkt rhe kno re yen eaae Exe na n oe bii be eek aao 334 CAL Culatesm gt Ulud e FA EE 330 CALCulatesn LIMitsk s bOWer DATAJ rrr ecce eerta cta erre chet c Do rte 332 CALCulatesn LIMitek UPPer DATA inap iia re ener ero cer tenere cent Rx Son chen 332 GALGulatesn MARKersmc
206. a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 294 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted UO modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Tip Try this function if the TSC can not be found 6 3 5 2 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 246 Sweep Access SWEEP The Sweep settings define how often data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application Data Acquisition Sweep Statistic Count Statistic Count SamI leegen eege 125 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT ccccccceeeneeeceeeeeeeeceeceaeeeecaaeeseaeeeeeaaeesseneeseaeeesenes 126 single sweep RUN SINGLE essar iaei ntn e cete e ore a e cde eR 126 Continue Single SWegp
207. a sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the measurement may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 Power Sensor Trigger Source Uses an external power sensor as a trigger source This option is only available if a power sensor is connected and configured Note For R amp S power sensors the Gate Mode Lvl is not supported The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the measurement cannot be completed Remote command TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Time Trigger Source Triggers in a specified repetition interval Remote command TRIG SOUR TIME see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVe
208. a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 11 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e EE e UE 196 Cet 019 21 gt DEE 197 LUE LI 0438 RR 197 e Character EEN 198 e Block EE 198 11 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction e UP DOWN Increases or decrea
209. acy EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Modulation Spectrum Constellation Furthermore the Slot to Measure is used to measure the reference power for the fol lowing measurements E User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 128 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Power vs Time Modulation Spectrum Transient Spectrum Finally the Slot to Measure is used to measure the position of its TSC which repre sents the timing reference for the Power vs Time mask limit lines of all slots See also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 For details on the measurement types see chapter 4 1 GSM UO Measurement Results on page 17 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure on page 254 Number of Slots to measure This parameter specifies the Number of Slots to measure for the measurement inter val of multi slot measurements i e the Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum mea surements Between 1 and 8 consecutive slots can be measured See also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots on page 254 First Slot to measure This parameter specifies the start of the measurement interval for mulit slot measure ments i e Power vs Time and Transient Spectrum measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary The following conditions apply e First Slot to measure s Slot to Measure e Slot to Measure s First Slo
210. age 56 e Define how the limit line defined by the standard is to be aligned to the mea sured slots and whether the relative positioning of the TSCs is measured or derived from the position of the specified Slot to Measure only For measurements strictly according to standard use the default Limit Line Time Alignment Slot to Measure For non standard signals or signals with conspicuous slot timing use the Per Slot setting Tip use the Delta to Sync result of the Power vs Slot measurement to verify the slot timing User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 185 10 11 12 13 14 15 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals Select the Display Config button and select one or more of the following displays for power results up to a total of 16 windows e PvT Full Burst power graph of all slots bursts in the selected slot scope over time e Power vs Slot table of power per slot in the current frame and over all frames Tip Also display the Magnitude Capture for a general overview of the measured data Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key Check the PvT Full Burst results to determine if the signal remains within the limits specified by the standard in all slots to measure If the Limit
211. aining bits The currently selected bit number is indicated in the center of the scrollbar Table 6 1 Number of TSC bits depending on burst type and modulation Burst Type Modulation Number of Bits Normal GMSK 26 Normal 8PSK 78 Normal 16QAM 104 Normal 32QAM 130 Higher Symbol Rate QPSK 62 Higher Symbol Rate 16QAM 124 Higher Symbol Rate 32QAM 155 Access GMSK 41 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC USER on page 215 AQPSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC USER on page 213 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings Access Overview gt Signal Description gt Carriers Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration The Carrier settings define whether the expected signal contains a single or multiple carriers Multiple carriers can only be defined if a mulltcarrier Device Type is selected see chapter 6 3 2 1 Device Under Test Settings on page 90 Up to 16 carriers can be configured for a single MCWN measurement Signal Description l J Device Carriers Carrier Allocation Non Contiguous ed stort attericamier s Carrier Active Frequency Modulation 1 935 0 MHz NB GMSK 2 935 6 MHz NB GMSK 4 936 8 MHz NB GMSK The carriers can also be configured automatically see Adjusting the Center Fre quency Automatically Auto Freq on page 138 Canter EE 100 Gap start after carrier Non contig
212. ally set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt commands FETOChBURGC GbOMer GL OT ALL AVERage nennen 319 READ BURG GbOwWer GL OT Glotz ALL AVERage rernm 319 FETCh BURSESPOWerSLOT lt s ALISCRESU iiit eege REENEN ees 319 SEI e EE e 319 FETChBURGC GbOMer GL OT ez ALL M ANimum eene 320 READ BURG GbOMWer GL OT Glotz ALL M Avimum eene emen 320 FETOChBURGC GbOMer GL OT CURbRent AVEhRage 321 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT sSlIot CURRent AVERage seen 321 FETChB RSCSPOWer SEOTsss CURRGnEORESLUS dd 322 READ BURG ZSbOMWer GL OT Glotz CURbent CHE an 322 FETCh BURStSPOWer SLOT s CURRent MAXimum esses eene 323 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT sSlIot CURRent MAXimum eese 323 FETCh B RSESPOWerSLOT s DELTatosynec iiiii cro toe seta ASSEN 324 READ BURSESPOWer SLOT SIot DELTatosync arreter enint nnno neben NEEN 324 FETCII BURSESPOWSESEOT s e aniidae dei aipania inii 325 READ BURStESPOWerSLOT lt Slot gt LIMFAIL ooie aiandi andia o nean iii E 325 Retrieving Results FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL AVERage READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL AVERage This command starts the measurement and reads out the average power for the selected slot for all measured frames This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst o
213. alue 50 0 dBm DGVICS TT 143 Reuler TE 143 Eeer 144 Maximum Output Power per Carrier multicarrier measurements only 144 Device Type Defines the type of device under test DUT The following types are available e BTS Normal e BTS Micro e BTS Pico e MS Normal e MS Small e Multicarrier BTS Wide Area e Multicarrier BTS Medium Range e Multicarrier BTS Local Area The default device type is BTS Normal Remote command CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 204 Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 47 The following frequency bands are supported DCS 1800 E GSM 900 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 GSM 850 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements PCS 1900 P GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 380 T GSM 410 T GSM 810 T GSM 900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 205 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 206 Power Class The following power classes are supported For MCWN measurements no power class is used NONE 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 207 Maximum Output Power per Carrier multicarrier measurements only Defines
214. am will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single measurement mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 126 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command controls the
215. ameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH MACC Adds a Modulation Accuracy display to the right of window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation Analyzing GSM Measurements See Constellation on page 18 See EVM on page 18 See Magnitude Capture on page 19 See Magnitude Error on page 20 See Marker Table on page 21 See Modulation Accuracy on page 21 See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 See Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 See Phase Error on page 26 See Power vs Slot on page 27 See PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 See Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 See Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 See Trigger to Sync Table on page 34 See Spectrum Graph on page 36 See Carrier Power Table on page 37 See
216. and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Modulation gt GMSK GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying 1 bit symbol QPSK QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift keying 2 bits symbol PSK8 8PSK EDGE Phase Shift Keying 3 bits symbol QAM16 16QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 4 bits symbol QAM32 32QAM 16 ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation 5 bits symbol RST GMSK Example CONF CHAN SLOTO MTYP GMSK Manual operation See Modulation on page 98 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SCPir Value This command specifies the Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR of the speci fied slot Notes This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt numeric value Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR in dB Range 15 to 15 RST 0 Default unit NONE Example Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR 4 dB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO SCPir 4 Manual operation See SCPIR on page 98 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 Configuring and Performi
217. ands Note that for each result type two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt commands a Statistical results For most results both the current result and the statistical evaluation of all results over a number of frames specified by Statistic Count are provided For details on how the statistical evaluation is performed see table 4 2 EIERE HEEM edel 307 READ IBURSIEMAGCOuracy FAUL EE 307 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlADbRoop AVEHRage nennen nnne 308 FETCh BURSIEMAGOuracy ADROOp CURREN aca cocoa one ei entere utere tne 308 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop MAXimum esses eene nnne 308 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation cesses 308 READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop AVERage cessisse eene nnne nene 308 READ BURG MAC CuracvlAfDRoop CURbRent A 308 READ BURG MAC CuracvlADRoop MANimum nennen etenns 308 READ BURSIt MACCuracy ADRoop SDEViation sse nnn 308 FETChBURGOC MAC CuracvlBbOWer AVERage ehem enne 309 FETCh BURSI MAGCCuracy BPOWeECURRent svesesecseevevaecvtevsaneoeteateiaccrevescnees 309 FETCH BURG MAC Curacvl BbOWer MA vimum aaia a 309 FE
218. annel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 200 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 200 Example INST CRE IQ IQAnalyzer2 Adds an additional UO Analyzer channel named IQAnalyzer2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace Activating GSM Measurements lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 200 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 200 Example INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named IQAnalyzer2 by a new measure
219. apture e PvT Full Burst Modulation Accuracy Power vs Slot R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays The following evaluation methods are available for GSM UO measurements Perle C MTS 18 EVN m EE 18 eidele TU v n 19 DVLA VIS OTe EM 20 Marker EE 21 Modulation ACCAC rea a a OAOA 21 Modulation Spectrum Graphie ER Mod lanom Spebtum RE e 24 Phase E 26 POWER VS SION eege E EE SE 27 a dl TR 28 Transient Spectrum Gra EE 30 TRANSIENT Spectrum Table site ccenachsnascavssncestacescetavaxesnaes EERSTEN 31 Trigger to Syne Gore mmm 32 Re erer 34 Constellation The complex source signal is displayed as an X Y diagram The application analyzes the specified slot over the specified number of bursts 2 Constellation ei cirw Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CONS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 EVM Displays the error vector magnitude over time for the Slot to Measure User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 18 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Avg e2 Max 3 Min ed Clr 3 5 sym 145 5 sym Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH ETIMe see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 298 Magnitude Capture Displays the power vs time trace of the captured UO data Pre trigger samples are not displayed The analyzed slot scopes 1 to 8 slots of a single GSM frame are indicated by a green bar the Slot to Measure in each frame by a blue bar at th
220. asured data Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key Check the Magnitude Capture for irregular behavior e g an unexpected rise or fall in power If such an effect occurs determine whether it occured in the current slot Scope and current slot to measure compare the green and blue bars beneath the trace If necessary zoom into the display to view it in greater detail If necessary change the slot scope or slot to measure to display the slot of inter est e g using the softkeys in the GSM menu Now you can analyze the Magnitude Error Phase Error or EVM for that slot Compare the current results of the EVM with those of previous measurements to find out if the error occurs only sporadically or repeatedly R amp S9FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 9 3 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Signals 1 Press the MODE key and select the GSM application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or
221. at define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 177 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 294 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Rr ees DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 177 See Restore Original Display on page 177 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 177 11 7 4 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA eese 295 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple zoomzGTATe nnn nn ne 296 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm e 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lowe
222. at must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 240 Slope For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 242 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 244 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 244 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the
223. at of the input signal Parameters lt DataType gt IQ I Q IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature compo nent l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ Example INP IQ TYPE Q Manual operation See I Q Mode on page 107 CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe State Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual 11 5 2 4 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 The high accuracy timing function is switched on The cable for high accuracy timing must be connected to trigger ports 1 and 2 OFF 0 The high accuracy timing function is switched off RST OFF Example CAL AIQ HAT STAT ON Manual operation See High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF on page
224. at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement channel can be active at any time However in order to per form the configured measurements consecutively a Sequencer function is provided When the Sequencer is activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 8 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as the measurements are performed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab See also the note on using the Sequencer function in MSRA operating mode in chap ter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All dif ferent information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections R amp S FSW K10 Welcome to the GSM Application MultiView 22 GSM Ref Level 50 0 Offset 0 00 dB Device Band BTS Normal 35M 900 SGL Att Freq ARFCN 935 0 Mriz 0 Slot Scope Count 200 200 1 Magnitude Capture 1 Crew ALES 20 0 ms 2 PvT Full Burst 2 Wi 12 5 ps 3 Modulation Accuracy 4 Power vs Slot Current Average Std Dev z Slot EVM t Current Frame Mag Erro
225. ate TALign on page 260 6 3 7 2 Spectrum Access Overview Measurement Spectrum The modulation and transient spectrum measurements allow for further configuration Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Power vs Time Spectrum Common Settings Modulation amp Transient Spectrum Enable Left Limit on Enable Right Limit On Filter Type Normal 3dB l 5 Pole Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List 1 8 MHz sparse Transient Spectrum Reference Power Enable eft Limit Enable Right EIE aaa iiit ettet ce tenet teet 135 Fiter TY PG e E 135 Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency Uert 136 Transient Spectrum Reference Power 136 Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit Controls whether the results for the frequencies to the left or to the right of the center frequency or both are considered in the limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph measurement This parameter effects the Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 and Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 measurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals using either the check on the left or right side only allows you to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel while ignoring the side where adjacent channels are located Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit LEFT on page 261 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit RIGHt on page 261 Filter Type Defines the filter type for the
226. ation Default unit NONE Example READ BURS IQOF SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the peak value of the Magnitude Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Magnitude Error see table 4 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Magnitude error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS MERR PEAK SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor RMS SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the RMS value of the Magnitude Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW
227. ation in the capture buffer Note For Burst no demodulation measurements e g Modula tion Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modula tion Spectrum Transient Spectrum measurements are sup ported NONE Do not synchronize at all If an external or power trigger is chosen the trigger instant corresponds to the frame start Tip Manually adjust the trigger offset to move the burst to be analyzed under the mask in the Power vs Time measurement Note For None no demodulation measurements e g Modu lation Accuracy are supported Only Power vs Time Modu lation Spectrum Transient Spectrum measurements are sup ported RST ALL Example CONF SYNC MODE TSC Manual operation See Synchronization on page 130 CONFigure MS SYNC ONLY lt State gt If activated only results from frames slots where the Slot to measure was found are displayed and taken into account in the averaging of the results The behavior of this function depends on the value of the Synchronization parameter see CONFigure MS SYNC MODE on page 255 Parameters for setting and query State ON OFF RST ON Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example CONF SYNC MODE TSC Search the capture buffer for the TSC of the Slot to measure as given in the frame configuration CONF SYNC ONLY ON Only if the TSC is found the results are displayed Manual operation See Measure only on Sync on page
228. ay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel RF 10 DBM 95959295 2 2 22 Slot 0 configuration Activate slot 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO STATe ON Normal Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TYPE NB GMSK modulation CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO MTYPe GMSK TSC 0 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC 0 1 eege Slot 1 configuration Activate slot 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON Access Burst CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TYPE AB Set TSO Programming Examples CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC TSO Query TS CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC TSO Access burst has a timing advance offset from slot start of 1 symbol CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TADV 1 essecesese Slot 2 7 configuration CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT4 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT5 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT6 STATe OFF CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT7 STATe OFF tt Demodulation and Slot Scope Configure slot 1 slot to measure for single slot measurements e g phase error modulation spectrum CONF CHAN MSL MEAS Configure slot 0 1 for multi slot measurements e g PvT transient spectrum Set First slot to measure 0 Set No of slots to measure 2 CONF CHAN MSL NOFS 2 CONF CHAN MSL OFFS 0 aa a PvT Measurement settings Check PvT filter CONF BURG P
229. band Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Usage Query only Manual operation See Spectrum Graph on page 36 FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts INNer ALL This command queries the results of the measured intermodulation products up to the order specified using CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder for the frequencies in the gap between the GSM carrier subblocks for non contiguous carrier allocation For each measured offset frequency the following values are returned Return values lt FreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of intermodulation Default unit Hz lt FreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which intermodu lation power is measured Default unit Hz lt IMOrder gt 315 35 Order of the intermodulation 3 IM order 3 5 IM order 5 35 IM orders 3 and 5 lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement Default unit Hz Retrieving Results lt Power gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power measured at IM frequency Default unit dBm dB lt Limit gt numeric value absolute or relative power level limit to reference power Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Determines whether absolute or relative power values are returned lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP IMPR I
230. bed 190 Options Electronic attenuation sssesusssss 114 153 High pass filter 103 148 221 Preamiplifler an ttp Stage ee 114 154 Outer IM Table Res ltdis play 35i e terstne Mies Ee 38 Outer Spectrum Table IResulbdisplay sx 9 m Died oed tendras 40 43 Output Configuration sissies 101 115 146 154 Configuration remote sssssssss 219 232 Noise source astien a 116 155 Settings 22 115 154 Tiger rre tns 116 121 155 161 Overload RF inp t remote inccr eg ate dents 220 Overview Belt le ie ul WEE 88 Configuration MGW E 141 P Parameters Intermodulatior soisissa outta all t ere 39 Modulation Accuracy 22 25 28 Narrowband noise enr rre 42 Transient spectrum 2592 Wideband nolse i ret rodis ariza 44 PCL itunes at SLO POF renra earet e EE 379 Peak search ROY 174 Peaks Absolute Marker positioning su Ec RM Performance IMPrOVINO MEET 190 Performing GSM measurement MCWN measurement Phase Error Evaluation method encre tens 26 Results remole eii epe s 301 Power Class eere 92 94 113 144 152 207 Class TT EE 140 Reference PVT cs ies reete Deere nts 54 Reference Transient Spectrum 136 vs slot evaluation Method eee eects 27 vs slot results remote w 918
231. bled the reference powers must be defined manually see Defining Reference Powers Manually on page 165 For details see Reference measurement on page 72 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 271 Reference Average Count Defines the number of reference measurements to be performed in order to determine the average reference values Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNt on page 270 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Carrier Selection Carrier Specifies the carrier at which the reference powers for the MCWN measurement are measured if reference power measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 164 In Auto mode the carrier with the maximum power level is selected as a reference In Manual mode you must specify the carrier to be used as a reference in the Car rier field All active carriers can be selected see Active carriers on page 101 Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier AUTO on page 270 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBer on page 270 Defining Reference Powers Manually Alternatively to performing a measurement to determine the reference powers for MCWN measurements you can define them manually Note that reference power levels depend on the modulation characteristics For details see chapter 5 15 3 Manual Reference Power
232. box see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt TYPE on page 216 Modulation Defines the modulation used in the slot The possible modulations depend on the set burst type see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 The graphical slot structure is adapted according to the selected modulation Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt MTYPe on page 211 SCPIR This parameter is only available for AQPSK modulation It specifies the Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR The value of SCPIR affects the shape of the AQPSK constellation see chapter 5 4 AQPSK Modulation on page 51 For an SCPIR of 0 dB the constellation is square as in normal QPSK while for other values of SCPIR the constellation becomes rectangular Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SCPir on page 212 Filter Specifies the pulse shape of the modulator on the DUT and thus the measurement fil ter in the R amp S FSW GSM application For details see chapter 5 7 3 Measurement Filter on page 58 The following filter types are supported for normal and higher symbol rate bursts e GMSK Pulse e Linearised GMSK Pulse Narrow Pulse e Wide Pulse For access bursts only a GMSK Pulse filter is supported Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number FILTer on page 210 Timing Advance Access Burst only Spe
233. burst tail data TSC data tail to provide an ideal version of the measured signal The data bits can be random and are typically not known inside the demodulator of the R amp S FSW GSM application tail and TSC bits are specified in the Slot dialog box see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 98 Detected The detected Tail and TSC bits are used to construct the ideal signal Standard The standard tail and TSC bits as set in the Slot dialog box are used to construct the ideal signal Using the standard bits can be advantageous to verify whether the device under test sends the correct tail and TSC bits Incorrect bits would lead to peaks in the EVM vs Time trace see EVM on page 18 at the positions of the incorrect bits Remote command CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits on page 258 Measurement Settings Access Overview gt Measurement Measurement settings define how power or spectrum measurements are performed Power vs Time Access Overview gt Measurement gt Power vs Time Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time measurement see chapter 5 7 1 Power vs Time Filter on page 56 A limit line is available to determine if the power exceeds the limits defined by the standard in each slot Power vs Time Spectrum Trigger to Sync Power vs Time Filter Power vs Time Limit Line Time Alignment Sl
234. by each sweep Result Configuration Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Statistic Count determines the number of averaging procedures PDFAvg Displays the probability density function PDF of the average value Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 283 Preset All Traces Restores the active traces and trace modes defined by the default settings for the active result displays Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 283 7 1 2 Markers Access Overview gt Result Config gt Marker or MKR Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Up to 4 markers can be configured e Individual Marker Settings iiir ndr eco tI ce reae ria 171 EEN E E 173 e Marke
235. c count the closer the graph gets to a gaussian shape and the higher the resolution of the averaged Trigger to Sync value becomes e Trace2 the second trace is superimposed on the histogram and visualizes the probability density function PDF of the average Trigger to Sync value and the standard deviation as provided in the Trigger to Sync table This trace helps you judge the reliability of the averaged values in the table The narrower this trace the less the individual values deviate from the averaged result if this trace is too wide increase the Statistic Count Note The x axis of the histogram indicates the individual Trigger to Sync values Thus the scaling must be very small in the range of ns However since the value range in particular the start value of the possible results is not known the x axis must be adap ted to the actual values after a number of measurements have taken place This is done using the adaptive data size setting see Adaptive Data Size on page 138 This setting defines how many measurements are performed before the x axis is adap ted to the measured values and then fixed to that range Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH TGSG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 DISPlay WINDow TRACel MODE WRITe for Histogram see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 283 DISPlay WINDow TRACe2 MODE PDFavg for PDF of average see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 283
236. ce ae 107 VQ ols M H ROES 107 JN gie UE MSN 108 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF c cccseeessececeeeessecceeeesseceteeesaneee 108 ul Ee 108 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is instal led Remote command INPut SELect on page 222 UO Mode Defines the format of the input signal jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband l If a center frequency greater than O Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF 1 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted
237. ch slot the center of the TSC is derived from the measured center of the TSC of the Slot to Measure and the timeslot lengths speci fied in the standard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 and Equal Timeslot Length on page 94 e Per Slot For each slot the center of the TSC is measured This provides reasona ble time alignment if the slot lengths are not according to standard Note that in this case the Power vs Time limit check may show pass even if the timeslot lengths are not correct according to the standard Note The Limit Time Alignment also decides whether the Delta to sync values of the Power vs Time list result are measured for Limit Time Alignment Per Slot or if they are constant as defined by the 3PP standard for Limit Time Alignment Slot to measure The R amp S FSW GSM application offers a strictly standard conformant multiple slot PvT limit line check This is based on time alignment to a single specified slot the Slot to Measure and allows the user to check for correct BTS timeslot alignment in the DUT according to the GSM standard In addition a less stringent test which performs PvT limit line alignment on a per slot basis Per Slot is also available Note When measuring access bursts the parameter Limit Time Alignment should be set to Per Slot since the position of an access burst within a slot depends on the set timing advance of the DUT Remote command CONFigure BURSt PTEMpl
238. chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 238 Retrieving Results Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that the useful part of the Slot to measure is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that the useful part of the Slot to measure is measured Example READ SPEC SWIT REF GAT Result 0 00000185076 0 00054277002 Usage Query only 11 8 8 Trigger to Sync Results The following commands are required to query the numeric results of a Trigger to Sync measurement For details on the individual results see Trigger to Sync Table on page 34 READ vs FETCh commands Note that two commands are provided for each result type which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command FETCH BURSEPTEMBplate TRGS AVERSBge 2 e eels et a te cae cu ces e a rueda 328 FETCh BURStUPTEMplate TRUE sie attic tet Eege e ocius eege 328 FETCH BURSEPTEMplate TRES MAXMIMUIN 1 22 ocean SEENEN EENS See 328 FETCh BURSt PTEMplate TRGS MlINimum
239. cifies the position of an access burst within a single slot as an offset in symbols from the slot start Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT Number TADVance on page 214 Training Sequence TSC Sync Note for Access bursts this setting is labelled Sync but the functionality is the same Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration The Training Sequence TSC or Sync values are known symbol sequences used to synchronize the measured signal with the expected input signal in a single slot The available values depend on the modulation as indicated in the table below For user defined TSCs select User and define the training sequence in the User TSC User Sync table For more information on TSCs see Training sequences TSCs on page 50 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC on page 214 AQPSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SUBChannel ch TSC on page 213 User TSC User Sync Note for Access bursts this setting is labelled User Sync but the functionality is the same Defines the bits of the user defined TSC or Sync The number of bits depend on the burst type and the modulation and is indicated in table 6 1 For AQPSK modulation the training sequence is defined for each subchannel see chapter 5 4 AQPSK Modulation on page 51 Note As the User TSC table in the dialog box only displays 25 bits at a time a scrollbar beneath the table allows you to display the rem
240. ck the register of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a register always returns the result for the currently selected channel However you can specify any other chan nel name as a query parameter R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Table 11 7 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Bit No Meaning 0 BURSt not found This bit is set if no burst is found in the measurements premeasurements for phase frequency error or carrier power vs time SYNC not found This bit is set if the synchronization sequence or training sequence of the TSC is not found in the measurements premeasurements for phase frequency error or carrier power vs time No carrier This bit is set when no carriers are found by the auto frequency sequence 3 to 14 15 These bits are not used This bit is always 0 11 10 2 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register The STATus QUEStionable LIMit register contains application specific informa tion about limit line checks Various bits are set based on the measurement result con figured fo STATus r a window If any errors occur in this register the status bit 9 in the QUEStionable register is set to 1 if the status bit Z9 in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error o Each active channel uses a separate STATus QUEStio
241. cribed in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 244 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 244 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 244 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 244 6 4 6 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output con
242. cument 3GPP TS 45 010 provides details on the alignment of slots within the GSM frame Optionally the BTS may use a timeslot length of 157 normal symbol periods on time slots with TN 0 and 4 and 156 normal symbol periods on timeslots with TN 1 2 3 5 6 7 rather than 156 25 normal symbol periods on all timeslots The alignment of slots therefore falls under the Not Equal Timeslot Length Equal Timeslot Length off or the Equal Timeslot Length Equal Timeslot Length on cri Timeslot Alignment terion see also Equal Timeslot Length on page 94 which are illustrated in fig ure 5 19 See 0 Siot 1 Sit 2 Sio 3 Slot 4 Siot5 Shot 6 Sio17 Middle ot Mode of Middle ot Middle ot Middle ot Midde ot Middle of Middle of Midamble Midamble Midamble Midaenble Midamble Midamble Midamble Midamble 157 NSP 156 NSP 156 NSP 156 NSP 157 NSP 158 NSP 156 NSP 186 NSP 1884 RSP 1872 RSP 187 2RSP 1872 RSP 1884 RSP 1872 RSP 1872RSP 187 2 RSP Sit 0 Siot 1 Slot 2 Sio 3 Slot 4 So 5 Slot 8 Siot 7 Middle of Middie of Middle of Made of Middle of Midde of Middle of Midde of Midamble Midamble Midamble Midaenble Midamble Midamble Midarble Midamble 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 156 25 NSP 1875 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP 187 5 RSP Fig 5 19 Not equal top and equal bottom timeslot length criteria Note that since the reference point at the mi
243. cur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase lI and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as UO signals The complete modulation informa tion and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be analyzed in the UO baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture UO data using the I Q Analyzer application if available and then analyze that data later using the R amp S FSW GSM application As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values UO data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual UO data import and export is only available for Modulation Accuracy measurements MCWN measurements include a combination of I Q based and sweep based mea surements Export only in MS
244. d GSM UO Measurement Results Table 4 2 Calculated summary results Result Description SCPI query for result value type Current Value for currently measured frame only READ BURSt MACCuracy lt Parameter gt CURRent Average Linear average value of Current results from the specified READ BURSt MACCuracy lt Parameter gt number of frames AVERage Exception The average of the Origin Offset Suppression is the linear average of the power ratio converted to dBm subsequently Peak Maximum value of Current results from specified number of READ BURSt MACCuracy lt Parameter gt frames MAXimum Exception The peak of the Origin Offset Suppression is the minimum value as this represents the worst case which needs to be detected Std Dev Standard deviation of Current results for specified number READ BURSt MACCuracy lt Parameter gt of frames SDEViation Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MACC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results READ BURSt MACCuracy ALL on page 307 chapter 11 8 4 Modulation Accuracy Results on page 305 Modulation Spectrum Graph The modulation spectrum evaluates the power vs frequency trace of a certain part of the burst 50 to 90 of the useful part excluding the training sequence TSC by mea suring the average power in this part over several frames at certain fixed frequency off sets The Modulation Spectrum Graph disp
245. d 300 kHz to measure intermodulation products e Gated zero span measurements with an RBW of 30 kHz to measure narrowband noise MCWN measurements and MSRA mode MCWN measurements are only available in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer operating mode not in MSRA mode see chapter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 For more information on MCWN measurements see also chapter 5 15 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise on page 71 e Multicarrier Evaluation Methode 35 Multicarrier Evaluation Methods The GSM multicarrier wideband noise measurement can be evaluated using different methods All evaluation methods available for the measurement are displayed in the selection bar in SmartGrid mode For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual By default the MWCN measurement results are displayed in the following windows e Spectrum Graph Carrier Power Table The following evaluation methods are available for GSM MCWN measurements erede 36 Garrter Power Table n ecc rin xri a sta rk exe Sana ux eee en ee Sea 37 Maer IEN EE 38 TIR E ll 38 Inner Narrow Band Table 40 Outer Namowband Table trceeesiecocect eiae Eno rr Poe eee baa arro a iat 40 Inner Wideband Table eer n ei b rr ere n o e a rks 42 Quter Wideband EE 43 Oe TEE EE 45 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays Spectrum Graph Displays the level results for the frequencies in the defined frequency span typical
246. d Power Class None Maximum Output Power per Carrier Mode C a Value 50 0 dBm RS Mu TT EN Ree EN Eeer 92 Maximum Output Power per Carrier multicarrier measurements only 92 Device Type Defines the type of device under test DUT The following types are available e BTS Normal e BTS Micro e BTS Pico e MS Normal e MS Small e Multicarrier BTS Wide Area e Multicarrier BTS Medium Range e Multicarrier BTS Local Area The default device type is BTS Normal Remote command CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 204 Frequency Band The frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 47 The following frequency bands are supported DCS 1800 E GSM 900 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 GSM 850 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration PCS 1900 P GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 380 T GSM 410 T GSM 810 T GSM 900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 205 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 206 Power Class The following power classes are supported For MCWN measurements no power class is used NONE 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 207 Maximum Output
247. d against the lower limit The limit masks are generated adaptively from the measured signal according to the following parameters Frequency band special masks for PCS1900 and DCS1800 BTS with GMSK Burst type Modulation Filter The reference burst power is measured and the 0 dB line of the limit mask is assigned to it For MS the 6 dB line of the limit mask depends on the PCL The PCL is derived from the measured burst power Impact of the Statistic Count Generally the Statistic Count defines how many measurements or analysis steps are performed equivalent to the Sweep Count in applications that perform sweeps In particular the Statistic Count defines the number of frames to be included in statis tical evaluations For measurements on the Slot to Measure the same slot is evaluated R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements in multiple frames namely in the number specified by the Statistic Count for statisti cal evaluations For Trigger to Sync measurements where only one result is calculated per data acqui sition the Statistic Count determines how many values are considered for averaging As mentioned above the Statistic Count for Trigger to Sync measurements refers to the number of data acquisitions whereas for all other measurements the value refers to the number of frames Since usually more than one frame is captured per data acquisition the number of data
248. d and depending on the value of Equal Timeslot Length These values are summarized in Expected Delta to Sync values in normal symbol periods Slot to measure 0 No of slots 8 and First slot to measure 0 5 13 5 13 1 Limit Checks Table 5 7 Expected Delta to Sync values in normal symbol periods Slot 0 Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Number to mea sure Equal 0 156 25 312 50 468 75 625 00 781 25 937 50 1093 75 Timeslot Length On Equal 0 157 313 469 625 782 938 1094 Timeslot Length Off Limit Checks e Limit Check for Modulation Gpechum enne 69 e Limit Check for Transient SDeCU ITI orte ennt e ero tee e aude 70 e Limit Check for Power vs TimebResults nennen 70 Limit Check for Modulation Spectrum The determined Modulation Spectrum values in the average Avg trace can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Modulation Spectrum diagram see Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded The limits depend on the following parameters Frequency band Device Type only BTS type not MS type Burst Type Modulation Filter limits are different for Higher Symbol Rate and Wide Pulse Filter case 2 and others case 1 see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 3 e Th
249. d span see chap ter 6 4 4 2 Frequency Settings on page 148 Note If the span is too small no wideband noise results can be calculated For a measurement according to standard set the span to the TX band automatically see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 150 e The segments are also limited by the maximum range demanded by the GSM standard 10 MHz outside the edge of the relevant transmit band e Adjacent segments are not merged to one large segment even if their limit values happen to be identical Multicarrier and Wideband Noise e The R amp S FSW GSM application calculates where the standard demands intermo dulation measurements instead of wideband noise measurement It does not mat ter whether the intermodulation measurement is actually enabled or disabled in the Noise Measurement Settings All determined IM ranges override a wideband mea surement and replace it This can make the wideband noise measurement seg ment start later end earlier or even vanish completely or be separated in several segments e The middle of the gap is always a boundary in case a wideband noise measure ment segment exists there e The gaps between 2 wideband noise limit line segments in the R amp S FSW GSM application are 1 Hz wide These exact values can be output via remote com mands However in the result display some start and stop frequencies may appear to be equal due to rounding effects In the w
250. d the uppermost carrier of the upper sub block Outer inner iil Outer IM j IM p Fig 4 2 Inner and outer intermodulation The following parameters are shown Table 4 12 Intermodulation results Result Description Offset MHz Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which intermodulation power is measured Freq MHz Absolute frequency of intermodulation product Order Order of intermodulation product RBW kHz Resolution bandwidth used for measurement dB relative power level to reference power measured at IM frequency dBm absolute power level measured at IM frequency A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate limit check failed LSS E EE User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 39 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements If Intermodulation is off this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH OIMP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts OUTer ALL on page 336 Inner Narrow Band Table Similar to the Outer Narrowband Table however the measured distortion products in the gap between the GSM carrier blocks are displayed for non contiguous carrier allo cation The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block Offsets are lower than 1 8 MHz 400 KHz 600 KHz 1200 KHz
251. d window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 11 7 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Boy done Imm I pro cop D tase aaah cater nent E eee aa 276 LAY out GA EE ele EE 278 LAYoutIDENUfy WINDOW 1 i ceret aaea aea adia aiii iainih 278 Analyzing GSM Measurements LAY ouEREMover WINDOW EE 279 LAYouEREPLace lee EE 279 Be EE 279 LAY out WINDOW SMP ADD EE 281 LAYO WINDOW SAS IDENY Zinn aaan Ea v ete tuy ENER 281 LAY out WINBDow sn REMONWG 12 n Lente nannaa doe beccnesuudeccuartechadansiuanuaaaesscndas 282 LAvoutWlNDow cnz RED ace sententiae anpa ii esse sss sss EEEE 282 LA Your WINDOWSRBREITYRe 2 2 2 a ee Ee 282 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Par
252. ddle of TSC of each slot must coincide the length of the guard interval between successive bursts will depend on both the timeslot length and the symbol rate of bursts in successive slots As stated in the standard 3GPP TS 45 010 for the Equal Timeslot Length case if there is a pair of different symbol period bursts on adjacent timeslots then the guard period between the two bursts shall be 8 5 normal symbol periods which equals 10 2 reduced symbol periods For the Not Equal Timeslot Length case deriving the guard period length is some what more complicated and the possible values are summarized in Table 5 7 2 of 3GPP TS 45 010 reproduced below as Guard period lengths between different time slots for convenience Table 5 6 Guard period lengths between different timeslots Burst Transition Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of normal symbol periods Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of reduced symbol periods TSO and TS1 or Any other time slot pair TSO and TS1 or Any other timeslot pair period to reduced symbol period TS4 and TS5 TS4 and TS5 normal symbol 9 8 10 8 9 6 period to normal symbol period normal symbol 9 25 8 25 11 4 9 9 Delta to Sync Values Burst Transition Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of normal symbol periods Guard Period Between Timeslots In terms of reduced symbol periods TSO and TS1 or Any other
253. discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the GSM Application GSM measurements are performed in a separate application on the R amp S FSW To activate the GSM application 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the GSM item Understanding the Display Information GSM The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the GSM application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the GSM Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 6 3 1 Configuration Overview on page 88 Remote command INSTrument SELect on page 202 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured
254. div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Avww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 9 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform common GSM measurements with the R amp S FSW GSM application 9 1 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 182 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 183 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Gionals eese 185 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Gonals AAA 186 How to Measure Wideband Noise in Multicarrier Geiupes 188 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Sig nals 1 2 Press the MODE key and select the GSM application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e For access bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e Forsignals fr
255. e 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Name string Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 222 Suffix lt p gt Return values lt State gt Usage 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I DETected NDETected RST NDETected Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe 11 5 2 5 11 5 3 11 5 3 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt Type gt String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 5 4 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 243 DJAGnoslic SERVICe NSONEGB 2 7 2t ca roti ae aano ena erra seta aa Rena aab aged ba EE AES 232 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce
256. e Query only Manual operation See Active carriers on page 101 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt FREQuency lt AbsFreq gt This command defines or queries the absolute frequency of the selected carrier Suffix lt c gt 1 16 Active carrier Parameters lt AbsFreq gt Frequency in Hz RST 0 Example CONF MCAR CARR3 FREQ 1GHZ Example Manual operation Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 See Frequency on page 101 CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt MTYPe Modulation This command defines or queries the burst type and modulation of the selected carrier Suffix lt c gt Parameters lt Modulation gt Example Example Manual operation 1 16 Active carrier Frequency in Hz AGMSk Access burst GMSK modulation HN16qam Higher symbol rate burst narrow pulse 16 QAM modulation HN32qam Higher symbol rate burst narrow pulse 32 QAM modulation HNQPsk Higher symbol rate burst narrow pulse QPSK modulation HW16qam Higher symbol rate burst wide pulse 16 QAM modulation HW32qam Higher symbol rate burst wide pulse 32 QAM modulation HWQPsk Higher symbol rate burst wide pulse 16 QPSK modulation N16Qam Normal burst 16 QAM modulation N32Qam Normal burst 32 QAM modulation N8PSk Normal burst 8PSK modulation NAQPsk Normal burst AQPSK
257. e a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a measurement channel in the GSM application a GSM modulation accuracy measurement for the input signal is started automatically with the default con figuration The GSM menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions The MARKER FUNCT and LINES menus are currently not used 6 3 1 id ke rM Overview Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Importing and Exporting UO Data The I Q data to be evaluated in the GSM application Modulation Accuracy measure ment only can not only be captured by the GSM application itself it can also be impor ted to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the GSM application can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the LI Save or EN Open icon in the toolbar For details on importing and exporting UO data see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual e Gohfig rauorm OVepviBW cce eer ona ee cera tec Doct reta eet eee ee dave be d er 88 e Signal Descnpltione uae rei ei nee Fr ei de
258. e unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 384 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an I Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the UO data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 384 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the U
259. e 375 Usage Query only Manual operation See Carrier Power Table on page 37 FETCh WSPectrum WlIDeband INNer ALL This command queries the numeric results of the wideband noise measurement for the frequencies in the gap between the GSM carrier subblocks for non contiguous carrier allocation For details see Outer Wideband Table on page 43 For each limit line segment the following values are returned Return values lt StartFreqAbs gt lt StopFreqAbs gt lt WorstFreqRel gt lt WorstFreqAbs gt lt RBW gt lt PowerAtWorst gt lt LimitAtWorst gt lt AbsRelMode gt lt LimCheck gt Example Usage Manual operation Retrieving Results numeric value Absolute start frequency of limit line segment Default unit Hz numeric value Absolute stop frequency of limit line segment Default unit Hz numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier to the worst mea sured wideband noise result in this limit line segment Default unit Hz numeric value Absolute frequency of the worst measured wideband noise result regarding delta to limit in this limit line segment Default unit Hz numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement in this limit line segment Default unit Hz numeric value Absolute or relative power level to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB numeric value Absolute or relative
260. e Bit errors in the data transmission The bit will only be set if an error occurred at the current measurement e Protocol or data header errors May occurred at data synchronization problems or vast transmission errors The bit will be set constantly and all data will be erroneous To solve the problem the Digital UO connection has to be newly initialized NOTE If this error is indicated repeatedly either the Digital UO LVDS connection cable or the receiving or transmitting device might be defect 5 not used 6 Digital UO Input FIFO Overload This bit is set if the sample rate on the connected instrument is higher than the input sam ple rate setting on the R amp S FSW Possible solution e Reduce the sample rate on the connected instrument e Increase the input sample rate setting on the R amp S FSW 7 not used Status Reporting System Bit No Meaning 8 Digital UO Output Device connected This bit is set if a device is recognized and connected to the Digital UO Output 9 Digital UO Output Connection Protocol in progress This bit is set while the connection between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 10 Digital UO Output Connection Protocol error This bit is set if an error occurred while the connection between analyzer and digital UO data signal source e g R amp S SMW R amp S Ex I Q Box is established 11 Digital UO Output FIFO Overload This bit i
261. e Le He EE 239 NEIE e ERAN 239 TRiGger SEQuence HOLDO MME ET 240 TRIGSer SEQuencel IF Power ee E 240 TRiGger SEQuence IF PoweriHY STeresis nicin 240 TRiGger SEQuence LEV cl BBPOWer 0 i202 2 Latino etr dnt ne ERR SEENEN EE 240 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port cessere 241 TRIGger SEQuence E 241 TRIGger SEQuence EVelIGPOWSL 2 2 2 net en ccr ema acc tonc ta tate etes Gates acevczcvanencie 241 TRIGSer SEQuence E EVelREPOWELF iet rtr rrt erdt ut TE ene eroe Rua 242 TRIGger Re Le De EE 242 TRIGger SEQuence SL OBSe coercere tei cor ce Ei eye o anid 242 KREE ee Re BI 242 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 240 command for new remote control programs Parameters lt Period gt Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters
262. e analysis interval or not orange AL the line lies within the interval white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements 2 PVT Full Burst Trigger source for MSRA Master Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FSW GSM application see chapter 5 5 Trig ger settings on page 52 In the default state in MSRA operating mode the Sequencer is active in continuous mode Thus the MSRA Master performs a data acquisition and then the active applica tions evaluate the data in turn after which the MSRA Master performs a data acquisi tion and so on As opposed to some other R amp S FSW applications in MSRA mode stat istical evaluation of the traces averaging MinHold MaxHold is not reset after each evaluation in the R amp S FSW GSM application ing continuous data acquisition in MSRA operating mode over a longer period e g over night and then checking the average or MinHold MaxHold trace to detect any irregularities in the captured data You can take advantage of this feature in the R amp S FSW GSM application by perform For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 84 6 6 1 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function Configura
263. e as SENS FREQ CENT 11 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt n gt next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 11 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Introduction 11 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for
264. e bottom of the diagram For details see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 For negative trigger offsets the trigger is displayed as a vertical red line labeled TRG User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 19 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays 5 Magnitude Capture 0 0s 20 0 ms Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MCAP see f on page 276 Results gt on page 304 gt on page 303 on page 298 Magnitude Error Displays the magnitude error over time for the S 8 Magnitude Error el Avg 2 Max e3 Min e4 Clrw 3 5 sym 145 5 sym Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH MERR see on page 276 Results on page 298 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 20 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays WEEN Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 174 4 Marker Table Wnd Type X value 1 Mi 13 25 GHz 1 M 600 0 kHz 1 M1 600 0 kHz 1 d V 2 0 MHz Tip To navigate within long marker tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results CALCulate n MARKercm X on page 344 CALCulate n MARKer m Y on page 344 Modulation Accuracy Displays the numeric values of the fundamental modulation c
265. e frequency band defines the frequency range used to transmit the signal For details see Frequency bands and channels on page 47 The following frequency bands are supported DCS 1800 E GSM 900 GSM 450 GSM 480 GSM 710 GSM 750 GSM 850 PCS 1900 P GSM 900 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration R GSM 900 T GSM 380 T GSM 410 T GSM 810 T GSM 900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 205 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 206 Center Frequency Specifies the center frequency of the signal to be measured typically the center of the Tx band If the frequency is modified the ARFCN is updated accordingly for UO measure ments see ARFCN Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 233 ARFCN Defines the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number ARFCN The Center Fre quency on page 111 is adapted accordingly Possible values are in the range from 0 to 1023 however some values may not be allowed depending on the selected Frequency Band Remote command CONFigure MS ARFCn on page 233 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased using the arrow keys When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed va
266. e is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 1 4 QNAN not a number is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 BBMM 1 OUT 100000000 200000000 Passed Passed 1 1 4QNAN Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 106 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO State If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the op
267. e measured intermodulation products up to the order specified in Intermodulation for the frequencies in the gap between the GSM carrier blocks for non contiguous carrier allocation are displayed The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block Fig 4 1 Inner and outer intermodulation The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute IM frequency For contiguous carrier allocation or if Intermodulation is off this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH LIMP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results FETCh WSPectrum IMPRoducts INNer ALL on page 335 Outer IM Table Displays the measured intermodulation products up to the order specified in Intermo dulation for the frequencies outside of the sub blocks but not in the gap R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays WEE 3 Outer IM Table Intermodulation Power Offset MHz Freq MHz Order RBW kHz dB dBm A to Limit 5 5 5 5 5 9 5 5 e C For each of the following regions the parameters described in table 4 12 are shown e frequencies to the left of the lowermost carrier e frequencies to the right of the uppermost carrier The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute IM frequency The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the lowermost carrier of the lower sub block an
268. e measured reference power 30 kHz bandwidth e The measured burst power power level e Number of active carriers for multicarrier BTS The limit is relaxed by 10 log10 N dB for offset frequencies 21 8 MHz see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 2 5 13 2 5 13 3 5 14 Impact of the Statistic Count Limit Check for Transient Spectrum The determined Transient Spectrum Accuracy values can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Transient Spectrum diagram see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 The limits depend on the following parameters e Graph Limit check of maximum Max trace Table Limit check of absolute and relative scalar values The limit masks are generated adaptively from the measured signal The limits depend on the following parameters Frequency band not for MS Burst Type Modulation Filter not for MS The measured reference slot power Limit Check for Power vs Time Results The determined Power vs Time values can be checked against limits defined by the standard the limit lines and the result of the limit check are indicated in the Power vs Time diagram see PvT Full Burst on page 28 and in the Power vs Slot table see Power vs Slot on page 27 The limits depend on the following parameters e The maximum Max trace is checked agains the upper limit e The minimum Min trace is checke
269. e name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Controlling the Negative Transition Part STATus OPERation NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Note if you switch between the IQ measurement and MCWN measurement the transi tion is set to its default value Thus you must reconfigure the transition after switching measurements if necessary Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Controlling the Positive Transition Part STATus OPERation PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUESt
270. e reference level 11 5 4 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 114 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible Parameters State 110 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 114 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off Parameters State 110 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 114 Triggering Measurements Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured e Configuring the Triggering Conditions ccecccceeeceeeeeeeeececeeeeeeneeseceeeeeeeesens 239 e Gonfiguring the Wuer EE 243 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 11 5 4 1 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure the trigger for the GSM measure ment RRE R
271. e than one slot 5 3 Short Introduction to VAMOS The Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot VAMOS exten sion to the GSM standard allows transmission of two GMSK users simultaneously within a single time slot Subchannels The standard specifies the downlink signal using Adaptive QPSK AQPSK modulation see 3GPP TS 45 004 where two subchannel binary sequences are multiplexed to form a single QPSK sequence The ratio of powers for the subchannels is referred to as the Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SCPIR One of the subchannels is inter preted as interference The value of SCPIR affects the shape of the AQPSK constella tion For an SCPIR of OdB the constellation is square as in normal QSPK while for other values of the SCPIR the constellation becomes rectangular Training sequences TSCs A new set of training sequences TSCs has also been proposed see 3GPP TS 45 002 for GMSK signals The previous TSCs for GMSK bursts are listed as Set 1 while the new TSCs are listed as Set 2 AQPSK signals can be formed using TSCs from Set 1 on the first subchannel and TSCs from either Set 1 or Set 2 on the second subchannel In case a TSC from Set 2 is used it should match the TSC from Set 1 i e TSC lt n gt from Set 1 on subchannel 1 should match TSC lt n gt from Set 2 on subchannel 2 for n 0 7 TSC vs Midamble The terms TSC and Midamble are used synonymously in the standard In this docu men
272. e the number of measurements the R amp S FSW uses to average traces In case of continuous sweep measurements the R amp S FSW calculates the moving average over the Statistic Count In case of single sweep measurements the R amp S FSW stops the measurement and calculates the average after Statistic Count measurements Parameters lt SweepCount gt If you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FSW performs one single measurement Range 0 to 32767 RST 200 11 5 6 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of measurements to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT OPC Starts a series of 64 measurements and waits till its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Statistic Count on page 125 See Noise Average Count on page 162 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent This command returns the currently reached number of frames or measurements used for statistical evaluation It can be used to track the progress of the averaging process until it reaches the set Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 252 For Trigger to Sync measurements use the SENSe SWEep COUNt TRGS CURRent command to query the number of data acquisitions that contribute to the current result Usage Query only SENSe SWEep COUNt TRGS CURRent This command returns the currently reached number of data acquisitions that contrib ute to the Trigger to Sync re
273. easurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements This command is only available if one of the following result displays are selected see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 e Modulation Spectrum e Inner Outer Narrowband tables e Inner Outer Wide band tables Inner Outer Intermodulation tables Parameters for setting and query lt Mode gt ABSolute RELative RST RELative Example JI Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute Run one measurement and query absolute list results READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL I gt 0 933200000 933200000 108 66 65 00 ABS PASSED For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect lt Mode gt For Modulation Spectrum Table measurements this command controls whether offset frequencies are measured up to 1800 kHz or 5800 kHz Parameters for setting and query lt Mode gt NARRow The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 1 8 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 6 5 MHz NSParse More compact version of NARRow The sample rate is 6 5 MHz WIDE The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 6 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 19 5 MHz WSParse More compact version of WIDE The sample rate is 19 5 MHz RST WIDE Example
274. easurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Maximum Default unit dBm Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 W Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent MAXimum Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt DELTatosync READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt DELTatosync This command starts the measurement of the Delta to Sync value for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Further results of the measuremen
275. easurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure lt s lt First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Retrieving Results Return values lt Result gt numeric value Maximum Default unit dBm Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL MAXimum Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent AVERage READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent AVERage This command starts the measurement to read out the average power for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Further results of the measu
276. ect an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual How to Export and Import UO Data UO data can only be exported in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications How to Export and Import UO Data Capturing and exporting UO data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the R amp S FSW GSM application or any other appli cation that supports UO data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the EJ Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name o N Dm 5 o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension iq tar Importing UO data 1 Press the MOD
277. ed with the focus on the selected setting For step by step instructions on configuring GSM measurements see chapter 9 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application on page 182 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 202 Select Measurement Selects a measurement to be performed See Selecting the measurement type on page 85 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes frame detection and measurement The Signal Description settings are available from the configuration Overview e Device Under Test Setihgs oorr cnm eti per e 142 Camer SEMOS E 144 Device Under Test Settings Access Overview gt Signal Description gt Device The type of device to be tested provides additional information on the signal to be expected Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Device Carriers Device Under Test Device Type Multicarrier BTS Wide Area Frequency Band Power Class None Maximum Output Power per Carrier Mode C a V
278. eful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Try this function if the TSC can not be found Parameters State ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap Q on page 124 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the data capture time Tip If you use an external trigger which indicates the frame start the minimum allowed capture time is reduced from 10 ms to 866 us Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt Time gt Time in seconds In MSRA mode the RST value is 0 02 s Range 0 01s to 1s RST 0 1 Example SWE TIME 1s Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Capture Time on page 123 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO State If enabled the capture time is determined according to the set statistic count with the objective of getting a fast measurement If disabled the capture time must be defined manually using SENSe SWEep TIME on page 246 Tip In order to improve the measurement speed further by using short capture times consider the following Use an external trigger which indicates the frame start In this case the minimum allowed capture time is reduced from 10 ms to 866 us see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 Measure only slots at the be
279. elects the training sequence code TSC Normal and Higher Symbol Rate Bursts or training synchronization sequence TS for Access Bursts of the specified slot and subchannel used by the mobile or base station See 3GPP TS 45 002 chapter 5 2 Bursts This command is not available for AQPSK modulation use CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC instead Suffix lt s gt 0 7 Number of the slot to configure Query parameters lt ResultType gt Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements TSC SET Queries the currently used TSC number or the set If no query parameter is defined only the TS or the TSC is returned TSC Only the TSC or TS is returned SET The set of the TSC is returned Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt Example Manual operation 011 2 13 4 5 6 7 0 1 02 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 TS0 TS1 TS2 USER training sequence for normal burst 0 7 One of the 7 pre defined training sequence codes is used 0 1 0 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 2 6 1 6 2 7 1 7 2 TSC number and set for normal burst rates TSO TS1 TS2 Training synchronization sequence for access bursts USER A user defined training sequence is used see CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s TSC USER on page 215 RST 0 II TSC 3 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOTO TSC 3 1 Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel
280. ement Results on page 17 e EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Trace bResuhts 301 e PVT FullBurst Trace FResulls 5 e hone Ee St AER TENE 302 e Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graph Results 302 e Magnitude Capture Results 2 csetera 302 amp Tigger to Syne EE 303 e MOWN Spectrum Graph ccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeceeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeecececeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 303 11 8 2 1 EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error Trace Results The error vector magnitude EVM as well as the phase and magnitude errors are cal culated and displayed for each symbol Thus the TRAC DATA query returns one value per symbol The number of symbols depends on the burst type modulation and number of carriers used for transmission as well as the oversampling factor used inter nally by the R amp S FSW GSM application The following table provides an overview of the possible number of symbols Table 11 5 Number of trace result values for EVM Phase Error Magnitude Error measurements Burst Modula Multi No of trace Comment Type tion carrier points BTS AB GMSK any 348 87 symbols ov oversampling factor 4 NSP ov NB GMSK OFF 588 147 symbols ov oversampling factor 4 NSP ov this corresponds to the useful part of the burst see 3GPP TS 45 004 2 2 Start and stop of the burst NB GMSK ON 568 samples ov oversampling factor 4 Ges symbols NSP
281. ennt nennen 332 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer DATAJ seseseee eee ee enne nenne enini nnne nnn nnn nnns 332 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA This command queries the x values of the limit specified line Suffix lt k gt 1 2 3 4 The limit line to query 1 upper limit line for MCWN wideband noise limit 2 lower limit line PvT Full Burst only for MCWN intermodulation limit at 100 kHz 3 MCWN only intermodulation limit at 300 kHz 4 MCWN only narrowband noise limit Return values lt LimitLinePoints gt For PvT Full Burst display Time in seconds For Modulation Spectrum Graph or Transient Spectrum Graph result displays relative frequency in Hz For Spectrum Graph result displays absolute frequency in Hz Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 See PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Spectrum Graph on page 36 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of the limit check of the limit line indicated in the selected measurement window Note that a complete sweep must have been per formed to obtain a valid result A synchronization with OPC OPC Or WAI should therefore be provided Suffix lt k gt Return values lt Result gt Example Exa
282. entrer a a e EX e FEE e E ENIT re EENS 239 TRIGger SEQuericelHOLDofI TIME ea canto toin rnt tnter atn tno pet tena ERNE U ENESA 240 TRIGger SEQuerice 1FPower HOLDofF inre tr trente re peer re rer re eon 240 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis attore trem ner irr tr nh iere 240 RRE ee E ene RE EE Ee EE 240 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel FPower vg TRIGger SEQuence LEVelIQPOWE creino raa Ea Eaa a NATTEN ENNER EAA EEEE 241 TRIGger sEQUuericeLHHEVeb REPOWSFE vesccadscesssciscescsscap casrecconcerentcoscenpanvagueuniet teuncesendeevioween EEDE EAEN 242 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernalsport 5 notte trn rrr nnne 241 TRIGger SEQuence RFPower HOLDoff TRIGE SEQUENCE k SLOPE irese AE Re ee Rene Ree Index Symbols Ecl 379 RE UR e M 50 TS 45 004 46 49 51 60 TS 45 005 91 46 58 69 EE 46 65 MSO TO TEE 46 TS ONOI E 31 46 EE 49 379 Measurement Iter cierto icri Rue 58 Module m Et 98 Symbol PSHOG E 61 62 T6 QAM ie 46 49 379 MeasuremehtTIlter s eer roi ere edente ces 58 le e es 98 Symbol Delo E 61 62 32QAM Measuremleht Iter oce tir ree D n e 58 Siero esc ENES 98 Symbol peOG EE 61 62 A Aborting SWBOD cient n ale o eege 126 162 163 AC DC COUplirig irae ttis 103 147 Access bursts Limit line time alignment
283. eoa 90 e Input Output and Frontend Settings corrente 101 Lar eo diim PC 117 E e mM TET 122 e Demoduilatligli urere eren ptr en nent vec ean 127 e Measurement Settings entente tense nnns nnne 132 e Adjusting Settings Automatically cscri ert n tts 138 Configuration Overview Access MEAS CONFIG gt Overview Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview Note that the configuration Overview depends on the selected measurement type Configuration for multicarrier measurements is described in chapter 6 4 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements on page 139 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Swenson O 0 im Device Band EX x An idR Fron ARECN i Slat Senne Lr Count a itc a aM Device Type Input Frequency ARFCN ze Capture Time Ref Level Swap IQ Level Offset Ka Statistic Count Synchronization TSC Measure only on Syn STRU EIE I Magnitude Capture gt Fig 6 1 Configuration Overview for Modulation Accuracy measurement In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overv
284. equency band used by the DUT as defined in the Signal Description settings Slot Scope Minimized visualization of the frame configuration and slots to be mea sured see chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode Count Number of frames already evaluated Total number of frames required for statistical evaluation Statistic Count For Statistic Count gt 1 TRG Trigger source if not Free Run and used trigger bandwidth for IF RF IP power triggers or trigger offset for external triggers MCWN measurement For the MCWN measurement the R amp S FSW shows the following settings MultiView Spectrum GSM Ref Level if Device Band Att i jt Carners Ref Meas t Count 620 200 Table 2 2 Information displayed in the channel bar in the GSM application for the MCWN measure ment Ref Level Reference level m el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Reference level offset if available Carriers Number of active carriers Device Band Device type and frequency band used by the DUT as defined in the Signal Description settings Ref Meas Carrier used for reference measurement if enabled SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode Count Value of the current average count Total average count for noise mea surement Noise Average Count TRG Trigger source if not Free Run and used trigger bandwidth for
285. equency step size to the span In time domain zero span measurements the center frequency is coupled to the RBW Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not O Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application Note In MSRA MSRT mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master For MSRA MSRT applications only the query command is available Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 112 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 11 5 3 2 Amplitude Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 220 INPut IMPedance on page 222 CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 207 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectz lt SCALelb Dhvislon eene 235 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel essen 235 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe
286. equire or allow for additional settings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window C ONE 283 CSN EE 285 gt GANS EE 289 11 7 2 1 Traces The number of available traces depends on the selected window see Specifics for on page 90 Only graphical evaluations have trace settings DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe essere 283 bISPlay WINDowens TRAOBSESMODE 1 Licet aderat teet ttt etta 283 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 on page 170 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 171 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command controls whether a trace is displayed or not and in which mode Each trace can only display a certain mode or nothing at all Blank table 11 4 below indi cates which measurements can display which traces and which trace modes Note even if a trace is not displayed the results can still be queried see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 298 In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the
287. er the selected slot scope see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 127 and its peak taken over Statistic Count measurements GSM frames Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching TYPE on page 262 6 3 7 3 Trigger to Sync Access Overview gt Measurement gt Trigger to Sync The Trigger to Sync measurement allows for further configuration p Power vs Time Spectrum Trigger to Sync Trigger to Sync Histogram i Adaptive Data Size No of Bins Specifies the number of bins for the histogram of the Trigger to Sync measurement For details see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 Remote command CONFigure TRGS NOFBins on page 265 User Manual 1 173 9263 02 12 137 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Adaptive Data Size Specifies the number of measurements I Q captures after which the x axis of the Trigger to Sync histogram is adapted to the measured values and fixed for subse quent measurements Up to the defined number of measurements the Trigger to Sync value is stored When enough measurements have been performed the x axis is adapted to the value range of the stored results For subsequent measurements the result is no longer stored and the x axis and thus the dimensions of the bins is maintained at the set range The higher the Adaptive Data Size the more precise the x axis scaling For details see Trigger to Sync Graph on page 32 Remote command CONFigure TR
288. ermine statistical values for a measurement in a remote environment RST Reset the instrument CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL OBW Activate occupied bandwidth measurement INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW Returns the results for the OBW measurement 11 13 5 Programming Examples Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers This example demonstrates how to configure a GSM wideband noise measurement of a GMSK modulated signal with multiple carriers in a remote environment f 22 Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Select the multicarrier wideband noise measurement CONF MEAS MCWN Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt dg eesseesec Signal Description Configure a multicarrier base station wide area DUT without power classes CONFigure MS DEV TYPE MCBW CONFigure MS NETWORK PGSM CONFigure MS NETWORK FREQ BAND 900 CONFigure MS POW CLAS NONE Configure 2 subblocks of carriers with 3 carriers each and a gap of 5 MHz CONF MS MCAR FALL NCON CONF MS MCAR CARRI1 CONF MS MCAR CARR2 CONF MS MCAR CARR3 nj REQ 935 MHZ REQ 935 6 MHZ REQ 936 2 MHZ m nj CONF MS MCAR CARRA CONF MS MCAR CARR5 CONF MS MCAR
289. es the use of the direct path for small frequencies In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal In such mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer always uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 221 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional hardware option Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command I
290. es vss GONFigureE MSEMULTEBURSECONSIe ll acest secncssenestcosneneentntecuveeteovcencoavaebauvgeretncusiensitteasconaseeencaweaae CONFigure MS MULTEBURStDEModulation t cor tr aS CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt PTEMplate GONFigure MSTEMULTESPECtrum MODUUWlatiOh ca onere te e nter ene penne Front e y dne GONFigureE MS MULTI SPECtrum SWITching 2ncinonr rrt nto rne eren CONFigu re MS OUER ECH AE CONFigure MS NETWorksFREQUENCYIBAND ice ccsccsecrogencstoen t n o e treo D NETE ATINE sane kk e cree eieiei UE RAR KO EK del CONFigur IMS POWerAUTO ONDGE iicet ta eth coiere then trie euro etn rero ter nter erre CONFigure MS POWer AUTO SWEep TIME eg CONEFigure MS POWern e GONFigure MS POWer PCARrier AU TOT cesccacserssscviernesnecusicesichvonsuacencsutaeneconsevseevcaseeustaciasecscvocensnenaaterss 209 Ee ee le BER le 209 GONFigureE MS SSEGArch rrr ttt nre rrr teer eee een Ren en pe 361 EI ee UE RAR dr Le ele Wl e EE 257 ee renes EEN d ele e 255 CONFigure MS SYNC ONLY DIAGnostic SERVICe Ee 232 DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE SIIN FO 355 NET EE 275 DISPlay M TABI E 287 ele EE E 275 DISPlayE WINDow lt n gt TRAGE lt t gt de 283 DISPlay WINDowsn gt TRAGe xt Y SCALe itr eer rtr tern trennen 236 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe AUTO essere enne neren nnne enne 289 DI
291. et nnne 314 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum essent nennen nnne nnns 314 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation eese 314 READ BURStI MAC Curacy PERRO RMS AVERa JE nennen rikaa nre t rennen 315 READ BURStI MACCu racy PERRO RMSiCURREN AA 315 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum esses nennen nennen nns 315 READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation AA 315 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK AVERQGe A 309 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURREM AAA 309 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAXimum esses aaa 309 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK SDEViation D READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage esssssseseeeeeenenneen nennen nnne rennen rennen READ BURSIt MACCuracy EVMI RMS CURRent tnnt ntn eth entr tente 310 READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS MAXiIMUM oo nennen nen rennen nennen 310 READ BURSI MACCuracy EVM RMS SDEViation eseesssssssseesseeeeeeeeneeeneene nennen 310 READ SPECtrum MObDulation GATiFIg cc tnr tren treten nene rr torre eR denen 317 READ SPECtrum MODulation REFerence IMMediate essen 317 READ SPECtrum MODulation ALL READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence GATing scao torneo te ten te AS 327 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate 1 nnt tinent tn tnn 327 READ SPEGCtrum SWITChing ADLE
292. ev Xp t PE Pera 351 STATUS elle e elei GT LKE 353 STATus QUEStionable ENABle acere aranea rack savecaeenausicead atarweasnataceaesdasesondsavevaceseuadaseaaawanenece STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt CONDition STATUs QUEStionable LIMitsn gt ENABI6 E STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt NTRansition STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt n gt PTRansition STAT s QUEStionable EIMitspns EVENt c i b Waitt re conne eb iret rh Rer 353 STATUS QUEStionable NT E Le EE 354 STATus QUEStionable P TRANSIRO srsti revii aaia Pn ernment 354 STAT s QUEStionable S d Tee TR UE KEE 353 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle eese eene nnne nnne rie a OE ENEAN EOE E ERTE 353 STATus QUEStionable SYNG NTRarsitioh rrt rtr Aa ct a ree neto 354 STATus QUEStionable S YNC P TRansitiohi 1 antreten trennen tht erret rb ei nnns 354 STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENIt eesseesieeeeeseee esee enne Eia eode ETE EDSAC innen 353 GEN el TE ER E CU REN 353 STATUS QUE uef NEXT orzenn iana T A N 352 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXEQCute eese eese enne nennen nennen ennt enne nee trennen enne 202 SVS LEM SEQUENCE p 202 TRACE IO BWIDU RE 248 TRAC IQ DATA MEMOY EE 299 Ree RN EE 247 ENEE RE 299 TRACecnsl DATA 298 TRiIGgerf SEQuence BBPower HOLDS trn otn rn etr tren rre rrr en rennen 239 TRIGger SEQuence D TIMe iti i irt rne rere rrr r
293. evel settings measurement functions etc If you want to perform the same measurement but with dif ferent center frequencies for instance or process the same input data with different measurement functions there are two ways to do so Change the settings in the measurement channel for each measurement scenario In this case the results of each measurement are updated each time you change the settings and you cannot compare them or analyze them together without stor ing them on an external medium e Activate a new measurement channel for the same application In the latter case the two measurement scenarios with their different settings are displayed simultaneously in separate tabs and you can switch between the tabs to compare the results Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function For example you can activate one GSM measurement channel to perform a GSM modulation accuracy measurement for an unknown signal and a second channel to perform a multicarrier measurement using the same GSM input source Then you can monitor all results at the same time in the MultiView tab The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed on the R amp S FSW at any time If one mea surement is running and you start another or switch to another channel the first mea surement is stopped In order to perform the different measurements you c
294. f Slots Slot Scope ov oversampling factor 24 157 length of a long slot a slot can have a length of 156 156 25 or 157 symbols NSP 11 8 2 3 Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graph Results Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum Graphs consist of 1135 trace values two less than in previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers 11 8 2 4 Magnitude Capture Results The Magnitude Capture trace consists of 32001 trace values regardless of the defined capture time and thus of the length of the capture buffer Retrieving Results 11 8 2 5 Trigger to Sync Results The Trigger to Sync Graph results consist of two traces Thus the results of the TRAC DATA query depend on the lt TraceNumber gt parameter TRACe1 returns the height of the histogram bins the number of values is defined by the number of bins see CONFigure TRGS NOFBins on page 265 TRACe2 returns the y values for the probability density function PDF of the aver aged values The number of values depends on the number of data captures Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 252 X values The results of the TRAC DATA X query also depend on the lt TraceNumber gt parame ter TRACe1 returns the time in s at the center of each bin in the histogram TRACez2 returns the time in s for the PDF function of the averaged values 11 8 2 6 MCWN Spectrum Graph The Multicarrier Wideband Noise Spectrum Graph consists of o
295. form PASSED no limit exceeded FAILED limit exceeded Example READ SPEC SWIT 0 998200000 998200000 84 61 56 85 REL PASSED 0 998400000 998400000 85 20 56 85 REL PASSED Usage Query only Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 FETCh SPECtrum SWITching REFerence READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate This command starts the measurement and returns the measured reference power of the Transient Spectrum This command is only available for Transient Spectrum Table evaluations see Tran sient Spectrum Table on page 31 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command The result is a list of partial result strings separated by commas Return values lt Level1 gt measured reference power in dBm lt Level2 gt measured reference power in dBm lt RBW gt resolution bandwidth used to measure the reference power in Hz Example READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence IMMediate Manual operation See Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 READ SPECtrum SWITching REFerence GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated measurements of the reference power of the Transient Spectrum measurement see Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or External and Trigger Offset see
296. g EEN 127 SCOPE default snars Scope defining Scope display Selecting EE Slot to measure ALS cs 97 Statistical evaluation 125 uec 95 Time alignment 54 65 Useful pat 5 e etn trece 327 softkey remote rte E 272 Softkeys Amplitude Config 112 151 Auto Freq 138 168 Auto Level 138 168 Capture Offset iriri aiies iair 124 Continue Single Sweep sssss 126 163 Continuous Sequencer s essssesessesesressrrsessrnerressrees 86 Continuous Sweep 126 162 Display Config anf 340 P 179 External 118 158 Free RUF Gerst isarate resta eier 118 158 FREQUENCY CONTIG cer eterne ttes 110 Frequency Config MCWN 148 le EE 119 IF Power 4 159 lujo d 179 Input Source CONFIG re 101 146 Input Frontend 101 146 eg ee dE 179 IQ Import 149 Marker Config zd Marker to Trace zia lec Not Delta ee Outputs Config si Peak oriniai aedes eite aeta airaa 174 Power NEE 119 Preamp 114 154 Ret Level weree een ege 113 152 Ref Level Offset deed Seeler 113 153 PROTOS M RN 126 RF Atten Auto 113 153 RF Atten Manual ccccccceceeeceessseeeeeeeeeeeeee 113 153 IRE Ge EE 119 159 Select Markt eene cide dt ed Nei 174 EE ede
297. g and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 Q 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Q Data File Format iq tar Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 0 0 Otol 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 01 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 O 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 ITT gir Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 1 Of27 111 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01 2 1 Q 0 21 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 11 21 OTI 21 Channel 1 Complex sam
298. ge 24 The returned values can be used to set the gating interval for list measurements i e a series of measurements in zero span mode at several offset frequencies This is done in the Spectrum mode using the SENSe LIST subsystem see SENSe LIST POWer SET Prior to this command make sure you set the correct Trigger Mode IF power or External and Trigger Offset see chapter 11 5 4 Triggering Measurements on page 238 11 8 6 Retrieving Results Return values lt TriggerOffset gt Calculated trigger offset based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured lt GateLength gt Calculated gate length based on the user defined Trigger Off set and Frame Configuration such that 50 90 of the active part of the Slot to measure excluding TSC is measured Example READ WSP MOD GAT Results 0 00032303078 0 00016890001 Usage Query only Power vs Slot Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Power vs Slot evalu ation For details on the individual results see Power vs Slot on page 27 d READ vs FETCh commands Note that for each result type two commands are provided which are almost identical The READ command starts the measurement and reads out the result When the mea surement is started the R amp S FSW GSM application is automatic
299. ginning of the frame directly after the trigger see chapter 11 5 6 1 Slot Scope on page 254 e Use a small statistic count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 252 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE TIME AUTO OFF SWE TIME 1s Manual operation See Capture Time on page 123 TRACe IQ SRATe This command queries the final user sample rate for the acquired UO data Parameters lt SampleRate gt The sample rate is a fixed value depending on the frequency range to be measured see also Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 136 Range 100 Hz to 10 GHz continuously adjustable RST 32 MHz Example See chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 Usage Query only 11 5 5 2 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Manual operation See Sample rate on page 123 TRACe IQ BWIDth This command queries the bandwidth of the resampling filter The bandwidth of the resampling filter depends on the sample rate Usage Query only Manual operation See Analysis Bandwidth on page 123 Configuring and Performing Sweeps The Sweep settings define how often data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application Useful commands for configuring sweeps described elsewhere SENSe SWEep TIME on page 246 INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 293 Remote commands exclusive to configuring and performi
300. gnal applied to the RF input of the R amp S FSW is captured for a specified measurement time This data is demodulated and synchronized with a reference signal to identify the individual frames and slots The slots of interest are then analyzed in order to display the spectral and power results either graphically or numerically and to calculate the modulation parameters The standard distinguishes between single slot and multi slot measurements Single slot measurements analyze one slot referred to as the Slot to measure within the GSM frame which consists of 8 slots in total Modulation specific parameters such as the phase error EVM or spectrum due to modulation are determined on a per slot basis Multi slot measurements on the other hand analyze a slot scope of up to 8 con secutive slots each of which has different burst modulation characteristics Power vs time limit checks and the transient spectrum measurements for example are deter mined for multiple slots Statistical evaluation of several measurements is also possible Finally the GSM mea surement results can be exported to other applications GSM UO Measurement Results 4 Measurements and Result Displays 4 1 The R amp S FSW GSM application provides two different measurements in order to deter mine the parameters described by the GSM specifications The default GSM UO measurement captures the UO data from the GSM signal The UO data includes magnitude and phase
301. gure on page 95 and in the Slot Scope tab of the Demodulation dialog box see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 127 Demodulation Settings Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Single Slot Measurements Slot to Measure No Slots to Measure s First Slot to Measure 2 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure Norm Norm Fig 5 6 Frame configuration in Slot Scope settings This graphic can be interpreted as follows e Each slot is represented by its number 0 to 7 e Slot numbers within the defined slot scope are highlighted green The number of the defined Slot to Measure is highlighted blue Active slots are indicated by polygonal symbols above the number which contain the following information um EP EIN NM CNN NN I UNUS User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 55 Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application The burst type e g Norm for a normal burst The modulation e g GMSK The training sequence TSC and Set or Sync for access bursts 5 7 Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application The R amp S FSW GSM application requires a number of filters for different stages of sig nal processing These include the Multicarrier filter for multicarrier base station mea surements only the Power vs Time filter and the Measurement filter A signal flow diagram is shown in figure 5 7 to illustrate where the different filters are used Synchron
302. h In Manual mode be sure to define a sufficiently long capture time If the capture time is too short demodulation will fail Note The duration of one GSM slot equals 15 26 ms 0 576923 ms The duration of one GSM frame 8 slots equals 60 13 ms 4 615384 ms Tip In order to improve the measurement speed further by using short capture times consider the following Use an external trigger which indicates the frame start In this case the minimum allowed capture time is reduced from 10 ms to 866 us see chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 Measure only slots at the beginning of the frame directly after the trigger see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 127 e Use a small statistic count see Statistic Count on page 125 Note MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The Capture Time for the R amp S FSW GSM application in MSRA mode defines the length of the application data extract see also chapter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual The Capture Time can also be defined using the softkey which is available from the SPAN BW or SWEEP menus Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 246 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 247 Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA MSRT operating mode It has
303. hahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual Documentation Overview e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation DVD with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the DVD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instru ment Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download fro
304. haracteristics of the signal to be analyzed in the vector UO domain error vector magnitude EVM magnitude and phase error IQ imbalance etc 3 Modulation Accuracy Current Average 22 70lle Phase Error RMS The following modulation parameters are determined T User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 21 GSM UO Measurement Results Table 4 1 Modulation accuracy parameters Parame Description SCPI query for result value ter EVM Error vector magnitude for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK 9 RMS and peak error values for the current frame in percent EE 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all EVM ee SE SEVM S RMS results for all frames in entire measurement fall SCH ype READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile EVM Mag Error Magnitude error for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy MERRor PEAK d lt gt RMS and peak error values for the current frame in percent Beanie vee 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all Mag EE lt Resulttype gt nitude Error results for all frames in entire measurement fall READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile MERRor Phase Phase error for the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK lt gt Error RMS and peak error values for the current frame in percent BESIDE De 95 ile error value in percent below which 95 of all oe oe SEERROTERMS Phase Error results for al
305. he GSM application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated UO data from the GSM application can be exported for further analysis in external applications For details on importing and exporting UO data see chapter 8 I Q Data Import and Export on page 178 MME MOV LOADIQ STAT VC 345 MMEMory STORe sn 1Q COMMenl EE 346 MMEMory STORG lt NF 1Q STATEC arana a aE annan R EaR Raa 346 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file The file extension is iqw Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data iqw Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See 1 Q Import on page 179 11 10 Status Reporting System MMEMory STORe lt n gt IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Comment gt String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 IC R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is
306. he R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation Using the common status registers The following topics specific to the GSM application are described here LEM coste E 193 e COMMON SUMO ucciso inoa eden eo dte dg ae ees eon d du o duode pl 198 e Activating GSM Measurements ceci ise Lade HELL Ld adu u a 198 e Selecting the Measurement 4 eec netten than ndn ttbi ihnen 203 e Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements rees 204 e Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements AAA 267 e Analyzing GSM Measurement c cceceeccteceseeeeteeeeseeenseeeeeneneteeeeneenteseneeatee 274 e Retrieving Resuhts nennen nnne nnne nnns nens 296 e Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results 345 e Status Repot ng System sede iie ed cedi sedi des 346 Neel ee de EE 355 e Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility 356 Programming Exarmples co redet dee eee inden eee 365 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can
307. he value range to be displayed per division of the diagram 1 10 of total range Note The value defined per division refers to the default display of 10 divisions on the y axis If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision on page 235 Ref Position Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the position of the reference value in percent of the total y axis range Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 290 Ref Value Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 291 7 2 Zoom Functions Access Zoom icons in toolbar EMIS ZOO EE 177 PIS BOON arees eege ee ee eege 177 Restore Otiginal DISplay 2 2 rt eiae ta Lee aii ede EE Ee E ERE Le FE Deus 177 R Deactivating Zoom Selection model 177 Zoom Functions Single Zoom ER A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are v
308. he window is its index Analyzing GSM Measurements Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table LAY out WINDow lt n gt TYPe Queries the window type of the window specified by the index lt n gt For a list of possi ble window types see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Example LAY WIND2 TYPE Response MACC Modulation accuracy Usage Query only Analyzing GSM Measurements 11 7 2 Result Config Some evaluation methods r
309. heme as proposed for use in GSM systems is illustrated in figure 5 3 First the bits from two users subchannels 1 and 2 are interleaved The combined bit sequence is then mapped to an AQPSK constellation which depends on the SCPIR value The AQPSK symbols are then modulated using the linearized GMSK pulse see 3GPP TS 45 004 Trigger settings Sub chanel 1 bits ao a1 Interleaver 8o bo a b Sub chanel 2 bits bo bi Fig 5 3 AQPSK modulation scheme for GSM systems Tx Filter Tx 3051 Linearized GMSK Waveform The proposed AQPSK mapping as assumed in the R amp S FSW GSM application is given in table 5 4 and illustrated in figure 5 4 where the first leftmost bit corresponds to subchannel 1 and the second rightmost bit corresponds to subchannel 2 Table 5 4 AQPSK symbol mappings reproduced from 3GPP TS 45 004 Modulating bits for AQPSK symbol in polar notation aj b Si 0 0 et 0 1 e 1 0 ei 1 1 elt The AQPSK modulation constellation diagram is shown in figure 5 4 where the value a is an angle related to the SCPIR as follows SCPIR g 20 log o tan a dB Q 1 D Se 0 0 JE OR X17 a f a d 7 X A a 1 1 0 4 Fig 5 4 AQPSK constellation reproduced from 3GPP TS 45 004 5 5 Trigger settings The GSM measurements can be performed in Free Run untriggered mode how ever an external trigger or a po
310. her level Status Reporting System Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 Usage SCPI confirmed STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Setting parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt
311. hese types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 286 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 286 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 287 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 286 7 1 2 2 General Marker Settings Access Overview Result Config Marker Marker Settings or MKR gt Marker Config gt Marker Settings tab Result Configuration Markers Marke
312. his function is not available in MSRA mode Remote command CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE on page 266 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Automatic Frame Configuration When activated a single auto frame configuration measurement is performed Note This function is not available in MSRA mode if the Sequencer is active The auto frame configuration measurement may take a long time therefore it is deacti vated by default The following parameters are detected and automatically measured Active slots Slot configuration burst type modulation filter TSC Equal time slot length For VAMOS normal burst and GMSK TSCs of set 1 and set 2 For VAMOS normal burst and AQPSK TSCs of both subchannels restrictions see Restriction for auto frame configuration on page 51 and SCPIR Remote command CONF AUTO FRAM ONCE see CONFigure MS AUTO FRAMe ONCE on page 265 Automatic Trigger Offset If activated the trigger offset for external and IF power triggers are detected and automatically measured This function is not available in MSRA mode For details on the trigger offset refer to Trigger Offset on page 120 Remote command CONF AUTO TRIG ONCE see CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE on page 266 D 6 4 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements For multicarrier measurements some parameters defined by the GSM standard require a swept measurement with varying resolution bandwidths Thus
313. his setting was referred to as narrow 1 8 MHz More compact version of 1 8 MHz The sample rate is 6 5 MHz sparse 6 MHz The frequency list comprises offset frequencies up to 6 MHz from the carrier The sample rate is 19 5 MHz In previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers this setting was referred to as wide 6 MHz More compact version of 6 MHz The sample rate is 19 5 MHz sparse Remote command CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect on page 263 Transient Spectrum Reference Power This setting is only required by the Transient Spectrum evaluation see Transient Spectrum Graph In this evaluation the power vs spectrum for all slots in the slot scope is evaluated and checked against a spectrum mask To determine the relative limit values a reference power is required In order to detect irregularities it is useful to define the peak power as a reference However the standard requires the reference power to be calculated from the RMS power To perform the measurement according to the 3GPP standard set the reference power to RMS and the Slot to Measure to the slot with the highest power see also Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 RMS Default The reference power is the RMS power level measured over the useful part of the Slot to Measure and averaged according to the defined Statistic Count R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Peak The reference power is the peak power level measured ov
314. hus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration Starting the GSM Application 2 Welcome to the GSM Application The R amp S FSW K10 is a firmware application that adds functionality to perform GSM measurements to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW K10 features e Measurements on downlink or uplink signals according to the Third Generation Partnership Project 3GPP standards for GSM EDGE EDGE Evolution EGPRS2 and Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot VAMOS e Measurement in time frequency or UO domains e Measurements of mobile devices MS single carrier and multicarrier base trans ceiver stations BTS Measurement of signals ith GMSK AQPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation normal or higher symbol rate Measurement of signals using different Tx filters e g narrow and wide pulse Measurements for Power vs Time Modulation Accuracy and Modulation and Tran sient Spectrum as required in the standard e Measurements of wideband noise and intermodulation products in multicarrier operation as defined in 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 12 Measurements of wideband noise narrowband noise and intermodulation prod ucts in multicarrier operation as defined in 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 12 This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation All functions not
315. ic value Absolute or relative power level to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB lt LimitAtWorst gt numeric value Absolute or relative power level limit to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Indicates whether absolute or relative power values are returned depending on CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT on page 262 11 8 11 Retrieving Results lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check in this limit line segment PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP WID OUT Usage Query only Manual operation See Outer Wideband Table on page 43 Retrieving Marker Results Useful commands for retrieving marker results described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 344 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving marker results GAL Gulat lt n gt DEL Tamarkers M gt X naccarii aaa KAA douadcaceesndawnaasccuaend 343 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative senes nns 343 CAL Culatesm DELE Tamalkersmi9 Y EE 344 GAEGulate mns MARKersmis EE 344 GALOulate n MARKersm Y9 EE 344 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example
316. ideband noise tables the results are then displayed for each segment see Outer Wideband Table on page 43 Limit checks in wideband noise tables For the wideband noise table results which indicate the distance of the measured value to the limit limit exceptions do not cause the wideband noise segment to be split into two or more segments The wideband noise table segments are constant and do not vary from sweep to sweep depending on whether exceptions are set or not as opposed to the overall limits see chapter 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results on page 76 Level Exception Delta to limit d L_exception L_normal Start1 Worst1 Stop1 Worst3 a Start2 Worst2 Stop2 Start3 Stop3 Fig 5 22 Wideband noise table exceptions and delta to limit values R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Example Determining the delta to limit values for wideband noise tables In Wideband noise table exceptions and delta to limit values you see how the delta to limit values are calculated The measured wideband noise trace is blue The limit line taking exceptions into account is orange In each segment StartX to StopX the red arrow shows the worst delta to limit result e The first segment fails assuming no exception is allowed here e The second segment passes e In the third segment the normal limit line dotted line fails at frequency a How ever an exception is allowed and raises the limit for a certain range
317. iew In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 6 3 2 Signal Description on page 90 2 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 6 3 3 Input Output and Frontend Settings on page 101 3 Triggering See chapter 6 3 4 Trigger Settings on page 117 4 Data Acquisition See chapter 6 3 5 Data Acquisition on page 122 5 Demodulation Settings See chapter 6 3 6 Demodulation on page 127 6 Measurement Settings See chapter 6 3 7 Measurement Settings on page 132 7 Result Configuration See chapter 7 1 Result Configuration on page 169 8 Display Configuration See chapter 6 2 Display Configuration on page 87 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration To configure settings gt Select any button to open the corresponding dialog box The corresponding dialog box is opened with the focus on the selected setting For step by step instructions on configuring GSM measurements see chapter 9 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application on page 182 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FS
318. ignal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 235 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level In some result displays the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 235 Mechanical Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Attenuation Mode Value Mechanical Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that no overload occurs at the RF INPUT connector for the current reference level It is the default setting
319. iguration see Trigger 2 3 on page 116 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Settings Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the in
320. igure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence CARRier NUMBer lt CarrNo gt This command specifies the carrier at which the reference powers for the MCWN mea surement are measured if reference power measurement is enabled see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 271 Parameters lt CarrNo gt Number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Range 1 16 RST 1 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS ON CONF SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO OFF CONF SPEC MOD REF CARR AUTO NUMB 2 Manual operation See Carrier Selection Carrier on page 165 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure State This command specifies whether a reference power measurement is performed Parameters State ON OFF ON The reference powers of all active carriers are measured for MCWN measurements OFF the reference powers must be defined manually see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEVel on page 271 RST ON Example CONF SPEC MOD REF MEAS OFF Manual operation See Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 164 See Defining Reference Powers Manually on page 165 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence PLEVel Level This command defines the reference power level for MCWN measurements if no ref erence measurement is performed see CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence MEASure on page 271
321. ikely does not coincede with the frame start for the GSM sig nal Avoiding unnecessary high sample rates According to the GSM standard modulation spectrum results must be performed at frequencies up to 6 MHz from the carrier in some cases When the frequency list to be used is set to 6 MHz in the Measurement settings see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 136 the R amp S FSW GSM application uses a sample rate of 19 5 MHz as opposed to the usual 6 5 MHz sample rate The higher sample rate extends the required measurement time Only use the 6 MHz frequency list setting if you actually require Modulation Spectrum results according to standard Improving EVM Accuracy If the EVM results show unexpected power levels check the following issues R amp S9FSW K10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 10 3 Extending the data basis Sporadic distortions in the EVM can be eliminated by evaluating several measure ments and determining the average over all traces Increase the Statistic Count in the Sweep settings to obtain sufficiently stable results Excluding results from adjacent channels For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers configure the DUT as such in the signal description In this case an additional multicarrier PvT filter sup presses power from adjacent channels This filter is also taken into account during the generation of the ideal reference signal otherwise
322. iled If narrowband measurement is disabled this table is empty Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH ONAR See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results FETCh WSPectrum NARRow OUTer ALIL on page 338 Inner Wideband Table Similar to the Outer Wideband Table but the numeric results of the wideband noise measurement in the gap between the GSM carrier blocks for non contiguous carrier allocation are displayed The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the uppermost carrier of the lower sub block and the lowermost carrier of the upper sub block Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements As for the Outer Wideband Table the Inner Wideband Table normally has one entry for every limit line segment the GSM standard 3GPP TS 51 021 defines in section 6 5 1 But in this table the middle of the gap between the 2 sub blocks is used to split up the results in an upper and lower part see ranges C and D in figure 4 4 Outer wide band results Active carriers Limit line for wideband noise Inner wide band results Middle f of gap 1800 KHz 11800 KHz I Fig 4 4 Inner and outer wideband noise results The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute frequencies of the wideband noise measurement segments For contiguous carrier allocation or if noise measurement is disabled this table is empty Furthermore the
323. ilter Training Sequence TSC User TSC Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration gd Normal Burst NB TSC 0 Set 1 00000000000000000000 000000 Fig 6 2 Slot configuration for normal and higher symbol rate bursts R amp S FSW K10 l Configuration Band 8TS Norr Slot Multi Carrier Burst Type Modulation Filter Timing Advance Sync User Sync 00000000000000000000 00000000000000000000 Fig 6 3 Slot configuration for access burst The Slot settings are dependant on each other and only specific combinations of these parameters are available in this dialog box see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 Slot State On Off Activates or deactivates the selected slot The R amp S FSW GSM application expects an input signal within the active slots only At least the Slot to Measure must be active in order to evaluate it Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt STATe on page 211 Burst Type Assigns a burst type to the selected slot The following burst types are supported e Normal NB Higher Symbol Rate HB e Access AB The graphical slot structure is adapted according to the selected burst type SSS gt EE ee User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 97 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Note The Slot settings are dependant on each other and only specific combinations of these parameters are available in this dialog
324. indows the command will not work but does not return an error y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 280 Analyzing GSM Measurements Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically
325. information which allows the R amp S FSW GSM application to demodulate signals and determine various characteristic signal parame ters such as the modulation accuracy power vs time modulation and transient spec trum in just one measurement For multicarrier measurements some parameters required by the GSM standard require a frequency sweep with varying resolution bandwidths Thus a new separate measurement is provided by the R amp S FSW GSM application to determine the wide band noise in multicarrier measurement setups For details on selecting measurements see Selecting the measurement type on page 85 e GSM UO Measurement Resuhte cscs esee enne nnne nens 17 e Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurement eene 34 GSM I Q Measurement Results The I Q data that was captured by the default GSM Modulation Accuracy etc mea surement can be evaluated using different methods All evaluation methods available for the GSM measurements are displayed in the selection bar in SmartGrid mode To activate SmartGrid mode do one of the following Ei Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar Select the Display button in the configuration Overview e Select the Display Config softkey from the MEAS CONFIG menu Press the MEAS key For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual By default the GSM measurement results for UO measurements are displayed in the following windows e Magnitude C
326. ing remote 199 Querying remote Renaming remote Replacing remote Measurement filter isinen 58 Magnitude response ire ternera 59 Measurement time REMOTE esr 246 247 Measurements Ed DEER 85 90 142 Kier 17 Microbutton Edel 109 Midamble see ISO TSC senti c rr EE su corda 50 MITT EE 175 Marker positlonihg teretes 175 MKR gt ROY 174 MODE KO au 11 ele Le ME 98 Carriers 101 146 RE UE 140 Dependency TT 59 Inverted UO remote 246 Inverted I Q we 124 IMOGES EE 49 Modes remote 4 241 Number of TSC IS sucre 99 IRBW at 1800 KHZ rrt tres 24 26 136 Modulation Accuracy Evaluation method 2 2 ira 21 Parameters Results remote Modulation Spectrum Graph results remote AA 302 Graph evaluation method ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 23 Bud CMO CK scaly e eee tls 69 Narrow Wide Gu EE Table results remote AA 315 Table evaluation method eee cece eeeeeeee 24 Table frequency list 136 MS Mobile Station 379 MSRA Analysis Iriterval EE 124 246 MEWN c M 35 Operatirig mode rernm ns 82 MSRA applications Capture offset remote AAA 294 MSRA Master Data coverage ciiasan direnean aaia 83 Multi standard radio MSR signals ssss 74 Multicarrier BTS E due E 99 144 Multicarrier Wideband Noi
327. ing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 183 10 11 12 13 14 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals e For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated Select the Display Config button and activate one or more of the following result displays for modulation accuracy and error parameters up to a total of 16 win dows e Modulation Accuracy e EVM e Magnitude Error e Phase Error Tip Also activate the Magnitude Capture result display for a general overview of the me
328. ings and functions concerning the trace markers windows etc are available for GSM measurement results e Configuring the Result DiSPlay 2 rete tentia ceo aka A REV eee 1 a RS 274 eu e e 283 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 291 e Zooming Int the RE EE 294 11 7 1 Configuring the Result Display The commands required to configure the screen display in a remote environment are described here e General Window Commandes 275 e Working with Windows in the Display 275 Analyzing GSM Measurements 11 7 1 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application DISP POR EE 275 BISPlayEWINBeowesns SIZE EE 275 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 279 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selecte
329. ionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Troubleshooting Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Note if you switch between the IQ measurement and MCWN measurement the transi tion is set to its default value Thus you must reconfigure the transition after switching measurements if necessary Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 11 11 Troubleshooting If problems occur the instrument generates error messages which in most cases will be sufficient for you to detect the cause of an error and find a remedy In addition our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any prob lems that you may encounter with your R amp S FSW We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with information on the system configuration An xml file with information on the system configuration device footprint can be cre ated automatically DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo lt FileName gt This command creates a zip file with important support information The zip file con tains the system configurati
330. ious types of output such as noise or trigger signals The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup e Radio frequency Inpede e repe die 146 E GENEE EE 148 e Amplitude SNNT EE 151 e Output SENGS EE 154 6 4 4 1 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector This is the only available input source for MCWN measure ments Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Input Source Frequency Input Coupling Impedance Direct Path High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz YIG Preselector Input Connector DUE OND E EET 147 hysorg qm 147 Ree PAU m 147 Fligh Pass Filter 1 3 E E 148 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 220 Impedance For MCWN measurements the impedance is always 50 Q Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies
331. is not available in MSRA mode Note that in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode if the Sequencer is active this com mand cannot be aborted via the ABORt command This can lead to a hang up situation when no trigger signal is available or the trigger level is not set correctly Use a device clear to abort the operation correctly Example CONF AUTO TRIG ONCE Usage Setting only Manual operation See Automatic Trigger Offset on page 139 CONFigure MS POWer AUTO SWEep TIME Value This command is used to specify the auto track time i e the capture time for auto detection This setting can currently only be defined in remote control not in manual operation Tip increase this value if less than every second GSM frame contains a signal Parameters for setting and query Value numeric value Auto level measurement sweep time Range 0 01 to 1 RST 0 1s Default unit S Example CONF POW AUTO SWE TIME 0 01 MS 11 6 11 6 1 11 6 2 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements SENSe ADJust FREQuency This function adjusts the center frequency and ARFCN I Q mode only automatically For multicarrier measurements all carrier settings are automatically adjusted see chapter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 This command is not available when using the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Example ADJ FREQ Usage Event
332. isible Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn Z00M STATe on page 295 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 294 Multiple Zoom Ba In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 296 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0OM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 295 Restore Original Display Restores the original display that is the originally calculated displays for the entire capture buffer and closes all zoom windows Remote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 295 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 296 for each multiple zoom window X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 295 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 296 for each multiple zoom window 8 d Import Export Functions IO Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly oc
333. ith SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp S amp EX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp S amp DiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURCe EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Remote commands exclusive to digital UO data input and output l zuas eHsib it E 224 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO octo aiia eea ences enimse 225 INPUEDIO Geer Be EE 225 INPut DIO BRANGe UPPbeli iiinis ad aiaia ia paiana anaandaa aaas 226 INPUt DIO RANGE DEET LEE 226 INPOC DIO ORATE Em 226 NPU DIGO SRATS AUTO enee EE leede EN 226 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital UO input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For details see the section Interface Status Information for the optional Digital Base band Interface in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A devic
334. ization Transient Spectrum Measurements Demod Measuremnts Reference Signal Generation Measurement Filter Modulation Spectrum Measurements Fig 5 7 Signal flow diagram highlighting filtering operations 5 7 1 Power vs Time Filter The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time measurement see PvT Full Burst on page 28 The following filters are available Single carrier filters e 1 MHz Gauss e 500 kHz Gauss e 600 kHz Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application Multicarrier filters e 400 kHz MC e 300 kHz MC The magnitude and step responses of the different Power vs Time filters are shown in figure 5 8 and figure 5 9 respectively In general the smaller the filter bandwidth the worse the step response becomes in terms of ringing effects and the better the suppression of interference at higher frequencies Gaussian type filters are especially useful for signals with sharp edges as the step response does not exhibit overshoot 35 Magnitude Response of Power vs Time Filters i 1 MHz Gauss 0 500 kHz Gauss i i 600 kHz 400 kHz MC 300 kHz MC 100L eeee E Magnitude dB Ze e 120 140 160 Frequency MHz Fig 5 8 Magnitude Response of the Power vs Time Filters Step Response of Power vs Time Filters MHz Gauss 500 kHz Gauss
335. l Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 or R amp S FSW85 For Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN measurements only input from the RF input connector is allowed For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Parameters lt ConnType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband connector RST RF Example INP CONN AIQI Selects the analog baseband input Usage SCPI confirmed INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 103 INPut DPATh lt State gt Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Parameters lt State gt AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Direct Path on page 103 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter i
336. l IFPower on page 241 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 241 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 241 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 242 Drop Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 239 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Note When using an external trigger the trigger offset is particularly important in order to detect the frame start correctly See chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 The R amp S FSW GSM application expects the trigger event to be the start of the active part in slot O offset 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 240 Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 240 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds th
337. l eegen 86 Single Geouencer A 86 Single Sweep 126 163 Span Metier ctae ios edes 150 leet M 150 jo M 150 Tiff tiene 120 Trace 1 2 3 4 BEAL Trigger CONG TE 156 Trigger Offset 120 160 SPAM esac Q 150 ETC 150 MEWN EE 150 Specifics for ConlfigulatiOni riot rn trn tte ries 90 Spectrum SENGS 134 Spectrum Graph Isesult display wich a nee nee 36 Start frequency SOMKEY ebe EE Eeer Eed 150 Statistic COUNT cent ois cee lett 125 191 Default Impact Remote Statistics Se 23 Programming example 365 369 372 374 375 Status registers IC EC 347 348 Description 2 m neret rrt rne rece 347 GSM EE 347 348 Querying 947 348 352 STATQUES POW l ipisna ae Ore geesde 220 STATus QUEStionable DIQ 949 STATus QUEStionable LIMit sssssssse 348 STATus QUEStionable SYNC sussss 347 Status reporting SYSIEM ei eet 346 Stop frequency Softkey Subchannels Suffixes COMMON sranie S 198 RREMOLECOMMANGS ieni ia 195 Swap UO Ee E 246 SWap He EE 124 Sweep ABOMING BEE 126 162 163 E Te EE 125 162 Time remote 246 247 Symbol decisioHi sugue SEENEN 131 Symbol period OR OIG geed e HL EE 9S2 QAM EE Definition GMSK e EE ET pe Symbol rates lei 50 Normal ven D SYNG cinereis
338. l frames in entire measurement fall Pa ype gt READ BURSt MACCuracy PERCentile PERRor Origin Off Origin offset suppression for the demodulated signal in the READ BURSt MACCuracy OSUPpress set Sup Slot to Measure Indicates the suppression of the DC carrier lt Resulttype gt pression the higher the suppression the better the DUT dB UO Offset I Q offset for the demodulated signal in the Slot to Measure READ BURSt MACCuracy IQOFfset gt 96 Resulttype UO Imbal A measure for gain imbalances and quadrature errors READ BURSt MACCuracy IQIMbalance ance between the inplace and quadrature components of the sig lt Resulttype gt 96 nal Frequency Frequency error of the center frequency currently measured READ BURSt MACCuracy FERROor Error in the Slot to Measure lt Resulttype gt Hz Burst Average power measured in the slot READ BURSt MACCuracy BPOWer Power lt Resulttype gt dBm Amplitude Indicates how much the amplitude decreases over a mea READ BURSt MACCuracy ADRoop Droop sured slot lt Resulttype gt dB The R amp S FSW GSM application also performs statistical evaluation over a specified number of results see Statistic Count on page 125 To do so the same slot is eval uated in multiple frames namely in the number specified by the Statistic Count The default value is 200 in accordance with the GSM standard For each parameter the following results are displaye
339. lation Accuracy Measurement Configuration GSM 710 GSM 750 GSM 850 PCS 1900 P GSM 900 R GSM 900 T GSM 380 T GSM 410 T GSM 810 T GSM 900 The default frequency band is E GSM 900 Remote command CONFigure MS NETWork TYPE on page 205 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND on page 206 Power Class The following power classes are supported For MCWN measurements no power class is used NONE 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 207 Equal Timeslot Length This parameter is only taken into account if Limit Time Alignment is set to Slot to measure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 133 If activated all slots of a frame are considered to have the same length 8 x 156 26 normal symbol periods In this case the limit line for each slot required for the Power vs Time spectrum masks is aligned by measuring the TSC of the Slot to Measure only and using this value to align the limit line for all slots in the frame see also PvT Full Burst on page 28 If deactivated slots number 0 and 4 of a frame have a longer duration all others have a shorter duration compared to the Equal Timeslot Length 157 156 156 156 157 156 156 156 normal symbol periods See GPP TS 51 021 and 3GPP TS 45 010 chapter 6 7 Timeslot length for further details
340. lays the measured power levels as a trace against the frequencies The measured values can be checked against defined limits the limit lines are indica ted as red lines in the diagram The result of the limit check PASS FAIL are shown at the top of the diagram Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Modulation Spectrum Graph 1 Avg 2 Clrw Note The graphical results only provide an overview of the spectrum For a detailed conformance check of the DUT to the GSM standard use the Modulation Spectrum Table evaluation which uses the 5 pole filter required by the 3GPP standard The numeric results of the modulation spectrum evaluation are displayed in the Modu lation Spectrum Table on page 24 The following default settings are used for a Modulation Spectrum evaluation Table 4 3 Default settings for a Modulation Spectrum evaluation Setting Default Measurement Scope The slot selected as Slot to Measure Averaging Configuration Number of bursts as selected in Statistic Count Limit Check According to standard Limit check of average Avg trace See chapter 5 13 1 Limit Check for Modulation Spectrum on page 69 Note Modulation RBW at 1800 kHz For the Modulation Spectrum Graph both the RBW and VBW are set to 30 kHz Remote
341. limit the effects of out of band interference due to the high sample rate of 6 5 MHz which is used The magnitude responses of all the Measurement fil ters are shown in figure 5 11 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters Measurement Filters for differant transmit filters Magnitude dB GMSK Pulse E Lin GMSK Pulse Narrow Pulse i Wide Pulse 1503 15 1 05 0 05 1 15 2 Frequency MHz Fig 5 11 Magnitude Responses of Measurement Filters for Demodulation Measurements Dependency of Slot Parameters The parameters that define a slot used for a GSM measurement are dependant on each other and only the following combinations of these parameters are available in the R amp S FSW GSM application see chapter 6 3 2 3 Slot Settings on page 95 Table 5 5 Dependency of slot parameters Burst Type Modulation Filter TSC AB GMSK GMSK Pulse TS 0 TS 1 TS 2 User HSR QPSK 16QAM 32QAM Narrow Pulse TSC 0 TSC 7 Wide Pulse User NB 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM Linearised GMSK Pulse TSC 0 TSC 7 User AQPSK Linearised GMSK Pulse Subchannel 1 TSC 0 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 1 Subchannel 2 TSC 0 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 1 TSC 0 Set 2 TSC 7 Set 2 Subchannel 1 User Subchannel 2 User GMSK GMSK Pulse TSC 0 Set 1 TSC 7 Set 1 TSC 0 Set 2 TSC 7 Set 2 User Definition of the Symbol Period 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Peri
342. limits defined by the standard as numeric results Note The GSM standards define both absolute and relative limits for the spectrum The limit check is considered to fail if both limits are exceeded Values that exceed both limits are indicated by red characters and an asterisk next to the value and a negative A to Limit value 2 Transient Spectrum Table Offset Power Negative Offsets Power Positive Offsets dB dBm A to Limit dB dBm A to Limit ei 13 5 To determine the relative limit values a reference power is required see Transient Spectrum Reference Power on page 136 In order to detect irregularities it is useful to define the peak power as a reference However the standard requires the reference power to be calculated from the RMS power To perform the measurement according to the 3GPP standard set the reference power to RMS and the Slot to Measure to the slot with the highest power See 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 Transmitter characteristics For GMSK modulation the term output power refers to the measure of the power when averaged over the useful part of the burst see annex B For QPSK AQPSK 8 PSK 16 QAM and 32 QAM modulation the term output power refers to a measure that with sufficient accuracy is equivalent to the long term aver age of the power when taken over the useful part of the burst as specified in 3GPP TS 45 002 with any fixed TSC and with random encrypted bits And 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter
343. lue X Span Sets the step size for the center frequency to a defined factor of the span The X Factor defines the percentage of the span Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 96 This setting is only available for MCWN measurements Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 234 6 3 3 3 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Note In MSRA MSRT mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Mas ter Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet
344. lues eue eere hne eee tee eret erit rie 68 5 13 Limit Checks E 69 5 14 Impact of the Statistic COUN ccccceseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseesseaneeeeeeeeeeees 70 5 15 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise eeeeeeeeeeenneennnnnenen nnne nnn nnn 71 5 16 Automatic Carrier Detection eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnnnenennn nennen nnne nnn nennt 82 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenennenenn nennen nennen nn 82 LEE esti eet 85 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 3 R amp S9FSW K10 Contents 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 7 1 7 2 8 1 8 2 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function 85 Display Configuratlon 12 einer aiunt ocu n nnns sunu ann Ru sinu na aR RR RRR RAE ERR Ran RR RRRR Ria 87 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration eene 87 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements eee 139 DULL me c 169 Result Configuration cerei eieeieea inre notius sa unen iren N nain irr aseina 169 PAuddthubon iM 176 VO Data Import and EXpOFL iii iio orn pa use oE ccc kn apu nae ra Sena Risa ccn 178 Import Export FU
345. ly the Tx band The trace is calculated from a frequency sweep with a 100 kHz RBW and one sweep with a 300 kHz RBW The displayed trace is averaged over the Noise Average Count number of noise measurements 1 Spectrum Graph Start 935 8 MHz 10001 pts 2 84 MHz Stop 964 2 MHz The narrowband noise results if available are indicated as vertical green bars at the distinct measurement frequencies see Outer Narrowband Table on page 40 The results of the limit check are also indicated in the diagram see also chap ter 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results on page 76 Table 4 10 Limit line checks Label Possible values Description Limit line suffix lt k gt Limit check PASS FAIL Overall limit check for all limit lines Wideband Noise PASS FAIL Limit check for wideband noise trace lt current gt exceptions Number of detected exceptions provided only if exceptions are enabled lt k gt 4 IM 100 kHz PASS FAIL Limit check for intermodulation at 100 kHz Number of detected exceptions provided only if exceptions are enabled lt k gt 2 IM 300 kHz PASS FAIL Limit check for intermodulation at 300 kHz lt k gt 3 Narrowband Noise PASS FAIL Limit check for narrowband noise lt k gt 4 Exceptions lt current gt PASS FAIL Number of bands with exceptions in range A currently maximum detected vs maximum allowed provided only if exceptions are enabled lt k gt 5 E
346. m the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion DVD delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals 1 3 1 3 1 Conventions Used in the Documentation All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual
347. mber of defined offset fre quencies for each active carrier That means UO data is captured at all relevant outer most carriers i e 2 carriers for contiguous 4 for non contiguous carrier allocation one after another From this UO data all slots and timing information are determined At each determined slot a gated zero span measurement with an RBW and VBW of 30 kHz is performed using the same UO data Measurement time is from 50 to 90 96 of the useful part of the time slot excluding the mid amble Measurement offsets are 400 kHz 600 kHz and 1200 kHz either below or above the outermost carrier Multicarrier and Wideband Noise If no slots are found the results are invalid due to an invalid measurement setup and a warning is displayed in the status bar Several narrowband noise measurements can be performed subsequently to calculate an average Typically a much larger average count than for the reference measure ment is required to obtain suitable results for noise measurements thus a separate average count is available for reference and noise measurements Wideband noise and intermodulation sweeps After the narrowband noise measurement if either wideband noise or intermodulation or both are enabled frequency sweeps are performed in the defined span Since the standard requires different RBWs depending on the distance from the outermost carri ers several sweeps are required to obtain results for the complete span The first
348. measurement is possible only in single sweep mode For a description of the trace modes see the Trace Mode Overview section in the base unit manual Analyzing GSM Measurements Parameters lt Mode gt AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures BLANk Hides the selected trace MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previ ous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the measurement result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previ ous one PDFavg The probability density function PDF of the average value WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM JI Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Modulation spectrum graph measurement LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH MSFD Result 2 INITiate IMMediate JI Switch off the display of all available traces DISPlay WINDow2 TRACel MODE BLANk DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe2 MODE BLANK Switch on the display of all available traces again DISPlay WINDow2 TRACel MODE AVERage DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe2 MODE WRITe
349. measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 251 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 126 INITiate DISPlay State This command turns the display update during single sweep measurements on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST ON INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to
350. ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL IQAnalyzer4 Deletes the channel with the name IQAnalyzer4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IOQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer
351. meters Value numeric value Default unit dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value on the y axis for all traces in the specified window The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value Default unit dBm Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applica tions For the GSM application the commands to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 5 5 1 Data Acquisi Analyzing GSM Measurements tion on page 246 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before execut ing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the GSM measurement Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels ee HE EE ne 292 CAL Culate nzMSbRA AL INelVAl ue 292 CAL Culate nzMSbRA WlNDow cnz MAL 292 CAL Culatesn MSRA WINDOowWsh MIVal 1 uade eet aan cdecevevacdeeddianceddch Eden 293 INL Tiate spes REFROSL iir cas e In Doce nr
352. mmand specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the optional Digital Baseband Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 105 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 105 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital UO input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 105 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements 11 5 2 3 Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface The following commands are required to control the optional Analog Baseband Inter face in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 222 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 233 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INPut I BAEanceg E STAT ueteres e i Dn ae ced Ea e ex lo ettet ate 227 INPut IQ F ELscale AUTO iiic eoi taces c tke eee eee ere se a Lace epus vaa cp EES 227 INPutIQ F LLscale EEVel a eiue cecine
353. mple Usage Manual operation Retrieving Results 1 2 3 4 The limit check to query 1 Max trace gt upper limit line for MCWN wideband noise 2 Min trace gt lower limit line PvT Full Burst only for MCWN intermodulation at 100 kHz 3 MCWN only intermodulation at 300 kHz 4 MCWN only narrowband noise 5 MCWN only Exceptions in subblock A 6 MCWN only Exceptions in subblock B 1 0 1 Failed see table 11 6 0 Passed see table 11 6 CALCulate2 LIMit1 FAIL For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chap ter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Query only See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 See PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 See Spectrum Graph on page 36 Table 11 6 Meaning of return values depending on result display Result display SCPI Return values Graph Power vs Time CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 FAIL 1 the limit check of the upper limit line against the max hold trace failed 0 passed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit2 FAIL 1 the limit check of the lower limit line against the min hold trace failed 0 passed Mod Spectrum CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1 FAIL 1 the limit check of the upper limit line against the Graph average trace failed 0 passed Tra Spectrum CALCulate lt n gt LIMit1
354. n dBm CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute Use compact version of narrow frequency list to save time CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIST SELect NSParse 9 Performing the Measurements INITiate IMMediate WAI Read trace data in binary format FORMat DATA REAL 32 Query current magnitude capture trace data TRACe1 DATA TRACe1 trace data Query the current power vs time trace TRACe2 DATA TRACe4 trace data Query the result of the power vs time limit check for max trace CALCulate2 LIMitl FAIL 1 Query max EVM trace data TRACe5 DATA TRACe2 trace data Query the maximum EVM value for slot 1 slot to measure in current measurement FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURR gt 0 62063819169998169 Query the maximum EVM value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 measured GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAX 0 76938760280609131 Query the averaged EVM RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 200 measured GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage 0 19639170169830322 Query the absolute mod spectrum table results 11 13 2 Programming Examples FETCH SPECtrum MODulation ALL gt 00 933200000 933200000 86 36 70 23 ABS PASSED Query the reference power of the mod spectrum FETCh SPECtrum MODulation REFerence 11 13 11 13 30000 Sse eet Exporting Captured I Q
355. n page 28 Further results of the measurement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Average Default unit dBm Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 ALL AVERage Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt ALL CRESt READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL CRESt This command starts the measurement and reads out the crest factor for the selected slot for all measured frames This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Retrieving Results
356. n to configure settings for specific result displays These settings can be configured individually for each window so select the win dow first and then configure the settings e Define the Traces to be displayed in the window Optionally configure the trace to display the average over a series of measure ments If necessary increase the Statistics Count in the Sweep Config dia log box e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks e Adapt the diagram scaling to the displayed data 13 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single measurement press the RUN SINGLE key e To start a new continuous measurement press the RUN CONT key 9 2 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 1 Press the MODE key and select the GSM application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a GSM measurement 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal by defin ing the used device and slot characteristics as well as the modulation e Define the expected burst type and modulation for each active slot e Define the training sequences or syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e Foraccess bursts also define a Tim
357. nable LIMit register Thus may have occurred in any of the channel specific STATus QUEStionable LIMit registers In this case you must check the register of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a register always returns the result nel name for the currently selected channel However you can specify any other chan as a query parameter Table 11 8 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Bit No Meaning 0 For PvT Modulation and Transient measurement results indicates the upper limit check result pass failure For MCWN Spectrum measurement result wideband noise limit line check including excep tions if activated For PvT measurement result indicates the lower limit check result pass failure For MCWN Spectrum measurement result IM 100 kHz limit line including exceptions if activa ted For MCWN Spectrum measurement result IM 300 kHz limit line For MCWN Spectrum measurement result Narrowband Noise limit line For MCWN Spectrum measurement result Exception Range A only FAIL result no limit line For MCWN Spectrum measurement result Exception Range B only FAIL result no limit line User Manual 1173 9263 02 2 348 Status Reporting System Bit No Meaning 6 to 14 These bits are not used 15 This bit is always 0 11 10 3 STATus QUEStionable DI
358. nal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 236 INPut GAIN VALue on page 236 Output Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt Output The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual IF Video Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 IF VIDEO DEMOD be E 155 IE Out ee 155 NoiSe ee 155 IGG GCG e E 155 EE 156 L EE 156 aio 15 o RERO TT UEM 156 BEC OE LP 156 IF VIDEO DEMOD Output This function is not available for the R amp S FSW GSM application IF Out Frequency This function is not available for the R amp S FSW GSM application Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 232 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT
359. nctlIOns ern rni tono rta tn enaa p RARE REX EEN AE deeg NR RARE PAREN ARRENRRRRRRRACR 178 How to Export and Import UO Data een 179 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 182 How to Perform a Basic Measurement on GSM Signals 182 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for GSM Signals 183 How to Analyze the Power in GSM Signals eee 185 How to Analyze the Spectrum of GSM Signals eene 186 How to Measure Wideband Noise in Multicarrier Setups 188 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 190 Improving Performanx e nire etin Aasaa nebat i nne me NAANA 190 Improving EVM ACCuUraCy tenente nube nee ANNAAS SENSSA FESS RAEAN ENE 190 Optimizing Limit Checks eere nnn nennen unus inu nnnnnea 191 Error Messages nre eremi lisent sent E paar REPE n nas RE Riv d d ae REI naa 192 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements 193 Introduction oen Ee eegen 193 Common Suffixes 1 ete oe coached Sec aaa cate ccc ce cd nue tag Dee eed ele dese su leeeetes tua exeneges 198 Activating GSM Measurements eese eene nnnnnnrnn nennen 198 Selecting the Measurement eese enne nnne nnn nnne nennt 203 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements
360. nd CONFigure MS AUTO TRIGger ONCE for new remote control programs Parameters PASSED Fixed value irrelevant Dummy Fixed value 0 irrelevant Return values ReferenceLevel The detected reference level Default unit variable lt TriggerOffset gt The detected time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep lt TriggerLevel gt The detected trigger level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm Example READ AUTO LEVT PASSED 9 2404 0 00000007695 1 4 0 Usage Query only Programming Examples READ SPECtrum WMODulation GATing This command reads out the gating settings for gated Wide Modulation Spectrum measurements It is identical to READ SPECtrum WMODulation GATing and is maintained for compatibility reasons only Example READ SPEC WMOD GAT Usage Query only Mode GSM 11 13 Programming Examples The following examples demonstrate how to configure and perform GSM measure ments in a remote environment e Programming Example Determining the EVM tette 365 e Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Gional neern 369 e Programming Example Measuring the Power for Access Bursts 372 e Programming Example Measuring Giatlsttcs eeen eere eerren neern eee 374 e Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers 375 11 13 14 Programming Example Determining the EVM This example demonstrates
361. nd a single gap two subblocks The position of the individual carriers is defined as absolute frequency values In addition the posi tion of the gap between the GSM subblocks is defined explicitely by the number of the carrier after which it begins The burst type and modulation can be defined individually for each carrier to reflect different GSM configurations Limit checks for non contiguous carrier allocation In order to perform useful limit checks for such non contiguous carrier allocation the limit lines are automatically adapted to the gap so that other signals do not distort the GSM limit check 5 15 3 Manual Reference Power Definition for MCWN Measurements For MCWN measurements reference powers are required to calculate relative results in the final measurement These power levels can either be determined by a reference measurement or they can be defined manually by the user In the latter case a power level is defined as well as three reference power levels for an RBW of 30 kHz 100 kHz and 300 kHz The reference powers depend on the modulation characterists Some typical values for various modulation types are provided in table 5 8 The table indicates the reference powers for the three RBWs relative to a defined power level Since all reference pow ers are measured with a smaller bandwidth than the power level all values are nega tive To define reference powers manually define a power level and then subtract the
362. nd down The up ramp is referred to as the rising edge the down ramp as the falling edge A burst may occur within one or more slots which is a measure of time in the captured signal Thus a burst may coincide with a slot but it must not necessarily do so o In previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzers the term burst was Usually only slots in which a burst is expected are of interest Such slots are defined as active slots in the signal description Within this slot scope defined by First Slot to measure and Number of Slots to mea sure a single slot Slot to Measure is selected for a more detailed analysis e g Modulation Accuracy measurement see Modulation Accuracy on page 21 The Slot to Measure is required for the following reasons To provide the reference power and time reference for the Power vs Time mea surement see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Typically the masks for all slots are time aligned according to the timing of the Slot to Measure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 133 e Al Modulation Spectrum results are based on the Slot to Measure see Modula tion Spectrum Graph on page 23 The results of all Transient Spectrum dia grams are based on the slot scope i e on the interval defined by the First Slot to measure and the Number of Slots to measure see Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 e Allresults that require demodulation of one slot and statistical analysis e g
363. ndicate limit check failed The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute frequencies of the wideband noise measurement segments If noise measurement is disabled this table is empty Furthermore the table may be empty in the following cases User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 44 R amp S9FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays The span is too small Wideband noise measurement cannot start closer than 1 8 MHz from the outermost carriers and ends 10 MHz outside the edge of the rel evant transmit band This measurement range may be restricted further by the defined measurement span see chapter 6 4 4 2 Frequency Settings on page 148 For a measurement according to standard set the span to the TX band automatically see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 150 e Intermodulation measurement overrides wideband noise measurement Around every calculated intermodulation product frequency inside or outside the gap the R amp S FSW GSM application places an intermodulation measurement range of a certain bandwidth regardless whether intermodulation measurement is enabled or not Due to their more relaxed limits the IM measurement wins over the wideband noise measurement Thus many overlapping IM ranges can narrow down the wideband noise measurement segment until it is eliminated You can check this by activating only intermodulation IM order 3 and 5 OR only wideband measure ment and determining where
364. ne average trace with 10001 trace points Note that the final trace consists of combined traces from a sweep with an RBW of 100 kHz and a sweep with an RBW of 300 kHz see also chapter 5 15 6 Wideband Noise Measurement on page 80 For narrowband noise measurement no trace results are available Numerical results can be retrieved using the FETCh WSPectrum NARRow INNer ALL and FETCh WSPectrum NARRow OUTer ALL commands 11 8 3 Magnitude Capture Results The following commands are required to query the results of the Magnitude Capture evaluation a RE lee Een E E 303 FETCRMGAPtUre SLOTS SCOPE iiec Nee 304 FETCh MCAPture SLOTs MEASure This command queries the positions of the slots to measure in the current capture buf fer indicated by blue bars in the result display Retrieving Results Return values lt Result gt The result is a comma separated list of positions for each slot with the following syntax xPos 0 xLen 0 xPos 1 xLen 1 where xPos i is the x value in seconds of the i th slot to measure xLen i is the length of the i th slot to measure in seconds The number of values is 2 the number of GSM frames in the current capture buffer If the number of frames defined by the statistic count all fit into the capture buffer at once the number of values is 2 statistic count If not the number of values is 2 the number of frames in the last capture Example FETCh MCAPture SLOTs MEA
365. nector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 245 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 245 Sweep Settings The Sweep settings define how often data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application Reference Average Count enne nnne nnn ten nnns innen 162 ee Ee e E 162 Continuous Sweep RUN Ree CR RE 162 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE eterne terne tienne Re ERROR ARES 163 Continue SINGS SW E 163 Reference Average Count Defines the number of reference measurements to be performed in order to determine the average reference values Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence AVERage COUNt on page 270 Noise Average Count Defines the number of noise measurements to be performed in order to determine the average result values Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 252 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CO
366. nen rennen 214 CONFigure MS CHANnel SEOT sN mber T Y PE creto oot etre tbe ree npe nete rnt ebore hes 216 COhNFourel M ltCHANnel SL OT cNumberzfSTATel nennen nnne 211 CONFigure iIMS CHANNEL SLOT s SGP EE 212 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt T 213 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT s SUBChannel ch TSC USER seen 213 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC CONFigureE MS CEIAANneESEOTSs TSC USER coerente rre tn RET eerte enr erret tene CONEigure MS DEMOd DEGISIOR etr t rrr tr er nne rrr ee n t eter ener etn EE e e UE RENERT OK HA RTE EE ee e HDI e g co RP CONFigure MS MCARrerAC TOAETIGTS rco rta nona na ner in rn tn rae GONFigureEMSIMCARrieEBTSCIasS un rene hr erre rr tenth nean XE E ERE RR RR RED Ehe CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt FREQuency me CONFigureE MS I MCARrier CARRier e MT VY Pe wiiccestccsesnscsccsteressntesccotnvesteodeeestteusadnestcesscneseassbesatneattcettenes CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c STATe essere nennen nennen nennen 217 CGONFig ureE MSTEMCARTrIer FAL ee EE 219 CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACartier seen 219 CONFigure MS MCARNer FIL Tei eminas odaia e Nara EaR aa FETE fece ny renes B Blogues GONFigureEMSEMGARtier 9 TATe ecc etae tuner err rrr nr ern tree a ton EE e e UI EMS MTY PE is ic
367. nformation is transmitted discretely in the time domain mainly used to distinguish User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 46 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution between different users as well as in the frequency domain mainly used to distinguish between BTS Slots and frames The time domain is divided into s ots with a duration of 576 923 us exactly 3 5200 s 8 slots numbered 0 to 7 are combined into 1 frame with a duration of approximately 4 6154 ms exactly 3 650 s Multiframes and superframes Frames can be grouped into a multiframe consisting of either 26 for support traffic and associated control channels or 51 for all other purposes frames Multiframes can be grouped to superframes consisting of either 51 26 frame or 26 51 frame multiframes Multiframes and superframes are not of relevance for the physical measurements on the GSM system and thus not discussed in detail here A mobile phone therefore does not communicate continuously with the base station instead it communicates discretely in individual slots assigned by the base station dur ing connection and call establishment In the simplest case 8 mobiles share the 8 slots of a frame TDMA Frequency bands and channels The frequency range assigned to GSM is divided into frequency bands and each band in turn is subdivided into channels Each frequency channel is identified by its center frequency and a number known as the ARF
368. ng GSM UO Measurements CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC USER lt Value gt This command sets the bits of the user definable TSC The number of bits must be 26 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC USER must be set first This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure lt ch gt lt 1 2 gt Subchannel number Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt string String containing the 26 user defined bits Example Subchannel 1 User TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell1 TSC USER CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT0 SUBChannell TSC Il gt USER Manual operation See User TSC User Sync on page 99 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt SUBChannel lt ch gt TSC lt Value gt This command selects the training sequence of the specified slot and subchannel used by the mobile or base station This command is only available for AQPSK modulation Suffix lt s gt lt 0 7 gt Number of slot to configure lt ch gt lt 1 2 gt Subchannel number Query parameters lt ResultType gt TSC SET Queries the currently used TSC number or the set Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt 06 1102 1 1
369. ng sweeps ABORT m 248 INI Tiate sm E 249 INiTIatespnes CONTINUOUS acte read d enu er ee eu e enar anta t Ced ee bete 249 IEN RTE ATI 250 INlTlate nzfiMMedatel nennen nennen enne nnn nnn nr nsns trt rn iren nnne 250 IEN ie EE 251 INiTiate lt n gt SEQuencer MMediate eene a nsns nnns aser sias 251 INITiate n SEQuencer MODE iran riri tere a ara a aa da Ran aa aa SEN 251 BENSE BURSECOUN mm 252 SENSe SWEep COUNL ecce teentteeneteetetet tet ttes t test cs 252 SENSe SWEep COUNECUFRRent 2 2 2 etra cocer escort rr eroe coetu eder pner paa duod 253 SENSe SWEep COUNt TRGS CURRent essen renean enne nennen nnns 253 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAT command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control progr
370. ngs see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 98 Slot is not in defined slot scope Include the slot in the slots to measure see chap ter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 127 Sync not found Possible causes Possible solutions Training sequence TSC or sync is not defined cor rectly Check the TSC sync definition in Slot settings see Training Sequence TSC Sync on page 98 No or incorrect position of access burst in slot defined The trigger event does not correspond to the start of the active part in slot 0 Define the correct Timing Advance for the slots containing an access burst see Timing Advance Access Burst only on page 98 Correct the trigger offset for an external trigger see Trigger Offset on page 120 The DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the sig nal Swap the and Q values after data acquisition in the R amp S FSW GSM application to reverse this effect see Swap Q on page 124 11 d 11 1 Introduction Remote Commands to Perform GSM Mea surements The following commands are required to perform measurements in the GSM applica tion in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote operation in a network as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see t
371. nit dBm dB lt AbsRelMode gt ABS REL Determines whether absolute or relative power values are returned lt LimCheck gt Result of the limit check at this offset frequency PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit Example FETC WSP NARR OUT Usage Query only Manual operation See Outer Narrowband Table on page 40 FETCh WSPectrum REFerence POWer ALL This command returns the measured power levels and reference powers of all active carriers Return values lt CarrNo gt integer Active carrier number Range 1 16 Retrieving Results lt RefType gt Indicates whether carrier is used for reference REF carrier selected for reference power MAX carrier has the highest power level is used for reference power NONE normal carrier not used for reference RST RST value lt AbsCarrFreq gt numeric value Absolute frequency at which power was measured Default unit Hz lt AbsPow gt numeric value Measured power level absolute Default unit dBm lt AbsRef300 gt numeric value Reference power level absolute in a 300 kHz RBW Default unit dBm AbsRef100 numeric value Reference power level absolute in a 100 kHz RBW Default unit dBm AbsRef30 numeric value Reference power level absolute in a 30 kHz RBW Default unit dBm Example FETC WSP REF POW Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on pag
372. nition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd UO Data File Format iq tar Element Samples Description Contains the number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitud
373. nnan paad apia apaia aaa 260 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer Type The PvT Filter controls the filter used to reduce the measurement bandwidth for Power vs Time measurements The PvT filter is optimized to get smooth edges after filtering burst signals and to sup press adjacent active channels Depending on the device type single carrier or multicarrier see CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 204 different PvT filters are supported Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Type gt G1000 Default for single carrier device Gaussian Filter 1000 kHz B600 single carrier only Gaussian Filter 600 kHz G500 single carrier only Gaussian Filter 500 kHz MC400 Recommended for measurements with multi channels of equal power MC300 Recommended for measurement scenarios where a total of six channels is active and the channel to be measured has a reduced power e g 30 dB compared to its adjacent channels RST G1000 single carrier MC400 multicarrier Example CONF BURS PTEM FILT G500 Manual operation See Power vs Time Filter on page 133 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALign Mode This command controls the time alignment of the limit lines for the Power vs Time measurement see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Parameters for setting and query Mode ST
374. nnel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 250 Continue Single Sweep While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 249 Refresh MSRA MSRT only This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA MSRT applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition 6 3 6 6 3 6 1 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Rem
375. nts sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 202 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt SINGle Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Manual operation See Sequencer Mode on page 86 SENSe BURSt COUNt lt Count gt SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt These commands defin
376. o configure the noise measurement Useful commands for configuring noise measurements described elsewhere SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 252 Remote commands exclusive to configuring noise measurements CONFIgure SPECtr mdMPOFGr EE 272 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit EXCeption STAT cccceeeeeeeeeeceseceseneeaaeaeaeaeaeaeeenenenens 273 elei L Deen 273 GONFigure SPEGCIrumNWID unorder ENEE ato apo ta LE Een ne na Een k ee ara E iaaii FAA 274 CONFigure SPECtrum IMPorder Order This command defines for which order of intermodulation products the noise measure ment determines the level Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Parameters lt Order gt 0 3 3 5 0 No intermodulation products are measured 3 IM products order of 3 are measured 3 5 IM products order of 3 and 5 are measured RST 3 5 Example CONF SPEC IMP 3 Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Manual operation See Intermodulation on page 167 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit EXCeption STATe lt State gt If enabled exceptions from the limit line check as defined in the 3GPP standard are applied to the limit checks of the MCWN measurements Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF SPEC LIM EXC OFF Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Manual
377. o connect the cable for high accuracy timing to trigger ports 1 and 2 If you cancel this prompt the setting remains disabled As soon as you confirm this prompt the cable must be in place the firmware does not check the connection In remote operation the setting is activated without a prompt For more information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe on page 228 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input I or Q only the center frequency is always 0 Hz Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 233 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config Ken M 0 00 d m Freq 13 25 GHz Channel 32 Code Power Relative Subtype 0 1 Inpu Att 10dB Slot Oof3 ChannelType PILOT MM T Input Source Probes Probe I Probe Q Name RT ZD10 Serial Number 201241 Part Number 1410 4715 02 Not C cted Type Differential EE Common Mode Offset 0 0 v Common Settings Fo
378. o define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency 5 Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 7 Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count 8 Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Spectrum measurements e Formulticarrier base stations define which carriers are measured the left most carrier only Enable Left Limit ON the right most carrier only Enable Right Limit ON all carriers Enable Left Limit ON Enable Right Limit ON e Select the type of resolution filter to be used For measurements strictly according to standard use the Normal 3dB filter e Select the frequency list to be used to determine the modulation spectrum For a quick overview select a sparse list for a conformance test use the list specified by the standard As a rule use the narro
379. od The following sections define the symbol period for various modulation types 5 9 1 GMSK Modulation Normal Symbol Rate The GMSK frequency pulse is defined in the standard document 3GPP TS 45 004 as a Gaussian pulse convolved with a rectangular pulse as illustrated at the top of fig ure 5 12 The phase of a GMSK signal due to a sequence of symbols a is defined in the standard as t iT e t 3 o g u du Phase of a GMSK signal due to a sequence of symbols 5 1 where e g t the frequency pulse eT the normal symbol period The modulating index is chosen such that the maximum phase change of 11 2 radians per data interval is achieved Note that the standard 3GPP TS 45 004 specifies in chapter 2 5 Output phase for Normal Burst GMSK The time reference t 0 is the start of the active part of the burst as shown in figure 1 This is also the start of the bit period of bit number 0 the first tail bit as defined in 3GPP TS 45 002 The phase change due to the first tail symbol is illustrated at the bottom of figure 5 12 where you can see that the decision instant corresponding to the center of the fre quency pulse occurs at the beginning of the first symbol period i e at t 0 5 9 2 Definition of the Symbol Period GMSK Frequency Pulse Frequency oo o ho to Az e n 25 2 15 1 0 5 0 0 5 1 15 2 2 5 Time Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Phase Decision Instant Phase rad g
380. offsets from the center frequency at which power is measured Power Negative Power at the frequency offset to the left of the center frequency Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Power Positive Power at the frequency offset to the right of the center frequency Offsets Levels are provided as dB relative power level dBm absolute power level A to Limit power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate the power exceeds at least one of the limits Table 4 5 Frequencies and filter bandwidths in modulation spectrum measurements Offset Frequency kHz RBW kHz VBW kHz 100 30 30 200 30 30 250 30 30 400 30 30 600 30 30 800 30 30 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 25 GSM UO Measurement Results Offset Frequency kHz RBW kHz VBW kHz 1000 30 30 1200 30 30 1400 30 30 1600 30 30 1800 30 single carrier BTS 30 single carrier BTS 100 multi carrier BTS 100 multi carrier BTS Note Normal vs Wide Modulation Spectrum measurements In previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzers both a normal and a wide modulation spectrum were available for GSM measurements In the R amp S FSW GSM application onl
381. olution Modulation modes Different modulation modes are used in the GSM mobile radio network The original GSM modulation is GMSK with the normal symbol rate NSR of approximately 270 833 ksymb s exactly 1625 6 ksymb s This corresponds to a bit rate of 270 833 kbit s The details are specified in chapter 2 of 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The 8PSK Phase Shift Keying modulation which is used within EDGE was intro duced to increase the data rate on the physical link It uses the same symbol rate the normal symbol rate as GMSK 270 833 ksymb s but has a bit rate of 3 x 270 833 kbit s exactly 812 5 kbit s In this method three bits represent a symbol The details are specified in chapter 3 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The 16QAM and 32QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation modulation which are used in EDGE Evolution were introduced to further increase the data rate on the phys ical link They use the normal symbol rate 270 833 ksymb s but have bit rates of 4 x 270 833 kbit s or 5 x 270 833 kbit s respectively The details are specified in chapter 4 3GPP TS 45 004 see table 5 1 The QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM modulation with a higher symbol rate which are used in EDGE Evolution were introduced to further increase the data rate on the physical link They use a higher symbol rate 325 ksymb s but have bit rates of 2 x 325 kbit s 4 x 325 kbit s or 5 x 325 kbit s respectively The details are specified in chapter 5
382. om base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count R amp S9FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application 8 Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Spectrum Trigger to Sync and Power vs Time measurements In particular define the frequency list to be used to determine the modulation spec trum and filters to be used for multicarrier measurements 10 Select the Display Config button and select up to 16 displays that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 12 Select the Result Config butto
383. on information device footprint the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display if available This data is stored to the C R_S Instr user directory on the instrument As a result of this command the created file name including the drive and path is returned You can use the resulting file name information as a parameter for the MMEM COPY command to store the file on the controller PC If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send this file to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster 11 12 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Return values lt FileName gt C R_S Instr user lt R amp S Device ID gt _ lt CurrentDate gt _ lt Current Time gt String containing the drive path and file name of the created support file where the file name consists of the following ele ments lt R amp S Device ID The unique R amp S device ID indicated in the Versions Options information lt CurrentDate gt The date on which the file is created lt YYYYMMDD gt lt CurrentTime gt The time at which the file is created lt HHMMSS gt Example DIAG SERV SINF Result c R amp S instr user FSW 26 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20130116 165858 zip MMEM COPY c R amp S instr user FSW 26_ 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20130116 165858 zip S NXDebugNESW 26 1312 8000K26 100005 xx 20130116 165858 zip Usage Query only Deprecated Command
384. on page 234 Amplitude Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Amplitude Amplitude settings affect the y axis values Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Power Class Preamplifier OTT Input Coupling AC Sg Offset T Impedance 500 Off Power CIOS Siennine E 113 Referenc Level nar orenen a a a aeaa aaa 113 L Shifting the Display Offset ssiri tpiorad 113 Oe e IECH e BEE 113 L Attenuation Mode Vale caccccsesccscscvusesessesevessedsesasiondedsenseseecusenverectensndacdevees 113 Using Electronic ET DE 114 IN git ET 114 L al 114 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Power Class The following power classes are supported For MCWN measurements no power class is used NONE 1 8 BTS 1 5 MS GMSK E1 E2 E3 MS all except GMSK M1 M2 M3 Micro BTS P1 Pico BTS The default power class is 2 Remote command CONFigure MS POWer CLASs on page 207 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measuremen
385. onfigured in multiple channels you must switch from one tab to another However you can enable a Sequencer function that automatically calls up each activa ted measurement channel in turn This means the measurements configured in the channels are performed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 8 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the corresponding tab as well as the Multi View as the measurements are performed Sequencer operation is independent of the currently displayed tab for example you can analyze the SEM measurement while the modulation accuracy measurement is being performed by the Sequencer For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual The Sequencer functions are only available in the MultiView tab Sequencer Slate eser pE pee be tekst eee erani roe RE EAR E RET NER ari 86 Se ueneer let EE 86 Sequencer State Activates or deactivates the Sequencer If activated sequential operation according to the selected Sequencer mode is started immediately Remote command SYSTem SEQuencer on page 202 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 251 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt on page 251 Sequencer Mode Defines how often which measurements are performed The currently selected mode softkey is highlighted blue During an active Sequencer process the selected mode
386. only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Introduction If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the
387. op out time BI Duplicating Measurement channel remote 199 KEN WEE Configuration E ER LEE 379 EDGE Evolution 2 3 esta cotra caasa cc ees 46 49 EGPRS de pM 46 379 Electronic input attenuation 113 114 153 Enable Left Limit Right Limit Equal Timeslot Length Errors SI Device connections o bct HQ Magnitude result display sess 20 Modulation result display Solutions ee 192 Status DAP eege eenegen dee 192 Status DIS ceci scit terea 347 348 Evaluation methods MEWN eR 35 lane 276 Trace data t Eo tte esce ge 301 EVM Evaluation method 222 19 Multiple carriers Results remote ue UE EE EE eer E Troubleshooting Cl Exporting VQ Gate ine acne UO data remote ife EUN External tigger scs aieo ER peret Ru ren me kd Level remiote ceret ee Files Format VQ data tre rtc etes 380 UO data binary XML Go VQ parameter XML edd teg 381 Filters le EE 135 Dependency eoe tret rares 59 High pass remote aes 221 High pass RF input eere 103 148 Measurement ssssssiniineseesiinnseneee 56 58 98 210 Measurement magnitude response 59 Modulation Spectrum sees 135 Multicarrier OVEIVIEW
388. operation See Adapting the limit lines for wideband noise Apply Excep tions on page 167 CONFigure SPECtrum NNARrow lt State gt If enabled narrowband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Nar rowband noise is measured with an RBW of 30 kHz at 3 single offset frequencies below the lowermost active carrier of the lower sub block and above the uppermost active carrier of the upper sub block Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CONF SPEC NNAR OFF Manual operation See Narrowband Noise 1 8 MHz on page 167 Analyzing GSM Measurements CONFigure SPECtrum NWIDe lt State gt If enabled wideband noise is measured as part of the MCWN measurement Wide band noise is measured with an RBW of 100 kHz over the defined span typically the RF bandwidth Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CONF SPEC NWID OFF Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Manual operation See Wideband Noise 21 8 MHz on page 167 11 6 6 Adjusting Settings Automatically The commands required to adjust settings automatically are described in chapter 6 4 9 Adjusting Settings Automatically on page 167 11 6 7 Performing Sweeps The commands required to perform sweeps are described in chapter 11 5 5 2 Configuring and Performing Sweeps on page 248 11 7 Analyzing GSM Measurements General analysis sett
389. or instance if the Statistic Count is set to values smaller than 5 the measured refer ence power for Modulation Spectrum Table see Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 and Transient Spectrum Table see Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 measurements increases This leads to a higher variance of the measured relative powers at the offset frequencies and thus to a reduced measurement dynamic For the Power vs Time see PvT Full Burst on page 28 and Power vs Slot see Power vs Slot on page 27 measurements a small Statistic Count increases the variance of the measured slot powers The slot power is required to calculate the PVT limit lines 5 15 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise For multicarrier measurements the GSM standard defines limits for some parameters concerning noise and intermodulation products Thus a new separate measurement is User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 71 5 15 1 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise provided by the R amp S FSW GSM application the Multicarrier Wideband Noise Mea surement MCWN This measurement comprises e Q based measurements on the carriers to determine their power levels and refer ence powers e Frequency sweeps with RBWs of 100 kHz to measure wideband noise and 300 kHz to measure intermodulation products e Gated zero span measurements with an RBW of 30 kHz to measure narrowband noise e MCOWN Measurement PEIOCOSS d nct cecinere e nd ten ar ede es tib d 72 e Contig
390. ors and the preamplifier are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is not available in MSRA mode Remote command CONFigure MS AUTO LEVel ONCE on page 266 Result Configuration 7 Analysis Access Overview gt Result Config or MEAS COMFIG gt Result Config General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be configured ET le TE DEE 169 e Zoom Functions 7 1 Result Configuration Access Overview gt Result Config or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config Some evaluation methods require or allow for additional settings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window see Specifics for on page 90 MENDES 169 MAKES oa SN TREE 171 e Y Axis Scaling 7 1 1 Traces Access Overview Result Config Traces or TRACE The number of available traces depends on the selected window see Specifics for on page 90 Only graphical evaluations have trace settings The following traces are activated directly after a GSM measurement channel has been opened or after a Preset Channel Table 7 1 Default traces depending on result display Result display Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Magnitude Capture Clear Write
391. ot to measure PerSlot Power vs Time Filter The PvT filter controls the filter used to reduced the measurement bandwidth in Power vs Time measurements Note The PvT filter is optimized to get smooth edges after filtering burst signals and to suppress adjacent active channels Depending on the Device Type single carrier or multicarrier different PvT filters are supported 1 MHz Gauss default for single carrier device 600 kHz single carrier only for backwards compatibility to FS K5 500 kHz Gauss single carrier only for backwards compatibility to FS K5 400 kHz multicarrier default for multicarrier device Recommended for measurements with multi channels of equal power 300 kHz multicarrier Recommended for multicarrier measurement scenarios where a total of six channels is active and the channel to be measured has a reduced power e g 30 dB compared to its adjacent channels Remote command CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate FILTer on page 259 Limit Line Time Alignment Controls how the limit lines are aligned in a Power vs Time measurement graph see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Limit lines are defined for each slot The limit lines are time aligned in each slot based on the position of the TSC the center of the TSC is the reference point This parameter affects how the center of the TSC is determined for each slot Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Slot to measure default For ea
392. ote command INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 293 Demodulation Access Overview gt Demodulation Demodulation settings determine how frames and slots are detected in the input signal and which slots are to be evaluated The Frame and Slot settings are identical to those in the Signal Description dialog box see chapter 6 3 2 2 Frame on page 92 and chapter 6 3 2 3 Slot Settings on page 95 E Te 127 e Demodulation Gettnges ennt enne nnns 130 Slot Scope Access Overview gt Demodulation gt Slot Scope The slot scope defines which slots are to be evaluated see also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 R amp S FSW K10 Configuration Demodulation Settings Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Single Slot Measurements Slot to Measure No Slots to Measure E Time nt Spectrum First Slot to Measure f Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure Slot to MGASUMO EE 128 Number of Slots tomeasure nennen emen nnne n ener nn sensns nnn 129 First SIob e BI E E 129 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Contfgoure renn 129 Slot to Measure This parameter specifies the slot to be measured in single slot measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary The following rule applies 0 s Slot to Measure s 7 The Slot to Measure is used as the only slot to measure in the following measure ments see First Slot to measure on page 129 Modulation Accur
393. p COUNt 10 Define a capture time for 10 statistic count 2 headroom GSM frames Capture Time 1042 frames 4 615 ms frame 0 0554 s Thus all 10 statistic count frames can be analyzed with a single capture SENSe SWEep TIME 0 0554 s Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished INITiate IMMediate WAI Query the maximum EVM value for slot 0 slot to measure in current GSM frame FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK CURR Programming Examples 0 62063819169998169 Query the maximum EVM value for slot 0 slot to measure in all 10 statistic count GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM PEAK MAX gt 0 76938760280609131 Query the averaged EVM RMS value for slot 1 slot to measure in all 10 statistic count GSM frames FETCh BURSt MACCuracy EVM RMS AVERage 0 19639170169830322 11 13 3 Programming Example Measuring the Power for Access Bursts This example demonstrates how to configure a GSM power measurement of a GMSK modulated signal with access bursts in a remote environment 9595992 9 Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt ees e Frequency and Level Set center frequency to 935 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer 935 MHZ Set Ref Level to 10 dBm DISPl
394. p start after carrier Non contiguous carriers only on page 101 Input Output Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals The following commands are required to configure data input and output dL URP ected evel eege esta 220 e Configuring Digital UO Input and Output 223 e Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface 227 s Seting US ele 229 e Configuring Ihe OUIDUIS once ege vetare eere Cer ced eda en usd 232 11 5 2 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements RF Input INbPutATTenuaton PbOTechonHtEzet esee snas nins ne nnn saa 220 INPURCONNGGION ES 220 NPU COUPA enn 220 INPUT DRAT DEE 221 Eer Te TSC HPASS ESTATE scene te rere ae oo RR xe E adaa 221 INPULFIL Ter VIGES TAM EE 222 lu e EE 222 dl 222 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optiona
395. page 255 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Parameters for setting and query lt State gt 110 ON OFF ON TSC search on OFF TSC search off RST 1 Example CONF SSE ON CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIMIT lt Mode gt This command selects whether the list results power and limit values of the Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement are returned in a relative dB or absolute dBm unit This command is only available when the Wide Modulation Spectrum measure ment is selected see CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate on page 357 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT command for new remote control pro grams Parameters for setting and query Mode ABSolute RELative RST RELative Example Select Wide Modulation Spectrum measurement II gated zero span measurement CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate JI Absolute power and limit results in dBm CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation LIMit ABSolute Run one measurement and query absolute list results READ WSPectrum MODulation ALL I gt 0 929200000 929200000 104 41 65 00 ABS PASSED FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FERRor SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy FERRor CURRent READ B
396. parameters etc MCWNoise Sweep measurement to determine noise and intermodulation in multicarrier setups RST IQ Example CONF MEAS MCWN 11 5 11 5 1 11 5 1 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements The following commands are required to configure a default GSM UO Modulation Accuracy measurement on an R amp S FSW in a remote environment e Signal SSC EE 204 E ul TT Settings iaaii enai tena oct eet 219 AR ele ute re 232 Triggering Measurements iere atenei n ie ENEE NEE 238 ERR TE e BEE 245 LUE Ree Ee ET 253 Measure mont i cec d odo xn ter bee ae Reset c e eh eddie edet 259 e Adjusting Settings Automatically eeeeseeeeeennmeeeeeneee 265 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes frame detection and measurement e Device under Test Settings uiid ier Re HELL De RET ERRAT ASSEN 204 LEE COELO LLL 209 b oo EE 210 HEC OI TEE 217 Device under Test Settings The type of device to be tested provides additional information on the signal to be expected CONFigure MS DEVice tTYBE 2 n aita cct aana rave bc R a tenes 204 GONFigurepMSENBETWOIKET Y PEL E 205 CONFigure MS NETWork FREQuency BAND isses rerit nni ennt 206
397. plate IMMediate CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate SELect Value CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation IMMediate CONFigure SPECtrum SELect Mode CONFigure SPECtrum SWITching IMMediate CONFigure TRGS IMMediate CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate These commands select a specific result display They are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chap ter 11 7 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 275 Usage Setting only CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt CONStell State CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt DEModulation State CONFigure MS MULTi BURSt PTEMplate State CONFigure MS MULTi SPECtrum MODulation State Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility CONFigure MS MULTi SPECtrum SWITching lt State gt CONFigure MS MULTi STATe lt State gt These commands are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout com mands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 7 1 2 Working with Windows in the Display on page 275 Note To be backwards compatible to R amp S FSV K10 activating multi measurement mode using CONFigure MS MULTi STATe sets the Frequency List parameter to 1 8 MHz see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 136 Deacti vating this mode sets the frequency list to 1 8 MHz sparse CONFigure MS BSEarch State This command toggles between active burst search and inactive burst search Note
398. ple 2 21 215 C121 12 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB o Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k float32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands GSM SENSe ADJust F el le EE 267 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE 1 522 5222 hatte rtp SEENEN EAR 264 E Se e e ee CEN BEEN 233 SENSe JFREQ ency CEN Ter STEP iit eo Rest Mutat esa Duca addet ah eee 234 SENSe FREQUuency CENTer ER D I uta iiit Erbe cie eege 234 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet SENSe FREQUENCYISPAN DEE SENSE FREQUENCY S E SENSe FREQueNnCY STOP EE SENSE ee le RE 297 SENSe MSRA GAPTure EE 294 SENSe PROBesp ID PARTnutmb6etr niin retra thc er rh er herr Fn erro EPA ES EE 230 SENS amp PROBe sp ID SRNu urmiber eicit rtr titre rero te ea RR EE e Fede PARERE On 230 SENSe PROBesp SETup eMOFTS6L EE 229 SENSe PROBesp SETUp MODBE n at rere terri rir eni e i ERE ENSVET ia 230 SENSe PROBespsx SETUp NAMEY scsi teenth cci pte ese o il eateries 231 SENSe PROBesp SETUp STAT6 tao tto a cet Cu A HYS AR PEDE Ld 231 E SE ee ET TUH T
399. plication uuuuss 11 2 4 Starting the GSM Application eeeeeseessseseeesseeseeseeee enne En 11 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eeeeeeeeeeennnnennn 12 3 About the Measurement eee 16 4 Measurements and Result Displays eeeeeeee 17 4 31 GSM VQ Measurement Results eese eene nennen nennen nn 17 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements eene enn 34 5 Basics on GSM Measurements eee eere 46 5 1 Relevant Digital Standards esee nennen nennen nnn 46 5 2 Short introduction to GSM GMSK EDGE and EDGE Evolution 46 5 3 Short Introduction to VAMOS eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenne nennen nennen nnn 50 5 4 AQPSK Modulatlon rete eege 51 5 5 Triggersettings rennen EPIRI 52 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement eese nennen 53 5 7 Overview of filters in the R amp S FSW GSM application esses 56 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters ceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneen nennen nnne nnn 59 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period esee nennen nnn nnns 60 e Eu WE lee BE 63 5 14 WTimeslot Alignmerit eerte ener ee eire eee 65 5 12 Delta to Sync Va
400. power level limit to reference power at that worst result in this limit line segment Default unit dBm dB ABS REL Indicates whether absolute or relative power values are returned depending on CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation LIMIT on page 262 Result of the limit check in this limit line segment PASSED power within limits FAILED power exceeds limit FETC WSP WID INN Query only See Inner Wideband Table on page 42 Retrieving Results FETCh WSPectrum WIDeband OUTer ALL This command queries the resultsof the wideband noise measurement below the low est and above the highest carrier but not in the gap for non contiguous carrier alloca tion For each limit line segment the following values are returned Return values lt StartFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute start frequency of limit line segment Default unit Hz lt StopFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute stop frequency of limit line segment Default unit Hz lt WorstFreqRel gt numeric value Frequency offsets from the closest carrier to the worst mea sured wideband noise result in this limit line segment Default unit Hz lt WorstFreqAbs gt numeric value Absolute frequency of the worst measured wideband noise result regarding delta to limit in this limit line segment Default unit Hz lt RBW gt numeric value Resolution bandwidth used for measurement in this limit line segment Default unit Hz lt PowerAtWorst gt numer
401. provide an ideal version of the measured signal The Data bits can be random and are typically not known inside the demodulator of the R amp S FSW GSM application 11 5 7 11 5 7 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Value gt DETected STD DETected The detected tail and TSC bits are used to construct the ideal signal STD The standard tail and TSC bits as set using CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt s gt TSC are used to construct the ideal signal Using the standard bits can be advantageous to verify whether the device under test sends the correct tail and TSC bits Incor rect bits would lead to peaks in the EVM vs Time trace see EVM on page 18 at the positions of the incorrect bits RST DETected Example Replace detected Tail amp TSC bits by the standard bits CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits STD For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 Manual operation See Tail amp TSC Bits on page 132 Measurement Measurement settings define how power or spectrum measurements are performed MiEoo 4 dv E 259 SSDS cil E 261 S RIEDER SVOG cna EE 265 Power vs Time The Power vs Time filter is used to suppress out of band interference in the Power vs Time measurement see chapter 5 7 1 Power vs Time Filter on page 56 CONFUS BURStEPTEMplate FIL E 259 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate TALIO cranii nannina
402. put signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the measurement may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 242 Trigger Level Trigger Settings Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 241 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 241 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 241 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 242 Drop Out Time Trigger Settings Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 239 Trigger Offset Trigger Settings Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Note When using an external trigger the trigger offset is particularly important in order to detect the frame start correctly See chapter 5 5 Trigger settings on page 52 The R amp S FSW GSM application expects the trigger event to be the start of the active part in slot
403. r Positioning Functions ssssseessssseeee ener 174 7 1 2 1 Individual Marker Settings Access Overview Result Config Marker Markers or MKR gt Marker Config In GSM evaluations up to 4 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time Result Configuration Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Code Domain All Marker Off ea 1 Code Domain Power Marker nuca E 172 El TL 172 TEE 172 Marker Ke 173 Assigning the Marker to amp TIIee c cia ceret rtt xdi eek lieet x di ee ec rds 173 JU Markars QD eese dre tr pectet ertet ere en exa Ti pev ee cag ete eed het ud e EE ORT RR Ur Fed Ree 173 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 286 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 286 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis channel slot symbol depending on evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 343 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 344 Result Configuration Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta T
404. r R C Ri Frames Phase Error 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode additional tabs and elements are available An orange back ground behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA operat ing mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see chapter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 and the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Channel bar information In the GSM application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings for the default UC measurement MultiView GSM Ref Level 50 00 dBm Offset D Device Band BTS Norn Re 00 SOL Att 20dB Freq ARFCN 935 0 MHz Slot Scope ie Count 200 200 Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the GSM application for the default I Q mea surement Ref Level Reference level m el Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Reference level offset if available Freq ARFCN Center frequency for the GSM signal Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number if available SSS gt gt aa User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 13 R amp S FSW K10 Welcome to the GSM Application Device Band Device type and fr
405. r ResUulls ete age exe ER e RR Pt REEF eEEEE Sue 343 Graphical Results The results of the trace queries depend on the selected evaluation see chapter 11 8 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 301 Got s MEME RR 297 FORMaEDEXPort DSEPAaLralor ege ENEE SNE SEENEN ESA AE 297 BENSE JIO FFT LENG 297 TRACE DATA eet T 298 EE E 299 TRACE IQ DATA MEMO irura a apean a iona arainn haia 299 Retrieving Results FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For UO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal sepa
406. r Settings Traces Marker Table Marker Scaling Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Remote command DISPlay MTABle on page 287 7 1 2 3 Marker Positioning Functions Access MKR gt The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search Salect MAalfKBr rrr cr rne xen edere cuota Te roe ee EX Rep a ed YT CP RU 174 El EE 174 oesrchb MINIMUM E 175 Max PGaK EE 175 Select Marker Selects the subsequent marker marker 1 2 3 4 or delta marker to be edited or to be used for a marker function The currently selected marker number is highlighted Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 288 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 288 Result Configuration Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 288 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 288
407. r each possible probe connector Baseband Input I Baseband Input Q the detec ted type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each connected probe e Probe name Serial number e R amp S part number Type of probe Differential Single Ended For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals Common ee Ee CN 109 lee Dr EE 109 Common Mode Offset Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Remote command SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup CMOFfset on page 229 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe 6 3 3 2 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE on page 230 Frequency Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Frequency Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output Value 0 0 Hz Center e EE 111 Fregueney OSE C 112 Frequency Band Th
408. r left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 177 SSS gt NC MCN CNN ae Sea User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 295 11 8 11 8 1 Retrieving Results DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 177 See Restore Original Display on page 177 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 177 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results from the GSM measure ments e Graphical Results erit EES ees EERE AE aaa da 296 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACEens 301 e Magnitude Capture Results seemed detractis 303 Modulation Accuracy EE 305 e Modulation Spectrum Results 315 e FPowsrvsolot sulle cett tete tr be t edet hne ee naa e UE Ra n 318 Transient Spectrum Feste m er rrt A A eats ened aes 326 e Trigger to Sync Results eii cuieeeueeee cree tete ER ERR enne ERR nne ca nnana nananana 328 e Limit Check Resulls 1 1 ette dE 329 le AMC LEE 333 e Reineving Marke
409. r level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 121 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Parameters lt Source gt Example Manual operation IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RF Power First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process UO data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal See Trigger Source on page 118
410. r level measured with an RBW of 30 kHz for MCWN measurements If reference measurement is enabled see Enabling a reference power measurement Measure on page 164 this value is displayed for information only Remote command CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation REFerence RPOWer on page 271 Noise Measurement Settings The noise measurement can provide various results Noise measurement settings can be configured in the Noise Meas tab of the Mea surement Settings dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following Press the MEAS CONFIG key and then select the Noise Meas softkey e Inthe Overview select the Noise Meas button Reference Meas Noise Meas Multicarrier Wideband Noise Spectrum Average Count Narrowband Noise lt 1 8 MHz E i i Wideband Noise gt 1 8 MHz Rm op Intermodulation Order 3 and 5 Apply Exceptions On Noise Average Coupt c cc cc teeccteccectteasecetshesscceesenpedeccccnnessecsctepeeaneetagueeescenneenadiennneae 166 Narrowband Noise 1 9 E E 167 Wideband Noise 21 9 MHZ EE 167 Tore e DI EE 167 Adapting the limit lines for wideband noise Apply Exceptions 167 Noise Average Count Defines the number of noise measurements to be performed in order to determine the average result values Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 252 6 4 9 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Narrowband Noise lt 1 8 MHz
411. r output Suffix lt port gt Parameters lt Length gt Manual operation Data Acquisition Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Pulse length in seconds See Pulse Length on page 117 You must define how much and how often data is captured from the input signal 0 11 5 5 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master channel actually captures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the R amp S FSW GSM application in MSRA mode define the application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see chapter 5 17 GSM in MSRA Operating Mode on page 82 and the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual Data ACQUISINON 246 e Configuring and Performing Sweeps eese sentent 248 Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how long data is captured from the input signal by the R amp S FSW GSM application SS SR caede pacer rac o adr pa drea tds 246 SENSe SWEep TIME esee tetas te testes 04 246 ISENSe1SWESD TIME AUTO EE 247 pps le RN y D c m 247 TRACSHIQ TR RE 248 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded UO pairs should be swapped I gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is us
412. r signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value For the R amp S FSW85 the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 238 INPut EATT AUTO on page 238 INPut EATT on page 237 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For details see chapter 6 3 3 1 Input Source Settings on page 101 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power For R amp S FSW26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSWS or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input sig
413. rator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator SENSe IQ FFT LENGth Queries the number of frequency points determined by each FFT calculation The more points are used the higher the resolution in the spectrum becomes but the lon ger the calculation takes Retrieving Results Return values lt NoOfBins gt integer value Range 3 to 524288 RST 1024 Example IQ FFT LENG 2048 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA lt TraceNumber gt This command reads trace data out of the window specified by the suffix lt n gt This command is only available for graphical result displays The returned values are scaled in the current level unit The data format depends on FORMat DATA on page 297 For Constellation diagrams the result is a vector of UO values for the measured points in the diagram The result is returned as a list of 1 Q value pairs Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 Trace name to be read out TRACe1 Average trace transient spectrum Maximum trace TRACe2 Maximum trace TRACe3 Minimum trace TRACe4 Current trace Example TRAC1 DATA TRACel
414. re ete ren trn RENE rne i Reps 228 TINGE ViPS cc 228 CALibration AlQ HATiming S TATe 22 2 22 22 222 22 10 tenter EENS EEEEEEEERER ENEE 228 INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain UO signal via 2 single ended lines Parameters State ON Differential OFF Single ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input Configuration on page 108 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to 1NPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 228 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see INPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 227 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the form
415. rement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Average Default unit dBm Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 W Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single measurement mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent AVERage Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent CRESt READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent CRESt This command starts the measurement to read out the crest factor for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Further results of the meas
416. result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Introduction 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the sam
417. rrier measurement setup contains one subblock of regularly spaced carriers only contiguous or two subblocks of carriers with a gap inbetween non contiguous For details see chapter 5 15 2 Contiguous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation on page 73 Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation on page 219 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers only For non contiguous setups see Carrier Allocation the position of the gap must be defined as the number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier on page 219 Active carriers Defines which of the defined carriers are active for the current measurement Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c STATe on page 217 Frequency Defines the absolute frequency of each active carrier Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt FREQuency on page 217 Modulation Defines the burst type modulation and pulse shape filter of each active carrier For possible combinations see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 Note This setting determines the appropriate limits from the 3GPP standard Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt MTYPe on page 218 6 4 4 Input and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can evaluate signals from different input sources and provide var
418. rt i e the active part in slot 0 directly fol lows the trigger event An external trigger requires a correct setting of the trigger offset The search is faster compared to the free run and power trigger modes Use an external trigger to maximize the measurement speed or if the frame configura tion is ambiguous i e if the slot properties are cyclic with a cycle less than the frame duration Trigger source for MSRA Master Any trigger source other than Free Run defined for the MSRA Master is ignored when determining the frame start in the R amp S FSW GSM application For this purpose the trigger is considered to be in Free Run mode Refer to chapter 6 3 4 Trigger Settings on page 117 to learn more about appropri ate trigger settings and to chapter 6 3 2 Signal Description on page 90 for informa tion on the frame slot configuration Refer to Automatic Trigger Offset on page 139 to learn more about setting the trigger offset automatically 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement The R amp S FSW GSM application is slot based It can measure up to 8 consecutive GSM slots 1 frame and store the power results for all slots Power vs Time and Power vs Slot measurements see PvT Full Burst on page 28 and Power vs Slot on page 27 Defining the Scope of the Measurement used synonymously for slot In this documentation we use the term burst when the signal behaves like a pulse i e power is ramped up a
419. rum Table next to PvT 5 EVM vs Time measurement full width bottom LAYout REMove 3 LAYout REMove 4 LAYout ADD WINDow 1 RIGH MACC LAYout ADD WINDow 2 RIGH MST LAYout ADD WINDow 2 BEL ETIMe f25e8 eeeRes Signal Description Configure a base station DUT with normal power class 1 CONFigure MS DEV TYPE BTSNormal CONFigure MS NETWORK PGSM CONFigure MS NETWORK FREQ BAND 900 CONFigure MS POW CLAS 1 jesse Frame slot configuration CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAM EQU OFF Set slot 1 On Higher Symbol Rate burst 16QAM Wide Pulse TSC 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 STATe ON CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TYPE HB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 MTYPe QAM16 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 FILTer WIDE CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT1 TSC 0 Set slot 2 On Normal burst GMSK modulation TSC 3 Set 1 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 STATe ON CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TYPE NB CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 MTYPe GMSK CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC 3 1 Programming Examples Query TSC number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC TSC gt 3 Query Set number CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT2 TSC SET gt 1 Set slot 3 On Normal burst GMSK modulation User defined TSC CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT3 STATe ON HANnel SLOT3 TYPE NB ANnel SLOT3 MTYPe GMSK HANnel SLOT3 TSC USER HANnel SLOT3 TSC CONFigure MS CONFigure MS CONFigure MS CY Er OQ CX O I CONFigure MS gt USER
420. ry only CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDow lt n gt MlVal This command queries the individual analysis intervals in the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available for GSM measurement channels R amp S FSW K10 in MSRA mode and only for result dis plays that display traces with a history i e maxhold minhold or average traces The result is a comma separated list of lt IntStart gt lt IntStop gt values for each interval Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds global time scale Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds global time scale Example CALC MSRA WIND2 MIV Result 3 707922995E 003 4 509000108E 003 8 323308080E 003 49 124384262E 003 1 293869223E 002 1 373976935E 002 Usage Query only INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA MSRT mode not the MSRA MSRT Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZ
421. rz TE 216 CONFigure MS CHANneI SLOT Number FILTer Type This command specifies the pulse shape of the ideal modulator Suffix Number lt 0 7 gt the slot to configure Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt Type gt GMSK LINearised NARRow WIDE GMSK GMSK Pulse LiNearised Linearised GMSK Pulse NARRow Narrow Pulse WIDE Wide Pulse RST GMSK Example CONF CHAN SLOT FILT GMSK Manual operation See Filter on page 98 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt STATe State This command activates this slot this means that e g this slot is not considered as inactive in the PvT evaluation Suffix lt Number gt lt 0 7 gt Select the slot to configure Parameters for setting and query lt State gt ON OFF Example CONF CHAN SLOT ON Manual operation See Slot State On Off on page 97 For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chapter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Signal on page 369 CONFigure MS CHANnel SLOT lt Number gt MTYPe Modulation This command specifies the modulation type Suffix lt Number gt lt 0 7 gt the slot to configure Configuring
422. s Commands for Compatibil ity Note that the following commands are maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the specified alternative commands for new remote control programs CONFigure BURSEETIMe IMMediate eese 357 CONFloure BURGCMACCuracvt MMediatel essere 357 CONFigure BURSt MERRor IMMediate ecciesie 357 CONFioure BURGCbtERrort MMedatel nennen nennen nnns 357 CONFigure BURSt PTEMplate IMMediate eese 357 GONFig re BURSEPTEMbplate SEL amp ct 7 erret EEEE EN a ENTREES 357 CONFigure SPECtrum MODulation IM Mediate essere 357 CONFigure SPEGCIrumiSEEgeL a eiue errat tapa re rre rper pede et 357 CONFig re SPECTUM SWITehNg IMMedlatel nennen 357 CONFigure TRES IMMe d ate EE 357 CONFigure WSPectrum MODulation IMMediate sees 357 CONFigure MS MUL TEBURSEGONStOll crura cet rta e cote a 357 CONFloure MS MULTBURGCDE Modulatton entente 357 GONFigure MS MUETEBURSEPTEMplale reote nnt rte htt ne EES 357 CONFigure MS MULTi SPECtrum MODoulation e eise 357 CONFigure MSEMULETESPECtr m SWITChihg iardins ce deca ucc renis 358 GONFigureDMSIEMUITIES TA KEEN 358 CONFigure MS BSEaeli 1r tea dete tra sua ENEE to tb Eyed FRE EENEG 358 CONFiguarer MSIE ER EE 358 Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility CONFigure ER Teen e EE 359 GCONFigure MS MCARMEMBVS ass retire eege EEN 359 CO
423. s are installed this is the only available input source Input Source Radio Ss Frequency Input Coupling Impedance Direct Path High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz YIG Preselector Input Connector e le TEE 102 PEE eer MEET 103 Jr ee Ee 103 Direct d DEE 103 Fligli Pass ee WE EE 103 K ler 104 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 222 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 220 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 Q or 75 0 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 222 Direct Path Enables or disabl
424. s for all traces in the selected result display The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 176 Analyzing GSM Measurements DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 176 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per divi
425. s set if an overload of the Digital UO Output FIFO occurred This happens if the output data rate is higher than the maximal data rate of the connected instrument Reduce the sample rate to solve the problem 12 14 not used 15 This bit is always set to 0 SGTATusOUEGponable DiO CONDitton nennen nennen nne 350 STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle eene nennen nn rn nnne nnn sr nean nnn 350 e E euer ll e E NEE EE 351 STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition eee nnn 351 STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENIt esses nennen rentrer nnns 351 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Example STAT QUES DIQ COND Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next hig
426. s used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 103 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 104 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for UO Analyzer GSM VSA Pulse Amplifier Transient Analysis DOCSIS and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 104 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input In some applica tions only 50 O are supported 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction
427. scenario multiple carriers are positioned with a fixed spacing in one block This setup is referred to as contiguous carrier allocation Multicarrier and Wideband Noise Carrier frequencies are allocated in a grid with a spacing of 200 kHz The minimum carrier spacing is 600 kHz Multi standard radio MSR signals Modern base stations may process multiple signals for different communication stand ards for example two GSM subblocks with an LTE subblock inbetween In this case if you consider only the GSM carriers the carriers are spaced regularly within the GSM subblocks but there is a gap between the two subblocks Such a carrier setup is refer red to as non contiguous carrier allocation According to the 3GPP standard TS 51 021 a subblock is defined as one contiguous allocated block of spectrum for use by the same base station There may be multiple instances of subblocks within an RF bandwidth A gap is defined as A frequency gap between two consecutive sub blocks within an RF bandwidth where the RF requirements in the gap are based on co existence for un coordinated operation Level subblock subblock subblock with 3 with 4 with 3 Carriers carriers Carriers Fig 5 20 Non contiguous carrier allocation R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements Dee Non contiguous carrier allocation The R amp S FSW GSM application now allows you to measure such non contiguous car rier setups containing up to 16 carriers a
428. se measurements Carriers 6 MHz The span is set to the span of all active GSM carriers plus a margin of 6 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for all narrowband noise and most of the wide band noise and intermodulation measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN MODE on page 268 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is O Hz Note In MSRA MSRT mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Mas ter Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 234 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings affect the y axis values To configure the amplitude settings Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box gt To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and
429. se measurements See MCWN Mite eed iad 34 Multiple Measurement channels cccccccesseeeeeeeeeeteee 12 85 Multiple carriers BASICS E 73 Limit CD CK orare mte ite sts teretes certa 191 Multiple ZOOM t rrr 177 N Narrow pulse 14 ae comi Nels 46 62 131 lil gue EE 98 Narrowband measurement Dic M 42 Narrowband noise uet 72 73 Measuremerit 1 cic cette secte nach nnt edd 167 Noise Meeting ecu iet nr oh eege ege ee 188 Narrowband sssi EE 72 73 Source Wideband x iret rcm he tte cete 73 Noise measurement Average count MOWN sesessseseeerererereeese 162 166 mit pes MEWN eterne eetnreei tne MOWN remote Narrowband MCWN Settings MCWN 1 0 Wideband MCWN eene Non contiguous BASICS CS 73 Carrier configuration esssssssss 100 145 Lirit Check cium seen egen 75 Normal elle 49 65 SYVNGIMOMIZAU ON Em 131 Normal symbol period 60 61 QR cites 379 see also Normal symbol period 2 201 NSR Normal symbol rate 1 49 Number of Slots to measure Demod 254 O Offset Analysis interval 5 entente iti td 124 Frequency a 112 151 Reference level 113 153 Optimizing Me3aSUIemerits o pem ie e e s to
430. ses may occur The overlapping limit lines have the same level LL A LLB r IM C IM A B In this case the point in the middle of both IM frequencies is determined and each limit line is restricted to the area up to or starting from this point LL A LL B M IM C IM A B The limit lines have different values and overlap over the entire span LL A LL B lb ECH IM IM A B The less stringent limit line is applied Multicarrier and Wideband Noise LL A rLe IM IM A B The limit lines have different values and overlap over a partial span LL A LL B Ebo dope IM C D IM A B The less stringent limit line is applied in the overlapping area the distinct limit lines are reduced to the remaining area s LL A LL B e M C D IM A B 5 15 6 Wideband Noise Measurement If wideband noise measurement is activated the total frequency range of the measure ment defined by the selected span and the GSM band is divided in non overlapping frequency segments according to the following rules Basically the segments are those defined in the tables in section 6 5 1 and follow ing of the 3GPP TS 51 021 standard The frequency offsets defined there are applied relative to all outermost carriers i e below the lowest carrier and above the highest carrier For non contiguous mode the same principle is applied in the gap e The resulting segments can be limited further by the define
431. ses the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 195 Querying text parameters When yo
432. set cn eo SU o dance Y em pao ren nee ENARE 293 SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet sse neret nh nh nen en enne n enses nennen 294 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDows lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s Analyzing GSM Measurements lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Que
433. single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem Return values Result numeric value Phase error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERC PERR Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the peak value of the Phase Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Phase Error results see table 4 1 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 314 Retrieving Results Return values lt Result gt numeric value Phase error Default unit NONE Example READ BURS PERR PEAK SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage READ BURSt
434. sion Manual operation See Per Division on page 176 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly Parameters lt Position gt 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border RST 100 PCT frequency display 50 PCT time dis play Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed 11 7 3 Analyzing GSM Measurements Manual operation See Ref Position on page 176 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant For external generator calibration measurements requires the optional External Gen erator Control this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation See Ref Value on page 176 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value on the y axis for all traces in the specified window The suffix t is irrelevant Para
435. sion Multiplex Access GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying GPRS General Packet Radio Service GSM Global System for Mobile Communication HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switch Data IF Intermediate Frequency MS Mobile Station NSP Normal Symbol Period PCL Power Control Level PDF Probability Density Function PVT Power vs Time QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying Q Data File Format iq tar SCPIR Subchannel Power Imbalance Ratio SFH Slow Frequency Hopping TDMA Time Division Multiplex Access TSC Training Sequence Code UL Uplink BTS to MS VAMOS Voice services over Adaptive Multi user Channels on One Slot YIG Yttrium Iron Garnet A 2 VQ Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archi
436. stic Count number of measurements Std Dev Standard deviation of the individual Trigger to Sync values to the average value Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH TGST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results chapter 11 8 8 Trigger to Sync Results on page 328 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements The UO data captured by the default GSM I Q measurement includes magnitude and phase information which allows the R amp S FSW GSM application to demodulate signals and determine various characteristic signal parameters such as the modulation accu racy modulation or transient spectrum in just one measurement As the result of a swept measurement on the other hand the signal cannot be demodulated based on the power vs frequency trace data Frequency sweep mea surements can tune on a constant frequency Zero span measurement or sweep a frequency range Frequency sweep measurement For multicarrier measurements the GSM standard defines limits for some parameters concerning noise and intermodulation products Thus a new separate measurement is User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 34 4 2 1 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements provided by the R amp S FSW GSM application the Multicarrier Wideband Noise Mea surement MCWN This measurement comprises e Q based measurements on the carriers to determine their power levels and refer ence powers e Frequency sweeps with RBWs of 100 kHz to measure wideband noise an
437. sult It can be used to track the progress of the averaging process until it reaches the set Statistic Count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 252 For GSM measurements other than Trigger to Sync use the SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent command to query the number of frames or measurements that contribute to the current result Usage Query only Demodulation Demodulation settings determine how frames and slots are detected in the input signal and which slots are to be evaluated 0 The commands for frame and slot configuration are described in chapter 11 5 1 2 Frame on page 209 and chapter 11 5 1 3 Slot on page 210 Ee Pm 254 e e tele TE e EE 255 11 5 6 1 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Slot Scope The slot scope defines which slots are to be evaluated see also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEAGSure eese nnne nnne 254 CONFigure MS CHANBbeEMSELots NOFSIots 2 2 ccena 1o ione tacite cete ee ed a abe deu 254 CONFigure MS CHANnelMSLots OFFSet netten nennen nennen nnns 254 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots MEASure SlotToMeasure This command specifies the slot to be measured in single slot measurements relative to the GSM frame boundary Parameters for setting and query lt SlotToMeasure gt Slot to measure in single slot measurements RST 0 Slots Example CONF CHAN MSL
438. sured with an RBW of 300 kHz e Limits for narrowband measurements that have to be measured with an RBW of 30 kHz The limit is defined at 3 distinct measurement offsets each then connected by straight lines For each of these limit lines a limit check is performed and the results can be queried They are also indicated in the Spectrum Graph display see Spectrum Graph on page 36 Exceptions For measurements using an RBW of 100 kHz wideband noise certain intermodulation products the standard allows for the signal to exceed the specified limits in excep tional cases Thus you can define whether the limit check for MCWN measurements considers these exceptions or not If exceptions are considered the R amp S FSW GSM application divides the measurement range into 200 kHz bands If the limit line in one of these bands is exceeded a new higher limit line with an exceptional level is applied to the band Only if this excep tional limit line is also exceeded the limit check fails Maximum number of exceptions The number of bands for which exceptional limits may be applied is restricted by the standard 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 6 2 1 4 1 for single carrier 3GPP 51 021 chapter 6 12 3 for multicarrier BTS devices Thus the maximum number of bands that may use exceptional limits is indicated for each measurement as well as the number of User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 76 Multicarrier and Wideband Noise bands for which excep
439. symbol to noise ratios but not for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse The inverse fil ter colors the noise inside the signal bandwidth and therefore is not recommended for narrow band signals or signals with a low signal to noise ratio Peaks in the EVM vs Time measurement see EVM on page 18 may occur if the Linear symbol deci sion algorithm fails In that case use the Sequence method Linear is the fastest option SEQuence Symbol decision via sequence estimation This method uses an algorithm that minimizes the symbol errors of the entire burst It requires that the tail bits in the analyzed signal are correct It has a better performance lower symbol error rate compared to the Linear method especially at low signal to noise ratios but with a loss of measurement speed This method is recommended for normal bursts with 16QAM or 32QAM modulation and for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse RST AUTO Example Use sequence estimator for the symbol decision CONFigure MS DEMod DECision SEQuence For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 or chap ter 11 13 2 Programming Example Measuring an AQPSK Sig nal on page 369 Manual operation See Symbol Decision on page 131 CONFigure MS DEMod STDBits Value The demodulator of the R amp S FSW GSM application requires the bits of the burst Tail Data TSC Data Tail to
440. syncs with which each slot will be compared to synchronize the measured data with the expected data e For AQPSK modulated signals define a TSC for each subchannel and each active slot e For access bursts also define a Timing Advance i e the position of the burst within the slot e For signals from base stations capable of using multiple carriers define addi tional settings on the Multicarrier tab 4 Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s frequency band and center frequency 5 Select the Amplitude tab in the Input Frontend dialog box to define the correct power class for the base station or mobile device 6 Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted For external triggers do not forget to set the correct Trigger Offset to the beginning of the GSM frame 7 Optionally to perform statistical evaluation over several measurements switch to the Sweep tab in the Data Acquisition dialog box and define a Statistics Count 8 Select the Demodulation button to determine how bursts are detected and demodulated 9 Select the Measurement button and define the special measurement settings for the Power vs Time measurement e Define the PvT filter to be used for selection criteria see chapter 5 7 1 Power vs Time Filter on p
441. t no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 235 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level In some result displays the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 235 Mechanical Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input Attenuation Mode Value Mechanical Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that no overload occurs at the RF INPUT connector for the current reference level It is the default setting Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration
442. t 1 4 Trace 11 3 Activating GSM Measurements GSM measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW A measurement is started immediately with the default settings INS Timeo Te EE 199 EEN Titel E EE 199 INSTrument CREate REPLACE ccccceeccceeceeeecueeeeeeceueesueeeeueaueeeeeuaeeecuauaueeeeeaauueeseeuans 199 Activating GSM Measurements INS TramenbDELele atus ENEE dE 200 INSTrument LIS T2 nit E ptor n Ene ram Re E Ea cess Ne IT RM ROG ORERE 200 kee Beni 201 EN Tit E D cede eie treo ce ee cenae oe xard a AAEREN eR E DV RE 202 SYS Tem PRESet CHANnsI EXECUte 2 21i erra Loa tlc copus aa ERE EEN 202 SYSTem SEQUENCE EEN 202 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g IQAnalyzer gt IQAnalyzer2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA MSRT Master channel is selected Example INST SEL IQAnalyzer INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named IQAnalyzer and creates a new measurement channel named IQAnalyzer2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement ch
443. t Result gt numeric value EVM Default unit NONE Example READ BURS RMS SDEV Usage Query only For a detailed example see chapter 11 13 1 Programming Example Determining the EVM on page 365 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum FETCh BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency AVERage READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency CURRent READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency MAXimum READ BURSt MACCuracy FREQuency SDEViation This command starts the measurement and reads out the result of the Frequency Error When the measurement is started the R amp S FSW is automatically set to single sweep mode Further results of the measurement can then be queried without restart of the measurement via the FETCh BURSt subsystem For details on the Frequency Error see table 4 1 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 310 R amp S FSW K10 Remote Commands to Perform GSM Measurements DEEN Return values lt Result gt numeric value Frequency error Default unit Hz Example READ BURS FREQ SDEV Usage Query only FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance AVERage FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent FETCh BURSt MACCuracy IQlMbalance MAXimum FETCh BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance SDEViation READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance AVERage READ BURSIt MACCuracy IQlMbalance CURRent READ BURSIt M
444. t can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure S slot S First slot to measure Num ber of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value For equal timeslot length the expected offset For non equal time slots the measured offset See CONFigure MS CHANnel FRAMe EQUal on page 209 Default unit dBm Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 W Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 DELTatosync Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt LIMit FAIL READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt LIMit FAIL This command starts a Power vs Time measurement and queries the result of the limit check for the selected slot Further results
445. t etes 103 147 Magnitude Capture Evaluation method 2 n erecta 19 Results remote TRACE data ie ieget reverse redo querar Magnitude Error Evaluation method m rr deed 20 Results remote Marker table Gotifigurilig EE 173 Evaluation method e Marker to Trage 2 een ceder cere cicer deg 173 Markers Absolute peak 75 Assigned trace 173 Configuration remote 287 Configuring CH Configuring softkey wil TI Deactivating wl TS Delta markers we ATS Minimum sa ATO Peak 174 Positioning 174 Positioning remote 287 Querying position remote 944 Settings remote WEEN 285 State suis u72 UR 174 Table evaluation method 21 45 WY e 173 Max Peak citi ete Sort ILI duode 175 Maximizing Windows remote 2 nel 275 MCWN Average count 162 164 166 Carrier Power results trees 37 Carrier Power Table ertet 37 Carrier selection reference se 165 Configuration overview 141 Configuring s 139 Configuring remote 267 Continuous measurements sees 73 Evaluating results rernm 73 Eval ation Methods eer 35 Frequency remote 268 Frontend remote 267 Inner IM Table
446. t only Return values lt LimitLinePoints gt Absolute level values in dBm Usage Query only SCPI confirmed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA This command queries the y values of the specified limit line Suffix lt k gt 1 2 3 4 The limit line to query 1 upper limit line for MCWN wideband noise limit 2 lower limit line PvT Full Burst only for MCWN intermodulation limit at 100 kHz 3 MCWN only intermodulation limit at 300 kHz 4 MCWN only narrowband noise limit 11 8 10 Retrieving Results Return values lt LimitLinePoints gt Absolute level values in dBm Example See chapter 11 13 5 Programming Example Measuring the Wideband Noise for Multiple Carriers on page 375 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 See PvT Full Burst on page 28 See Spectrum Graph on page 36 MCWN Results The following commands are required to retrieve results from a multicarrier wideband noise measurement see chapter 4 2 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements on page 34 Useful commands for retrieving MCWN results described elsewhere chapter 11 8 9 Limit Check Results on page 329 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving MCWN results CALOCulate n LIMit k EXCeption COUNt CURRQ isses 333 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt MAXQ liess nennen hh 334 FETCh SPECtrum MODUlation EIMIEFAILE
447. t to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 See also chapter 5 6 Defining the Scope of the Measurement on page 53 Remote command CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet on page 254 Frame Configuration Select Slot to Configure This area shows a graphical representation of the configuration of each slot Select a slot to display its Slot dialog box see chapter 6 3 2 3 Slot Settings on page 95 For active slots the following information is shown e The burst type e g Normal NB for a normal burst e The modulation e g GMSK The training sequence TSC and Set For details on how to interpret the graphic see Frame configuration and slot scope in the channel bar on page 54 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration 6 3 6 2 Demodulation Settings Access Overview gt Demodulation gt Demodulation The demodulation settings provide additional information to optimize frame slot and symbol detection Demodulation Setting Slot Scope Frame Slot Demodulation Synchronization Burst TSC Measure only on Sync I Q Correlation Threshold 85 Gu Demodulation Symbol Decision Tail amp TSC Bits Ile Standard eler e LEE 130 Measire only OM e 131 I O Correlation Thresliold irt tte enn the nnne ke enn kenn 131 SV MUON Ope EE 131 Wali MSG BMS m 132 Synchronization Sets the synchronization mode of the R amp S FSW GSM application Burst TSC First search for
448. table may be empty in the following cases e The gap is too small 3 6 MHz twice the minimum offset of 1 8 MHz e ntermodulation measurement overrides wideband noise measurement Around every calculated intermodulation product frequency inside or outside the gap the R amp S FSW GSM application places an intermodulation measurement range of a certain bandwidth regardless whether intermodulation measurement is enabled or not Due to their more relaxed limits the IM measurement wins over the wideband noise measurement Thus many overlapping IM ranges can narrow down the wideband noise measurement segment until it is eliminated You can check this by activating only intermodulation IM order 3 and 5 OR only wideband measure ment and determining where a limit line is drawn and where there are none Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH IWID see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results FETCh WSPectrum WIDeband INNer ALL on page 340 Outer Wideband Table Displays the numeric results of the wideband noise measurement for the frequencies outside of the sub blocks but not in the gap Measurement offsets relative to outer most carriers are always greater than 1 8 MHz Note The results for the gap are displayed in the Inner Wideband Table R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays El 1 Spectrum Graph Start 935 8 MHz 10001 pts 2 84 MHz Stop 964 2 MHz 3 Outer Wide Band Table Segment Freqs Worst Result RBW 100 kHz
449. tation we use the term TSC to refer to the known symbol sequence in the middle of the slot The R amp S FSW GSM application supports measurement of the following signals e GMSK bursts using the TSCs from Set 1 or Set 2 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 50 AQPSK Modulation e AQPSK bursts with combinations of TSCs from Set 1 and 2 on the subchannels e AQPSK bursts with a user specified SCPIR The following measurements of the above signals are supported Power vs Time e Demod Modulation Accuracy EVM vs Time Phase Error vs Time Magnitude Error vs Time Constellation e Spectrum modulation transient including limit check Automatic trigger offset detection Restriction for auto frame configuration Auto Frame configuration only detects AQPSK normal bursts where the subchannels have a TSC according to table 5 3 The SCPIR value is detected with a resolution of 1 dB To obtain reliable measurement results on AQPSK normal bursts compare the auto detected slot settings with the settings of your device under test Table 5 3 Required subchannel TSC assignment for AQPSK auto frame configuration AQPSK Subchannel 2 TSC j Set 1 TSC j Set 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Sub TSC 0 x x x x cha i nnel Set 1 x x x x 1 1 2 x x x x 3 x x x x 4 x x x 5 X x X 6 x x x 7 x x x 5 4 AQPSK Modulation The AQPSK modulation sc
450. the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 126 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 251 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 202 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 86 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 202 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 86 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measureme
451. the left limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph mea surement and which offset frequencies in the table spectrum list measurement are checked against the limit This command affects the Modulation Spectrum and Tran sient Spectrum measurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals use either the check on the left or right side to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel and to ignore the side where adjacent channels are located Parameters for setting and query State 110 ON OFF 1 ON check limit 0 OFF do not check limit RST 1 Example CONF SPEC LIM LEFT OFF Manual operation See Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit on page 135 CONFigure SPECtrum LIMit RIGHt State This command controls the right limit check of the spectrum trace spectrum graph measurement and which offset frequencies in the table spectrum list measurement are checked against the limit This command affects the Modulation Spectrum and Transient Spectrum measurements Note For measurements on multicarrier signals use either the check on the left or right side to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel and to ignore the side where adjacent channels are located Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Parameters for setting and query lt State gt 110 ON OFF 1 ON check limit 0 OFF do not check limit RST 1 Example CONF SPEC LIM LEFT OFF
452. the lowermost carrier e frequencies to the right of the uppermost carrier The rows are sorted in ascending order of the absolute measurement frequency The frequency offsets are defined as offsets from the closest carrier i e the lowermost carrier of the lower sub block and the uppermost carrier of the upper sub block For Narrow Band Noise measurements the frequency offsets are lower than 1 8 MHz 400 kHz 600 kHz 1200 kHz Outer Narrow Band Noise results are shown for contiguous AND for non contiguous carrier allocation ES User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 41 Multicarrier Wideband Noise Measurements Outer Narrow band results Active carriers Inner Narrow band results lt 400 KHz gt lt 400 KHz f lt 600 KHz 600 KHz 1200 KHz 1200 KHz gt Fig 4 3 Narrowband noise results The following parameters are shown Table 4 13 Narrowband noise results Result Description Offset MHz Frequency offsets from the closest carrier at which distortion power is measured Freq MHz Absolute frequency of distortion product RBW kHz Resolution bandwidth used for measurement dB Relative power level to reference power measured at the distortion frequency dBm Absolute power level measured at distortion frequency A to Limit Power difference to limit defined in standard negative values indicate limit check fa
453. there would be an increase in EVM because the measured signal has a smaller bandwidth compared to the refer ence signal Define which PvT filter to use depending on whether the channel to be measured has a reduced or equal power compared to its adjacent channels see Power vs Time Filter on page 133 For single carrier measurements make sure the correct Device Type setting is selected so the correct PvT filter is used for the power measurement Optimizing Limit Checks If the limit checks fail unexpectedly check the following issues Excluding results from adjacent channels In limit checks for multicarrier spectrum measurements the frequencies from adja cent carriers in the signal may distort the results of the limit check for a single carrier If you only want to check the frequencies from a single carrier in a multicarrier signal disable the limit check for frequencies to the left or right of the carrier frequency of interest see Enable Left Limit Enable Right Limit on page 135 This allows you to measure the spectrum of the left or right most channel while ignoring the side where adjacent channels are located Make sure you select the correct Slot to Measure for Modulation Spectrum results see chapter 6 3 6 1 Slot Scope on page 127 Calculating limit lines according to the used DUT For multicarrier measurements ensure that the DUT is configured correctly see chapter 6 3 2 2 Frame on page 92 The number of acti
454. time This is illustrated in Figure 5 7 3 of the standard document 3GPP TS 45 010 which is reproduced below for convenience figure 5 17 Due to this requirement the middle of TSC or center of Active Part shall be used as the reference time when specifying timeslot alignment Additionally the middle of TSC is used for the alignment of the Power vs Time limit masks see also Limit Line Time Alignment on page 133 Timeslot Alignment Normal Symbol Period Burst Reduced Symbol Period Burst Fig 5 17 Timing alignment between normal symbol period and reduced symbol period bursts As described in chapter 5 9 Definition of the Symbol Period on page 60 the middle of TSC can be defined with respect to symbol periods and symbol decision instants This is illustrated in figure 5 18 You can see that for normal symbol period bursts Nor mal bursts the middle of TSC for GMSK occurs exactly at the decision instant of sym bol 74 However for EDGE it occurs between the decision instants of symbols 73 and 74 while for reduced symbol period bursts Higher Symbol Rate bursts it occurs exactly at the decision instant of symbol 88 EDGE Symbol 73 Decision GMSK Symbol 74 Decision EDGE Symbol 74 Decision Middle of Midamble Symbol 88 Decision Normal Symbol Periods Reduced Symbol Periods Fig 5 18 Middle of TSC for normal and reduced symbol period bursts Timeslot alignment within the frame The standard do
455. time TSO and TS1 or Any other timeslot TS4 and TS5 slot palr TS4 and TS5 patr reduced symbol 9 25 8 25 11 1 9 9 period to normal symbol period reduced symbol 9 5 8 5 11 4 10 2 period to reduced symbol period 5 12 Delta to Sync Values The Delta to Sync value is defined as the distance between the mid of the TSC and the TSC of the Slot to Measure The results are provided in the unit NSP which stands for Normal Symbol Period i e the duration of one symbol using a normal symbol rate approx 3 69us The mea sured Delta to Sync values have a resolution of 0 02 NSP These values are either assumed to be constant according to the 3GPP standard or measured depending on the setting of the Limit Line Time Alignment parameter Slot to measure or Per Slot According to the standard see Timeslot length in 3GPP TS 45 010 there are either eight slots of equal length 156 25 NSP or slot O and slot 4 have a length of 157 NSP while all other slots have a length of 156 NSP For details see chapter 5 11 Timeslot Alignment on page 65 The timeslot length is defined as the distance between the centers of the TSCs in suc cessive slots By setting the Limit Time Alignment parameter to Per Slot the Delta to Sync values can be measured and used in order to verify the timeslot lenghts Setting the Limit Line Time Alignment to Slot to measure displays the expected val ues according to the standar
456. tings described elsewhere CONFigure MS ARFCn on page 233 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 233 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 234 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 234 Remote commands exclusive to frequency settings in MCWN measurements EE eu SPAN EE 268 SENSES FREQUENCY SPAN le REN 268 SENSe PREQUency STARE E 269 SENSe FREQUEnCy STOP cicer fene EN E en NE RRERQRSR a dexR RD DMU EURO SD S EET dE 269 SENSe FREQuency SPAN Span This command defines the frequency span Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Span on page 150 SENSe FREQuency SPAN MODE Mode This command sets the span for the MCWN measurement to a predefined value Parameters Mode TXBand The span for the MCWN measurement is set to the TX band 2 MHz for single carrier BTS or MS or 10 MHz for multicar rier BTS device types CNARrow The span is set to the span of the active carriers plus a margin of 1 8 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for narrowband noise measurements CWIDe The span is set to the span of the active carriers plus a margin of 6 MHz to either side This setting is suitable for narrowband noise and most of the wideband noise and intermodulation measurements MANual the frequency span is defined by a start and stop frequency or a center frequency and span RST TXB 11 6 3 11 6 4 Configuring and Performing MCWN Measurements Example
457. tion The default GSM UO measurement captures the UO data from the GSM signal and determines various characteristic signal parameters such as the modulation accuracy transient spectrum trigger to sync etc in just one measurement see chapter 4 1 GSM I Q Measurement Results on page 17 For multicarrier wideband noise MCWN measurements a different configuration is required see chapter 6 4 Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Measurements on page 139 The settings required to configure each of these measurements are described here Selecting the measurement type gt To select a different measurement type do one of the following e Select the Overview softkey In the Overview select the Select Measure ment button Select the required measurement e Press the MEAS key In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement Remote command CONFigure MEASurement on page 203 e Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function ssss 85 e Ee d UTC d DE 87 e Modulation Accuracy Measurement Confguratton eese 87 e Multicarrier Wideband Noise MCWN Meaesuremenmts AAA 139 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application These settings include the input source the type of data to be processed I Q or RF data frequency and l
458. tional Digital Baseband interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 105 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 106 Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 1 uv to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 105 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT lt Unit gt Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 105 The availa bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt Level gt VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 105 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This co
459. tions actually were used The limit check compares the number of employed exceptions with the number of maximum allowed exceptions Note that the maximum number of exceptional bands is based on the total number of bands included in the following Exception ranges However if the defined measurement span does not comprise all the bands in these ranges the maximum is not valid In this case the measurement may pass the limit check although too many exceptions occurred for the restricted span To ensure the correct span is used select FREQ gt Frequency Config gt TX band see Setting the Span to Specific Values Automatically on page 150 Exception ranges Exceptions are defined for two frequency ranges Carriers Af Ss 2 MHz Range A Af s 2 MHz Af lt 10 0 MHz 1 pic af lt 10 0 MHz gt Range B Fig 5 21 Exception ranges for multicarrier BTS limit checks Range A e For multicarrier BTS device types Bands with an offset of 0 Hz to 2 MHz from the Tx band edges are counted Bands containing third order IM products and adjacent bands are ignored For the exact details see 3GPP TS 51 021 chapter 6 12 3 Forother device types Bands in a distance of 600 kHz to 6 MHz above and below the outermost carrier are counted For the exact details see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 6 2 1 4 1 The suffix required to query the number of exceptions in range A using remote com
460. tire dtr en ER Fen PE dvd ss 54 Transient Spectrum eet rre 136 Reference powers MOWN RTE 75 Reference time cce tte eet eet etre 65 IgM deed ee edd 54 Refreshing MSRA applications ortnm 126 MSRA applications remote ssessss 293 MSRT applications remote ti ife ci Remote commands Basics on syntax Boolean values niit pate Gapitalizatlol icit er rere nitentes Character data d i Dataiblocks 5 eode niii AG N tneric Values oerte reset ettet Optional keywords is lei E cu M uc d Resetting RF input protection erectio ette ente 220 Restoring Channel settings uiri trn ttt Result displays 5 re erre tea Carrier Power Table Constellation E Default EI EVM later IM Table 2 re eet Inner Narrow Band Table ss snneeeesneeeessenseerressreesee 40 Inner Spectrum Table Magnitude Capture 5 nenne Magnitude Enron tret ette certes Marker table MOWN Spectrum Graph eren 36 Modulation Accuracy see 21 Modulation Spectrum Graph sssessssss 23 Modulation Spectrum Table 24 Outer IM Table 5 m mter tnmen 38 Outer Spectrum Table 40 43 Phase Error ariris aai evidi ivin 26 PowWer vs SlOt i e eene reae 27 PVT Full Burst 2 28 see also Evaluation methods r4 Transient Spectrum Graph
461. to Automatically selects the symbol decision method 6 3 7 6 3 7 1 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Linear Linear symbol decision Uses inverse filtering a kind of zero forcing filter and a symbol wise decision method This method is recommen ded for high symbol to noise ratios but not for higher symbol rate bursts with a narrow pulse The inverse filter colors the noise inside the signal bandwidth and therefore is not recommended for narrow band signals or signals with a low signal to noise ratio Peaks in the EVM vs Time measurement see EVM on page 18 may occur if the Linear symbol decision algorithm fails In that case use the Sequence method Linear is the fastest option Sequence Symbol decision via sequence estimation This method uses an algo rithm that minimizes the symbol errors of the entire burst It requires that the tail bits in the analyzed signal are correct It has a better per formance lower symbol error rate compared to the Linear method especially at low signal to noise ratios but with a loss of measure ment speed This method is recommended for normal bursts with 16QAM or 32QAM modulation and for Higher Symbol Rate bursts with a narrow pulse Tip Use this setting if it reduces the EVM RMS measurement result Remote command CONFigure MS DEMod DECision on page 257 Tail amp TSC Bits The demodulator in the R amp S FSW GSM application requires the bits of the
462. tor 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt SerialNo gt Serial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 109 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters lt Mode gt Manual operation SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle See Microbutton Action on page 109 Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt Return values lt Name gt Usage 1 213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported us
463. u query text parameters the system returns its short form Common Suffixes Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In the GSM application the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description m 1 4 Marker n 1 16 Window lt s gt 0 7 Slot
464. uation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 113 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 113 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 238 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts th
465. uous carriers oh 101 EE 101 Ree 101 Wee Fe 10 EE 101 Carrier Allocation Defines whether a multicarrier measurement setup contains one subblock of regularly spaced carriers only contiguous or two subblocks of carriers with a gap inbetween non contiguous Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration For details see chapter 5 15 2 Contiguous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation on page 73 Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation on page 219 Gap start after carrier Non contiguous carriers only For non contiguous setups see Carrier Allocation the position of the gap must be defined as the number of the active carrier after which the gap starts Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier FALLocation NCONtiguous GSACarrier on page 219 Active carriers Defines which of the defined carriers are active for the current measurement Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier c STATe on page 217 Frequency Defines the absolute frequency of each active carrier Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt FREQuency on page 217 Modulation Defines the burst type modulation and pulse shape filter of each active carrier For possible combinations see chapter 5 8 Dependency of Slot Parameters on page 59 Note This setting determines the appropriate limits from the 3GPP standard Remote command CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt c gt MTYPe on page 218 6 3 3 Input
466. uous vs Non Contiguous Multicarrier Allocation 73 e Manual Reference Power Definition for MCWN Meaesurements 75 e limit Check for MOWN Resulis rtc ee e es t Ee rt er es tt 76 Jnteimodulatiom CaleulatlOFE reri er vr aaa ties c e ed ere ia Fete i a 78 e Wideband Noise Measurement nennen enne nnne nennen nin 80 MCWN Measurement Process The MCWN measurement consists of several sub measurements and may include averaging processes Reference measurement Optionally a reference measurement is carried out to obtain suitable reference power values for the actual noise measurement The reference measurement can determine the reference powers of the active carrier with the maximum power level or optionally measure just one selected carrier Several reference measurements can be performed subsequently to calculate an average thus ensuring stable reference values Usually a small average count 10 12 is sufficient to obtain suitable results for the reference measurement If this reference measurement is disabled user defined reference values are used for relative results in the final measurement Narrowband noise measurement If enabled the narrowband noise is measured next Narrowband noise measurement is only available for multicarrier device types see Device Type on page 91 for which at least 2 carriers are configured see chapter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 This measurement consists of zero span sweeps at a nu
467. urement can then be queried without performing a new measurement via the FETCh BURSt command Suffix lt Slot gt lt 0 7 gt Slot number to measure power on The selected slot s must be within the slot scope i e First slot to measure s First slot to measure Number of Slots to measure 1 Return values lt Result gt numeric value Crest factor Default unit dB Retrieving Results Example Preset the instrument RST Enter the GSM option K10 INSTrument SELect GSM Switch to single sweep mode and stop measurement INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt Set the slot scope Use all 8 slots for the PvT measurement Number of slots to measure 8 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots NOFSlots 8 First Slot to measure 0 CONFigure MS CHANnel MSLots OFFSet 0 W Activate PvT Power vs Time measurement LAY ADD 1 LEFT PTF Note READ starts a new single sweep mode and then reads the results Use FETCh to query several results READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT1 CURRent CRESt Usage Query only Manual operation See Power vs Slot on page 27 FETCh BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt s gt CURRent MAXimum READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent MAXimum This command starts the measurement to read out the maximum power for the selected slot in the current frame This command is only available when the Power vs Time measurement is selected see PvT Full Burst on page 28 Further results of the m
468. ustrated in the lower part of fig ure 5 13 where it can be seen that the decision instant corresponding to the center of the transmit pulse occurs in the center of the first symbol period i e at t 0 5T EDGE Transmit Pulse a 15 E o N E 1 o E e S 05 lt i 2 1 D 1 2 3 4 5 Time Symbol Periods First Transmitted Symbol Amplitude P 1 5 r o E H Decision Instant E 1 o E a 3 05 KS Symbol Period 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Time Symbol Periods Fig 5 13 EDGE transmit pulse top and the first transmitted symbol bottom The description above also applies to the 16QAM and 32QAM modulations defined for EDGE Evolution using the normal symbol rate QPSK 16QAM and 32QAM Modulation Higher Symbol Rate For the newer reduced symbol period higher symbol rate the standard document 3GPP TS 45 004 defines two transmit pulse shapes the so called narrow and wide pulses The narrow pulse is the same linearised GMSK pulse as described in chapter 5 9 2 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM AQPSK Modulation Normal Symbol Rate on page 61 while the wide pulse was designed based on a numerically optimized set of discrete filter coefficients Both narrow and wide pulse shapes are illustrated at the top of figure 5 14 where you can see that the center of the pulse occurs at 3T with T being the reduced symbol period For a sequence of symbols 4 the transmitted sig nal is defined in the standard as Synchronization y t
469. ut 116 121 155 161 Remote control T Settings ice terrere rere toe rr hg 52 silo 121 160 242 T igger level rtt ette 120 160 External trigger remote A 241 UO Power remote we 241 IF Power remote 241 RF Power remote teg 242 Tigger SOUNGE ern epe tern te 118 158 E EE 118 158 Free Run sis 118 158 le EG 119 IF Power ve 159 MSRA 158 PWET SONSOF m 119 nud de id E 119 159 TIME 23e roten Ecran ec E e ebat d gla ate cerdos 120 Trigger to Sync Graph evaluation method A 32 Remote control we GOT Results remote 303 Table evaluation Method ccc cceceeeesteeeeeeeeeeee 34 Triggering MEWN remote eese ettet 269 Troubleshooting gre PEE 192 Input overload 220 aC M 190 TSG aes 50 98 379 EICH 99 Defallli ion ene Gee 140 Defining remote control wi 214 DEPENGENCY E 59 BIEfe ilo nasini aia s 99 Llimit line time alignment 2 133 Middle Of Jis ted neret tr Cete te redd 66 Reference signal 2 492 Slot alighiment ugesot 65 Synchronization EE 130 BEE PE 98 99 U WIE UDIRE disisi aeeiiaii t net tee eR conte 379 Units Reference level sssssssssseeees 113 152 Updating Result display eegener 126 Result display remote sssssssss 293 Uplink Userful part Slot tracer titt reet ec nete etate 327 User E T
470. ut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 225 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 225 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face e Level and unit that corresponds to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 224 Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Ana log Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration Input Settings Frequency Digital IQ I Q Mode Input Config Analog Baseband High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF IQ File Signal Path Analog I jQ NCO Se E x H E For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Analog Baseband Input Staley iocos crece tea rte i
471. utomatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value For the R amp S FSW85 the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 238 INPut EATT AUTO on page 238 INPut EATT on page 237 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For details see chapter 6 3 3 1 Input Source Settings on page 101 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power 6 3 3 4 Modulation Accuracy Measurement Configuration For R amp S FSW26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSWS or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30
472. val ues indicated in Reference powers relative to power level for various modulation types for the used modulation to determine the reference power levels Table 5 8 Reference powers relative to power level for various modulation types Modulation RBW 300 kHz RBW 100 kHz RBW 30 kHz NB GMSK 0 3 dB 2 2 dB 7 8 dB NB 8PSK 1 7 dB 3 8 dB 7 7 dB NB 16QAM 2 8 dB 4 5 dB 8 6 dB NB 32QAM 2 9 dB 5 0 dB 9 3 dB NB AQPSK SCPIR 0 dB 2 5 dB 4 0 dB 8 5 dB HSR N QPSK 1 9 dB 3 9 dB 8 2 dB HSR N 16QAM 3 0 dB 4 7 dB 8 7 dB HSR N 32QAM 3 5 dB 5 5 dB 10 0 dB HSR W QPSK 1 6 dB 5 0 dB 10 0 dB User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 75 R amp S FSW K10 Basics on GSM Measurements TE Modulation RBW 300 kHz RBW 100 kHz RBW 30 kHz HSR W 16QAM 3 1 dB 5 5 dB 10 3 dB HSR W 32QAM 3 1 dB 6 1 dB 11 3 dB Example For a normal burst 8PSK signal for example and a power level of 35 dBm the refer ence values according to table 5 8 would be RBW Reference power 300 kHz 35 dBm 1 7 dB 33 3 dBm 100 kHz 35 dBm 3 8 dB 31 2 dBm 30 kHz 35 dBm 7 7 dB 27 3 dBm 5 15 4 Limit Check for MCWN Results For MCWN measurements various limit lines are calculated e Wideband noise limits e Limits for intermodulation products that have to be measured with an RBW of 100 kHz e Limits for intermodulation products that have to be mea
473. ve the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 175 Analyzing GSM Measurements 11 7 2 3 Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These commands are described here DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelAUlTO eene 289 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum eeeeseee eene 289 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum eeeeeeeeee eee 290 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVISION 2 ccceeeececee ene 290 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition seen 290 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue cesses 291 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum sese 291 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MlNimum eeeeeeeee n 291 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO State If enabled the Y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement Suffix t irrelevant Parameters for setting and query State OFF Switch the function off ON Switch the function on RST ON Manual operation See Automatic Grid Scaling on page 176 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value of the y axi
474. ve carriers and the specified BTS class affect the calculation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum measurement Aligning the limit line correctly The limit line defined by the standard must be aligned to the measured slots The align ment can either be determined individually for each slot or the entire line is aligned according to the Slot to Measure see Limit Line Time Alignment on page 133 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 191 10 4 Error Messages The standard requires that the entire line be aligned according to the Slot to Measure However in this case the Delta to Sync value will be identical for all slots in the scope see table 4 7 Note that the R amp S FSW GSM application assumes that all slots have equal length If they do not disable this setting in the Frame settings see Equal Timeslot Length on page 94 so the limit line is aligned to the slots correctly For non standard signals or if you require more precise delta values use the Time Alignment Per Slot setting Error Messages The following error messages may be displayed in the status bar of the R amp S FSW GSM application Check these descriptions for possible error causes and solutions Burst not found Sve MOE TOWN i eege gege dd Burst not found Possible causes Possible solutions Training sequence TSC or sync is not defined cor rectly Check the TSC sync definition in Slot setti
475. ved files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the UO data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xm1 Contains meta information about the UO data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single I Q parameter XML file inside an ig tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex f10oat32 Contains the binary UO data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e UO preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser UO Data File Format iq tar A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt A 2 4 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the
476. ven tolerance frame length error If this is not the case however for example if a frame is too short the application cannot synchronize to further frames after the initial search Frequency hopping can lead to the same problem as successive frames may not be detected on the measured frequency channel Timeslot Alignment Sync Search 1 Sync Search 2 Sync Found NO cai ms Capture Fig 5 16 Failed synchronization due to frame length error and resulting false search area A special Measure only on sync option ensures that only those sections of the cap tured signal are processed further for which synchronization was possible thus improv ing performance For frequency hopping signals it is recommended that you use a power trigger to ensure capture starts with an active frame External trigger When using an external trigger source the application assumes that the trigger offset is set such that the GSM frame start is aligned with the start of a capture Therefore only narrow searches are performed from the beginning of the Synchronization proc ess for power trigger or free run mode 5 11 Timeslot Alignment Reference Time The definition of a reference time is necessary for the following description of timeslot alignment In the standard document 3GPP TS 45 010 in Section 5 7 it is stated that Irrespective of the symbol duration used the center of the training sequence shall occur at the same point in
477. vice type is defined using the CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE on page 204 command Parameters for setting and query lt NofActCarriers gt RST 1 Default unit NONE Example New program CONFigure MS DEVice TYPE MCBWide CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRierl STATe ON CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier2 STATe ON CONFigure MS MCARrier CARRier lt NofActCarriers gt STATe ON CONFigure MS MCARrier BTSClass lt BTSClass gt This command defines the base station class The specified BTS Class effects the cal culation of the limits according to the 3GPP standard for the modulation spectrum mea surement see 3GPP2 TS 45 005 chapter 4 2 1 Spectrum due to modulation and wide band noise and chapter 4 3 2 Base Transceiver Station search for Multicarrier BTS Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Parameters for setting and query lt BTSClass gt Range 1 to 2 RST 1 Default unit NONE Example CONF MCAR BTSClass CONFigure MS MCARrier FILTer lt Type gt This command controls the filter used to reduce the measurement bandwidth for multi carrier Power vs Time measurements Deprecated Commands Commands for Compatibility Parameters for setting and query lt Type gt MC400 MC300 MC400 Recommended for measurements with multi channels of equal power MC300 Recommended for measurement scenarios where a total of six channels is active and the channel to be measured has a reduced power
478. vs time READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot LIMit FAIL on page 325 trace of the slot defined by the standard Delta to The distance between the mid of the TSC READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot DELTatosync on page 324 Sync and the TSC of the Slot to Measure NSP NSP stands for Normal Symbol Period i e the duration of one symbol using a normal symbol rate approx 3 69us The measured Delta to Sync value has a resolution of 0 02 NSP For details see chapter 5 12 Delta to Sync Values on page 68 Power Average power in slot in current or all frames READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot CURRent AVERage Avg on page 321 dBm READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot ALL AVERage on page 319 Power Maximum power in slot in current or all READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot CURRent MAXimum Peak frames on page 323 dBm READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt ALL MAXimum on page 320 Crest Crest factor in slot in current or all frames i e READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT lt Slot gt CURRent CRESt dB Power Peak Power Avg on page 322 READ BURSt SPOWer SLOT Slot ALL CRESt on page 319 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PST see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results chapter 11 8 6 Power vs Slot Results on page 318 PvT Full Burst The Power vs Time evaluation determines the power of all slots bursts in the selected slot scope and performs a limit check of the power vs time trace against the specified PvT mask
479. w list to test mobile devices use the wide list for base station tests e Select the reference power to be used to determine the relative limit values for the transient spectrum For measurements strictly according to standard use the RMS setting 10 Select the Display Config button and select one or more of the following displays for spectrum results up to a total of 16 windows e Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 Modulation Spectrum Table on page 24 Transient Spectrum Graph on page 30 Transient Spectrum Table on page 31 Tips e Also display the Magnitude Capture for a general overview of the measured data e Use the graph displays for a general overview of the currently measured spec trum the tables provide detailed numeric values and an accurate conform ance check of the DUT to the GSM standard R amp S9FSW K10 How to Perform Measurements in the GSM Application pa H Hei e The modulation spectrum shows the spectrum for a portion of a burst in a single slot see Modulation Spectrum Graph on page 23 the transient spec trum shows the spectrum for all slots in the slot scope including the rising and falling edges of the bursts Arrange the windows on the display to suit your preferences 11 Exit the SmartGrid mode 12 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform
480. wed depending on the selected frequency band Default unit NONE Example CONF ARFC 5 Manual operation See ARFCN on page 111 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency If you change the frequency the R amp S FSW updates the ARFCN accordingly Parameters lt Frequency gt The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Configuring and Performing GSM UO Measurements Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 108 See Center Frequency on page 111 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 111 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the center fr
481. wer trigger can speed up measurements To perform measurements the R amp S FSW GSM application needs the frame start as a time refer ence The R amp S FSW GSM application searches for a frame start after every UO data acquisition The required search effort depends on the trigger mode Defining the Scope of the Measurement Consider the following trigger mode settings n Free Run mode i e without any trigger the R amp S FSW GSM application totally relies on the frame slot configuration to find the frame start The start of a measure ment is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started imme diately For an unambiguous frame configuration the GSM application searches for the frame start inside the captured UO data This is the slowest frame search mode With a Power Trigger the measurement is triggered by the power ramp of the received GSM bursts Nevertheless the R amp S FSW GSM application still relies on the frame slot configuration to find the frame start inside the captured UO data Once a measurement is completed the R amp S FSW GSM application waits for the next trigger event to start the next measurement The search for the frame start is as in Free Run mode except that the UO data capture is triggered e With the External Trigger the measurement is triggered by an external signal connected to the EXT TRIGGER input of the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW GSM application assumes that the frame sta
482. with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 228 Input Configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all four Analog Base band connectors or as a plain UO signal via two simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Single Ended l Q data only Differential l Q and inverse 1 Q data Not available for R amp S FSW85 Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 227 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals Note Prerequisites for previous models of R amp S FSW For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 special prerequisites and restrictions apply for high accuracy timing To obtain this high timing precision trigger port 1 and port 2 must be connected via the Cable for High Accuracy Timing order number 1325 3777 00 e As trigger port 1 and port 2 are connected via the cable only trigger port 3 can be used to trigger a measurement e Trigger port 2 is configured as output if the high accuracy timing option is active Make sure not to activate this option if you use trigger port 2 in your measurement setup e When you first enable this setting you are prompted t
483. xceptions lt current gt PASS FAIL Number of bands with exceptions in range B currently maximum detected vs maximum allowed provided only if exceptions are enabled lt k gt 6 User Manual 1173 9263 02 12 36 R amp S FSW K10 Measurements and Result Displays Note Markers are now available in the Spectrum Graph result display Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH WSFDomain see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 276 Results TRACe DATA TRACel1 see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 298 Limit results FETCh SPECtrum MODulation LIMit FAIL on page 334 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 330 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA on page 330 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA on page 332 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt CURR on page 333 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt EXCeption COUNt MAX on page 334 Carrier Power Table Displays the measured power levels and reference powers of all active carriers 2 Carrier Power Table Carrier Power Level Reference Power dBm No Freq MHz dBm RBW 300 kHz RBW 100 kHz RBW 30 kHz max 1 p ale f 11 9 10 2 5 7 11 9 10 1 11 9 10 1 11 9 10 1 11 8 10 1 The following parameters are shown Table 4 11 Carrier power measurement results Parameter Description Carrier No Active carrier number as defined in chapter 6 3 2 4 Carrier Settings on page 99 Additional labels
484. y OSUPpress MAXimum cessent 313 READ BURSIt MACCuracy OSUPpress SDEViation esses eee 313 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile EVM ueeeeise ces lese eese ehe 313 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile EVM aes ciiiisesi eese canens anas asas nan 313 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile MERROr sess 314 READ BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile MERROr sess 314 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERCentile PERROTF sees se eene nsn sanas nnn h aita 314 READ BURStEMACCuracy PERCentile PERROT eene iea 314 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK AVERQQ ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeanaaaeeeeeneeenenes 314 FETChH BURSt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK CURRGME 1 cccccctevieeceneissacaccdienenedatetineadieass 314 FETCHBURGOC MAC CuracvlPERbRor PEAkK MAvimum eene 314 FETCh BURSt MACCuracy PERROr PEAK SDEViation ienis 314 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtEbRb or DEAkK AVEhRage erer ererererorerererersnnenn 314 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtERb orPDEAkK CURent cconair 314 READ BURSIt MACCuracy PERRor PEAK MAXimum eese nnne 314 READ BURG MAC CuracvlPtbRbor PDEAkK GDEVMiatlon senese eeeseeorerererernrrrnrr rnrn rrn nne 314 FETCh BURSI MACCuracy PERRor RMS AVERage sss 315 FETCh BURSI MAGCuracy PERRor RMS CURRent 2 1 lees eeve se cce aaa ed onu dadas 315 FETOCH BURG MAC CuracvlPERbRor RMG MANImum nnne 315 FETCHBURGOCMACCuracvlP
485. y one evaluation is provided The frequency range of the fre quency list however can be configured to be wider or narrower see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 136 The RBW and VBW are then adapted accordingly Note RBW at 1800 kHz As opposed to previous Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spectrum analyzers in which the RBW at 1800 kHz was configurable the R amp S FSW configures the RBW and VBW automatically according to the selected frequency list see Modulation Spectrum Table Frequency List on page 136 For the Modulation Spectrum Graph both the RBW and VBW are set to 30 kHz For the Modulation Spectrum Table they are set according to table 4 6 depending on the measured Device Type and the number of active carriers as defined in the Signal Description settings Table 4 6 RBW settings for Modulation Spectrum Table measurements according to standard Offset Single carrier BTS Multicarrier BTS Multicarrier BTS MS mode N 1 N gt 1 lt 1 8 MHz 30 kHz 30 kHz 9 30 kHz 2 30 kHz 4 1 8 MHz 30 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 3 100 kHz 9 gt 1 8 MHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 100 kHz 3 100 kHz 9 1 See 3GPP TS 51 021 8 6 5 1 2 c d 2 See 3GPP TS 51 021 8 6 12 2 3 See 3GPP TS 51 021 8 6 5 1 2 f 4 See 3GPP TS 51 010 1 8 13 4 4 2 f and 3GPP TS45 005 8 4 2 1 3 table a1 c4 5 See 3GPP TS 51 010 1 8 13 4 4 2 d and 3GPP TS 45 005 4 2 1 3 Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2
486. zation process for power trigger or free run mode If a power trigger or no trigger is used free run mode the synchronization process consists of the following steps 1 Beginning at the start of a capture the application searches for the synchronization pattern or TSC of the Slot to Measure within one GSM frame length This search must be performed over the entire area as the time of occurrance of the TSC within the signal is not known Thus it is referred to as a wide search 2 Once the synchronization point has been found the application checks whether enough samples remain in the capture buffer in order to analyze another frame If so the process continues with the next step Otherwise a new capture is started and the process begins with step 1 again 3 Assuming the signal is periodic the synchronization point in the signal is moved by exactly one GSM frame length From there a narrow search for the next TSC is performed within only a small search area Thus the remaining frames in the capture buffer can be synchronized quickly after the initial wide search Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until all frames have been detected Sync Search 1 Sync Search 2 Syne Found YES Ame rete qoem Tr Frame Length Error E ms Capture Fig 5 15 Synchronization using wide and narrow searches Synchronization errors The process described above assumes the GSM frame length in the signal is periodic within a gi

R&S®FSW-K10 GSM Measurements User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;FSW-K10 GSM Measurements User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®FSW-K10 GSM Measurements User Manual